Micom P220: P220/En T/C43

MiCOM P220
Motor Protection
P220/EN T/C43
Technical Guide
Technical Guide P220/EN T/C43
MiCOM P220 Page 1/2
MOTOR PROTECTION
MiCOM P220
CONTENT
Safety Section Pxxxx/EN SS/G11
Getting Started P220/EN GS/B43
Connection Diagram P220/EN CO/C43
Technical Data P220/EN TD/B43
Application Guide P220/EN AP/B43
User Guide P220/EN FT/B43
Menu of the HMI P220/EN HI/B43
Communication P220/EN GC/B43
Default Setting Value P220/EN SV/B43
Installation Guide P220/EN IN/B43
Commissioning and Maintenance P220/EN CM/B43
Test Report P220/EN RS/B43

P220/EN T/C43 Technical Guide
Page 2/2 MiCOM P220
BLANK PAGE
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
SAFETY SECTION
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
Safety Section Page 1/8
STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS AND EXTERNAL

LABEL INFORMATION FOR SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
EQUIPMENT
1. INTRODUCTION 3
2. HEALTH AND SAFETY 3
3. SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT 4

3.1 Symbols 4
3.2 Labels 4
4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING 4
5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL 7
6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY 8

6.1 Protective fuse rating 8
6.2 Protective Class 8
6.3 Installation Category 8
6.4 Environment 8
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
Page 2/8 Safety Section
BLANK PAGE
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
1. INTRODUCTION
This guide and the relevant equipment documentation provide full information on safe
handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment. This Safety Guide also includes
descriptions of equipment label markings.
Documentation for equipment ordered from Schneider Electric is despatched separately from
manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore this guide is
provided to ensure that printed information which may be present on the equipment is fully
understood by the recipient.
The technical data in this safety guide is typical only, see the technical data section of the
relevant product publication(s) for data specific to a particular equipment.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the
contents of this Safety Guide and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is
installed, commissioned or serviced.
Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some
equipment.
2. HEALTH AND SAFETY

The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure
that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with
the contents of that Safety Section, or this Safety Guide.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts
of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may
endanger personnel and equipment and also cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:
• Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and
of the system to which it is being connected;
• Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorised to energize and de-energize equipment and
to isolate, ground, and label it;
• Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety
engineering practices;
• Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

The equipment documentation gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and
operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include
detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take
any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate Schneider Electric technical
sales office and request the necessary information.
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
3. SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

For safety reasons the following symbols and external labels, which may be used on the
equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before the
equipment is installed or commissioned.
3.1 Symbols
Caution: refer to equipment documentation Caution: risk of electric shock
Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth)

terminal.
Note: This symbol may also be used for a
Protective Conductor (Earth) Terminal if that
terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-
assembly e.g. power supply.
*NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS GUIDE IS THE

DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM
GROUND.
3.2 Labels
See Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M/G11) for equipment labelling information.
4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Equipment connections
Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this
equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety.
The equipment documentation should be consulted before installing,
commissioning, or servicing the equipment.
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may
present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.
The clamping screws of all terminal block connectors, for field wiring, using M4
screws shall be tightened to a nominal torque of 1.3 Nm.
Equipment intended for rack or panel mounting is for use on a flat surface of a
Type 1 enclosure, as defined by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also
electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD)
precautions are not taken.
If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by
all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards.
Voltage and current connections shall be made using insulated crimp terminations
to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety.
Watchdog (self-monitoring) contacts are provided in numerical relays to indicate
the health of the device. Schneider Electric strongly recommends that these
contacts are hardwired into the substation's automation system, for alarm
purposes.
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool
for the wire size should be used.
The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection
diagram.
Protection Class I Equipment
- Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective
conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the
supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment.
- The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since
the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be
lost.
- When the protective (earth) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to
terminate cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the
protective (earth) conductor is checked after the addition or removal of
such functional earth connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the
protective (earth) connections should be ensured by use of a locknut or
similar.
The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm²
(3.3 mm² for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section
of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring
regulations.
The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short
as possible.
All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that
are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs
and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are
connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be
connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.
Before energizing the equipment, the following should be checked:
- Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation),
- CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections,
- Protective fuse rating,
- Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where
applicable),
- Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the application.
Accidental touching of exposed terminals
If working in an area of restricted space, such as a cubicle, where there is a risk of
electric shock due to accidental touching of terminals which do not comply with
IP20 rating, then a suitable protective barrier should be provided.
Equipment use
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts,
which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed.
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
UL and CSA/CUL Listed or Recognized equipment

To maintain UL and CSA/CUL Listing/Recognized status for North America the
equipment should be installed using UL or CSA Listed or Recognized parts for
the following items: connection cables, protective fuses/fuseholders or circuit
breakers, insulation crimp terminals and replacement internal battery, as
specified in the equipment documentation.
For external protective fuses a UL or CSA Listed fuse shall be used. The Listed
type shall be a Class J time delay fuse, with a maximum current rating of 15 A
and a minimum d.c. rating of 250 Vd.c., for example type AJT15.
Where UL or CSA Listing of the equipment is not required, a high rupture
capacity (HRC) fuse type with a maximum current rating of 16 Amps and a
minimum d.c. rating of 250 Vd.c. may be used, for example Red Spot type NIT or
TIA.
Equipment operating conditions
The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and
environmental limits.
Current transformer circuits
Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced
may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. Generally, for safety,
the secondary of the line CT must be shorted before opening any connections to
it.
For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block
for current transformer termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the
module. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required, the
equipment documentation should be checked to see if this applies.
For equipment with pin-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for
current transformer termination does NOT have automatic CT shorting on removal
of the module.
External resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs)
Where external resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs), are fitted
to the equipment, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched.
Battery replacement
Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended
type and be installed with the correct polarity to avoid possible damage to the
equipment, buildings and persons.
Insulation and dielectric strength testing
Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the
end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to
discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.
Insertion of modules and pcb cards
Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the
equipment whilst it is energized, since this may result in damage.
Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards
Extender cards are available for some equipment. If an extender card is used,
this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized.
This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may
be accessible on the extender card.
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
External test blocks and test plugs

Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs such
as the MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM P990 types, hazardous voltages may be
accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the
insertion or removal of MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
*Note: When a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM P991 Test
Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically shorted, making
them safe.
Fiber optic communication
Where fiber optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed
directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or
signal level of the device.
Cleaning
The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water,
when no connections are energized. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally
protected by petroleum jelly, which should not be removed.
5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

De-commissioning
The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the
supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely
isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the
capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to
de-commissioning.
Disposal
It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided.
The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment
containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking
precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of
operation, may apply to the disposal of the equipment.
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

Unless otherwise stated in the equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable.
6.1 Protective fuse rating
The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 16A,
high rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent. Unless otherwise
stated in equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable. The protective fuse
should be located as close to the unit as possible.
CAUTION - CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may
produce lethal hazardous voltages.
6.2 Protective Class
IEC 60255-27: 2005 Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment

documentation). This equipment requires a protective
EN 60255-27: 2006
conductor (earth) connection to ensure user safety.
6.3 Installation Category
IEC 60255-27: 2005 Installation Category III (Overvoltage Category III):

EN 60255-27: 2006 Distribution level, fixed installation.
Equipment in this category is qualification tested at
5 kV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 500 Ω, 0.5 J, between all
supply circuits and earth and also between
independent circuits.
6.4 Environment
The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an
outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet or housing which will
enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of
protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected).
Pollution Degree - Pollution Degree 2 Compliance is demonstrated by reference
Altitude - Operation up to 2000m to safety standards.
IEC 60255-27:2005
EN 60255-27: 2006
Technical Guide P220/EN GS/B43
MiCOM P220
Getting Started
Getting Started
MiCOM P220 Page 1/22
CONTENTS
1. RECEPTION OF THE PRODUCT 3
1.1 Reception of the relay 3

1.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 3
2. HANDLING ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT 3
3. INSTALLING THE RELAYS 4
4. UNPACKING 4
5. STORAGE 4
6. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM P220 5
6.1 MiCOM series relay 5

6.2 MiCOM P220 Functions 6
6.3 Front view 7
6.4 Relay rear description 9
7. PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION 10
8. STARTING THE MiCOM P220 IN 5 MINUTES 11
8.1 Check the wiring of your installation 11

8.2 Connecting the MiCOM P220 relay to the auxiliary voltage 11
8.3 MINIMUM CONFIGURATION TO START UP THE MiCOM P220 12
8.3.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu 12
8.3.2 CONFIGURATION Menu 14
8.3.3 COMMUNICATION Menu 19
8.3.4 PROTECTION G 1 Menu 19
8.4 COMPLETE CONFIGURATION OF THE MiCOM P220 21
9. COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION 22

P220/EN GS/B43 Technical Guide
Getting Started
Page 2/22 MiCOM P220
BLANK PAGE
Getting Started
1. RECEPTION OF THE PRODUCT

1.1 Reception of the relay
Protection relays are generally robust. However it is appropriate to treat them with
care before installing them on site. As soon as they arrive, the relays should be
examined immediately, looking for any deterioration which could have occurred
during transport. If there is any deterioration, make a claim against the forwarding
company and inform Schneider Electric as soon as possible.
Relays not intended for immediate installation must be stored in their protective
polyethylene packaging.
1.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
Relays use components sensitive to electrostatic discharges. The electronic circuits are
well protected by the metal housing. Consequently, the internal module must not be
taken out pointlessly. When handling the module outside its housing, be very careful
to avoid any contact with electrical connections and components. If it is removed
from its housing for storage, the module must be placed in electrically conductive
antistatic packaging.
No configuration setting is possible in the module. We therefore advise you not to
dismantle it pointlessly. The printed circuit boards are interconnected. They are not
designed for disconnection by the user. Avoid touching the printed circuit boards.
They are made with complementary metal-oxide semiconductors (CMOS) and the
static electricity discharged by the human body has an adverse effect on them.
2. HANDLING ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

The usual movements of a person easily generate electrostatic energy which may
reach several thousand volts. The discharging of this voltage into devices comprising
semiconductors, when handling electronic circuits, can cause severe deterioration.
Such damage is not necessarily visible immediately. Nevertheless, it reduces the
reliability of the circuit.
Electronic circuits are completely protected against any electrostatic discharge when
inside their housing. Do not expose them to any risk by needlessly taking the
modules out of their housings.
Each module has the best possible protection for its devices consisting of
semiconductors. However, should it be necessary to withdraw the module from its
housing, please take the following precautions to preserve the great reliability and
long service life for which the equipment was designed and manufactured.
1. Before taking the module out of its housing, touch the housing to balance your
electrostatic potential.
2. When handling the module, hold it by its front plate, or by its frame or by the
edges of the printed circuit board. Do not touch the electronic components, the
printed circuit conductors and the connectors.
3. Before passing the module to another person, shake hands with him or her for
example to balance your electrostatic potential
4. Place the module on an antistatic surface or an electrically conductive surface
with the same potential as yourself.
5. To store or transport the module, place it in conductive packaging.
Getting Started
If you carry out any measurements on the internal electronic circuits of a device in
service, earth yourself to exposed conductive parts by linking yourself to the housing
by a conductive strap attached to your wrist. The resistance to earth of the conductive
strap which you attach to your wrist and to the housing must be between 500 kΩ and
10 MΩ. If you do not have a device of this type, you must remain permanently in
contact with the housing to prevent any static energy accumulating. The instruments
used to take the measurements must be earthed to the housing insofar as this is
possible.
For further information on the procedures for safe working with all the electronic
equipment, please consult standards BS5783 and IEC 147-OF. In a special handling
area we strongly advise you to undertake a detailed analysis of the electronic circuits
and working conditions according to the BS and IEC standards mentioned above.
3. INSTALLING THE RELAYS

The relays are supplied either individually or mounted in a cubicle. If separate relays
have to be installed according to a particular drawing, please follow the mounting
details indicated in publication R7012. If a MMLG test unit has to be incorporated,
position it to the right of the set of relays (looking at them from the front). The
modules must still be protected in their metal housings during installation on a
cubicle. The design of the relays makes it possible to reach the mounting holes easily
without taking off the cover. For individually mounted relays, a positioning diagram
is normally supplied to indicate the centre of the holes and the layout of the cubicle.
The corresponding dimensions are also indicated in the corresponding sales
publication (N 1550-B).
4. UNPACKING
When unpacking and installing relays, take great care to avoid damaging the parts
and changing the settings. Relays must be handled only by people who are experts
in this field. As far as possible, the installation must remain clean, dry, free from dust
and free from excessive vibration. The site must be well lit to facilitate inspection.
Relays removed from their housings must not be exposed to dust or humidity. To this
end, it is necessary to take great care when installing relays whilst construction work is
taking place on the same site.
5. STORAGE
If the relays do not have to be installed immediately on reception, they must be stored
protected against dust and humidity in their original carton. If dehumidifying crystals
are placed in the relay packaging, it is advisable not to remove them. The effect of
the dehumidifying crystals is reduced if the packaging is exposed to ambient
conditions. To restore their original effectiveness, you need only to heat the crystals
slightly for around an hour, before replacing them in their delivery carton.
As soon as the packaging is opened, the dust which has accumulated on the carton
risks settling on the relays. In the presence of moisture, the carton and the packaging
can become humidified to the point where the effectiveness of the dehumidifying
crystals is reduced.
The temperature for storage should remain between - 25 °C and + 70 °C.
Getting Started
6. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM P220

6.1 MiCOM series relay
The range of MiCOM protection relays follows on from the success of the MIDOS, K
and MODN ranges by incorporating the last changes in digital technology. The
MiCOM P220 is fully compatible and use the same modular box concept. MiCOM
P220 provides more protection elements for the most demanding applications.
This relay has a large number of control functions and collecting data. This can form
part of a fully integrated system covering protection, control, measurements data
acquisition and recording of faults, events, and disturbances. The relay is equipped
on the front panel with a liquid crystal display (LCD) with 2x16 back-lit
alphanumerical characters, a tactile 7 push keypad (to gain access to all the
parameters, alarms and measurements) and 8 LEDs simply displaying the state of the
relay.
In addition, the use of the RS485 communication port makes it possible to read,
reinitialise and change the settings of the relay, if required, from a local or remote PC
computer equipped with appropriate software.
Its flexibility of use, reduced maintenance requirements and ease of integration allow
the MiCOM P220 to provide an evolving solution for the problems of the protection
of motors.
Getting Started
6.2 MiCOM P220 Functions
Function MiCOM P220

[49] THERMAL OVERLOAD X
[50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT X
[50N/51N] EARTH FAULT X
[46] UNBALANCE X
[48] EXCESS LONG START X
[51LR-50S] BLOCKED ROTOR X
[37] LOSS OF LOAD X
[49/38] RTD (optional) X
[49] THERMISTANCE (optional) X
[66] START NUMBER X
MIN TIME BETWEEN 2 STARTS X
EMERGENCY START X
RE-ACCELERATION. AUTORISATION X
SETTING GROUPS 2
MEASUREMENTS (True RMS + direct Current, X
indirect + MAX Value )
PROCESS MENU X
Circuit Breaker SUPERVISION X
Circuit Breaker MONITORING X
TRIP STATISTICS X
LATCHING RELAYS X
AND LOGIC EQUATIONS X
FAULTS RECORDS X
EVENTS RECORDS X
DISTURBANCE RECORDS X
COMMUNICATION PORT FRONT PANEL (RS232) X
COMMUNICATION PORT REAR FACE (RS485) X
Getting Started
6.3 Front view

The front panel is described in figure 1. Extra physical protection for the front panel
can be provided by an optional transparent front cover. This allows read access only
to the relay settings and data but does not affect the relay IP rating. When full access
to the relay keypad is required, for editing the settings, the transparent cover can be
unclipped and removed when the top and bottom covers are open.
P0176ENb
FIGURE 1 - RELAY FRONT VIEW

The front panel of the relay includes the following, as indicated in the figure1:
− a 16 character by 2-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD)
− a 7-Keypad comprising 4 arrow keys (!, ", #, $,.an ENTER key %, a CLEAR
key &, and a READ key ').
− 8 LEDs ; 4 fixed function LEDs and 4 programmable function LEDs on the left
hand side of the front panel.
− Under the top hinged cover:
• The relay serial number, and the relay voltage rating information
(see figure 3 in this chapter)
− Under the bottom hinged cover:
• battery compartment to hold the ½ AA size battery which is used for
memory back-up for event, fault and disturbance records.
• A 9 pin female D-type front port for communication with a PC locally
to the relay (up to 15m distance) via a RS232 serial data connection
(SK1 port).
Getting Started
The fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel are used to indicate
the following conditions:
LEDs Colour Labels Significance

LED 1 RED TRIP LED 1 indicates when a trip order has been issued by
the relay to the cut-off element (circuit breaker,
contactor). This LED recopies the trip order issued to
the trip output contact (RL1). Its normal state is unlit.
It will light as soon as a trip order is issued. It goes
out when the associated alarm is acknowledged (by
pushing the & key).
LED 2 Yellow Alarm Upon detection of a fault (thermal O/V) or an alarm
(CB state) by MiCOM P220 relay, the LED will start
flashing. After reading of the alarm(s) message(s) by
pressing the ' key, the LED will change from flashing
to constant illumination, and will extinguish when all
the alarms are cleared (Key &).
The alarms are either threshold crossings
(instantaneous), or tripping orders (time delayed).
LED 3 Orange Warning LED 3 is dedicated to the internal alarms of MiCOM
P220 relays. When a “non critical” internal alarm
(typically communication Fault) is detected, the LED
flashes continuously. When the fault is classified as
“critical”, the LED is illuminated continuously. The
extinction of this LED is only possible by the
disappearance of the cause that caused its function
(repair of the module, disappearance of the fault).
LED 4 Green Healthy LED 4 indicates that MiCOM P220 relays are working
correctly.
LED 5 to Red Aux1 to These LEDs can be programmed by the user on the
LED 8 Aux4 basis of information on available thresholds
(instantaneous and time-delayed). The user selects the
information he wishes to see associated with a LED.
Each LED illuminates when the associated information
is valid. The extinction of each LED is linked to the
acknowledgement of the associated alarms.
Getting Started
6.4 Relay rear description
Connector 1 Connector 2
OPTION:
This connector (Orange) is designed for the use of
- 6 RTD or 2 Thermistances.
- Analogical Output.
P0177ENa
FIGURE 2 - MiCOM P220 RELAY REAR VIEW
Connector 1 Connector 2
Common TC4 1 Common TC1 2 Case Earth 29 RS485 30
(Resistance)
TC4 (NC) 3 TC1 (NC) 4 RS485 (+) 31 RS485 (-) 32
TC4 (NO) 5 TC1 (NO) 6 Auxiliary 33 Auxiliary 34
Supply (+) Supply (-)
Common TC5 7 Common TC2 8 WD (NO) 35 Common WD 36
TC5 (NC) 9 TC2 (NC) 10 WD (NC) 37 38
TC5 (NO) 11 TC2 (NO) 12 39 40
Input L3 (+) 13 Common TC3 14 IA (Input - 41 Common IA 42
Ph.A /5 amps) (Ph.A/ 5 amps)
Input L3 ( - ) 15 TC3 (NC) 16 IB (Input - 43 Common IB 44
Ph.B /5 amps) (Ph.B/ 5 amps)
Input L4 (+) 17 TC3 (NO) 18 IC (Input - 45 Common IC 46
Ph.C /5 amps) (Ph.C/ 5 amps)
Input L4 ( - ) 19 20 I0 (E/F input) 47 Common E/F 48
(5 amps) (5 amps)
Input L5 (+) 21 Input L1 (+) 22 IA (Input - 49 Common IA 50
Ph.A /1 amp) (Ph.A/ 1 amp)
Input L5 ( - ) 23 Input L1 ( - ) 24 IB (Input - 51 Common IB 52
Ph.B /1 amp) (Ph.B/ 1 amp)
25 Input L2 (+) 26 IC (Input - 53 Common IC 54
Ph.C /1 amp) (Ph.C/ 1 amp)
27 Input L2 ( - ) 28 I0 (E/F input) 55 Common E/F 56
(1 amp) (1 amp)
NOTE: The terminals of MiCOM P220 are represented with power

supply off.
Getting Started
7. PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
Prior to applying power, unclip the top cover and check that the model number of the
relay listed on the front panel (top left) corresponds to the model ordered.
P220 C00M11100 CE
No. 2501511 Cde 37982/007
0,002 - 1 Ion Modbus
Vx 130 - 250Vcc / 100 - 250Vca
P0178ENa
FIGURE 3 - TECHNICAL INFORMATION

The significance of each information is described below:
− P220 C00M11100 : cortec code. In particular, this code allows the user to
know what is the protocol used for remote communications (code 1 means
MODBUS).
− No 2501511 and Cde 37982/007: these numbers are the serial number and
the reference number of the order: they are necessary in case of problems.
− 0.002 – 1 Ion : This is referred to the sensibility of the E/F current input.
− Modbus: Communication protocol available through the rear RS485
communication port.
− Vx 130 – 250Vdc / 100 – 250Vac : Power supply range . In this example, the
power supply can be either ac or dc voltage.
Getting Started
8. STARTING THE MiCOM P220 IN 5 MINUTES

The object of this chapter is to enable you to make the MiCOM P220 operational in 5
minutes before starting the motor.
8.1 Check the wiring of your installation
• First check that you have thoroughly taken note of Handling and Safety, chapter
T00.
• Check that the wiring of your installation is in compliance with the connection
diagram shown in chapter.2
• Check that the output relay No. 1 (terminals 2-4-6) is correctly inserted into the
trip circuit of the breaking device.
• Verify that the logic input No. 1 (terminals 22-24) is correctly connected to an o/o
interlock copying the position of the breaking device.
8.2 Connecting the MiCOM P220 relay to the auxiliary voltage
Before energising the MiCOM P220 relay, check that the electrical characteristics of
the MiCOM P220* protection correspond to those of the auxiliary voltage of the
installation.
− Switch on the auxiliary source.
− Push the live part of the MiCOM P220 relay into its housing. Once the relay is
plugged in and the auxiliary source is energised, the green LED marked
"Healthy" (or "Uaux" in French) should light up. This is the 4th LED down from
the top.
ATTENTION : THE EXTRACTION OF THE ACTIVE PART OUT OF THE CASE COULD BE
DONE BY OPENING THE TWO FLAPS (THE UPPER AND THE LOWER), THEN
WITH A SCREWDRIVER OF 3MM,BY MAKING A SWIVEL OF THE EXTRACTOR
LOCATED UNDER THE UPPER FLAP AND FINALLY BY EXERTING A
TRACTION ON THE TWO NOTCHES SITUED BEHIND THESE SHUTTERS.
(IT IS NECESSARY - AFTER PIVOTING THE EXTRACTOR - TO WAIT 2 OR
3 SECONDS BEFORE MAKING COME OUT THE ACTIVE PART, TO
LEAVE DISCHARGING THE CAPACITORS IN THE ACTIVE PART THUS
AVOIDING POSSIBLE ELECTRIC ARCS IN THE EVENT OF DIRECT
CONTACT OF THE CONNECTOR BLOCKS WITH METAL LIMP).
Getting Started
8.3 MINIMUM CONFIGURATION TO START UP THE MiCOM P220

8.3.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu
8.3.1.1 Activation of the parameter mode
From the default display of the menu which appears when connecting the MiCOM
P220 relay to the auxiliary voltage, double click on the " button, the PASSWORD cell
appears.
OP PARAMETERS
PASSWORD =
****
Click on the % button, and the flashing cursor appears. The following cell appears:
PASSWORD =
AAAA
There are two possibilities:

• The relay leaves the factory with the default password AAAA. Press the % button
again. The following message appears for 2 seconds to indicate that the
password has been entered correctly. The MiCOM relay thus goes into
parameterisation mode.
PASSWORD OK
• If a password other than the AAAA has already been loaded since MiCOM P220
relay left the factory, enter this new password by using the buttons %, $,! and
". After the validation of the new password using the % button, the cell below
appears for 2 seconds. The MiCOM P220 relay goes thus into the
parameterisation mode.
PASSWORD OK
NOTE : The parameterisation mode is deactivated if no button has been

pressed for 5 minutes.
If the relay was already in parameterisation mode when the
password was entered; the cell…
PASSWORD =
AAAA
…will be replaced by
NEW PASSWORD OK
Getting Started
8.3.1.2 Indication of the motor frequency

Once the password is confirmed, press the " button 4 times. The following cell
appears:
FREQUENCY =
50 Hz
Then there are two possibilities:

• If the motor has a rated frequency of 50Hz, do nothing.
• If the motor has a rated frequency of 60Hz, then press the % button.
A flashing cursor appears under the 0 of the term 50 Hz.
FREQUENCY =
50 Hz
Press the ! button, and the cell below appears:
FREQUENCY =
60 Hz
Confirm this by pressing the % button.

Getting Started
8.3.2 CONFIGURATION Menu

After having entered the motor frequency, press the ! button 5 times.
The following menu heading appears:
OP PARAMETERS
Press the $ button, and the heading of the CONFIGURATION menu appears:
CONFIGURATION
8.3.2.1 CONFIG SELECT Submenu

Press the " button once. The heading of the CONFIG. SELECT submenu appears:
CONFIG SELECT
Selection of the type of analog output

This can be set only if the MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with the "analog output"
option.
Starting with the heading of the CONFIG. SELECT submenu, press the " button 5
times, and the following cell appears :
ANALOG. OUTPUT
0 - 20 mA
Two possibilities arise:

• If you need an analog output signal on a 0-20 mA current loop, do nothing
• If you need an analog output signal on a 4-20 mA current loop, press % button
and then the ! button.
The following cell appears:
ANALOG. OUTPUT
4 - 20 mA
Confirm by pressing the % button.

Selection of the information available on the analog output
This can be parameterised only if the MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with the
"analog output" option.
Getting Started
Starting from the preceding cell, press the " button, and the following cell appears:
TYPE OF ANA. INFO

IA RMS
Using the % and ! buttons, select the type of information you wish to bring onto the
analog output, then confirm by pressing the % key.
Selection of the type of RTD
This can be set only if the MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with the "monitoring of 6
RTDs" option or “monitoring of 2 thermistors + 4 RTD” option.
Starting from the preceding cell, press the " button, otherwise starting from the
heading of the CONFIG. SELECT submenu, press the " button 7 times.
Type RTD =
PT100
Using the % and ! buttons, select the type of RTD with which the motor is equipped,
then confirm by pressing the % key.
Selection of the type of thermistors
This can be set only if the MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with the "monitoring of 2
thermistors and 4 RTD" option.
• The MiCOM P220 relay is not equipped with the "analog output" option; starting
from the CONFIG. SELECT submenu, press the " button 5 times. The following
cell appears:
Type Thermist 1 =
PTC
The MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with the "analog output" option; starting from the
following cell:
TYPE OF ANA. INFO

IA RMS
(The type of information to be brought onto the analog output can be different from
IA RMS).
Getting Started
Press the " button once. The following cell appears:
Type Thermist 1 =
PTC
If the No.1 group of thermistors equipping the motor is of the PTC (positive
temperature coefficient) type, do nothing. On the other hand, if the motor is
equipped with a group of thermistors of type NTC (negative temperature coefficient),
press the % button then the ! button. The following cell appears:
Type Thermist 1 =
NTC
Confirm by pressing the % button.

Press the " button , then the following cell appears :
Type Thermist 2 =
PTC
Repeat the same operation if the No. 2 thermistor group of the motor is of type NTC.
8.3.2.2 CT RATIO Submenu: adjustment of the primary and secondary ratings of the current
sensors
From inside the CONFIG. SELECT submenu, press the " button as many times as
necessary to reach the heading of the CONFIG. SELECT submenu. As indicated
below:
Press the $ button once. The heading of the CT RATIO submenu appears:
CT RATIO
Value of the primary rating of the phase CTs

Press once on the " button. The following cell appears:
PRIM PH =
1000
In this cell, indicate the value of the primary rating of the phase CTs. For example,
for a CT with a ratio of 200/5, set the value 200 as explained below.
Getting Started
Press the % button. A flashing cursor appears under the last 0 of 1000:
PRIM PH =
1000
Using the ! and " buttons, increase and/or decrease the 1st digit. Then press the
# button.
The cursor moves under the 2nd digit. Using the ! and " buttons, increase and/or
decrease the 2nd digit. Then do the same for the 3rd and 4th digits. Confirm by
pressing the % button.
Value of the secondary rating of the phase CTs
SEC PH =
1
If the current circuits coming from the secondaries of the phase CTs are connected to
the phase current inputs with a rating of 1 A (terminals 49-50; 51-52; 53-54) of the
MiCOM P220, do nothing. This implies that the secondaries of the phase CTs have
the rating of 1 A. On the other hand, if the current circuits are connected to the
phase current inputs with a rating of 5 A (terminals 41-42; 43-44; 45-46) of the
MiCOM P220, this implies that the rating of the secondaries of the phase CTs is 5 A,
press the % button. A cursor appears under the 1:
SEC PH =
1
Press the ! button. Confirm by pressing the % button. The following cell appears:
SEC PH =
5
Value of the primary of the earth sensor.

Press once on the " button. The following cell appears:
PRIM E =
1000
Press the % button. A cursor appears under the last 0 of 1000:
PRIM E =
1000
Getting Started

• The earth current input is connected to a core balanced CT. In this cell, set the
value of the ratio of the core balanced CT using the buttons !, " and #.
Confirm by pressing % .
• The earth current input is connected to the residual connection of the three
secondary circuits coming from the phase CTs. In this cell, set the value of the
primary rating of the phase CTs using the buttons #, !, and ". Confirm by
pressing % .
Value of the secondary of the earth sensor
SEC E =
1

• The earth input is connected to a core balanced CT. Do nothing, leave this value
at 1.
• The earth input is connected to the residual connection of the three secondary
circuits coming from the phase CTs. In this cell, set the value of the secondary
rating of the phase CTs (this implies that the residual connection circuit is cabled
to the earth current input corresponding to the secondary rating of the phase
CTs).
If the rating is 1A, do nothing. On the other hand, if the rating is 5 A, press the %
button, and a flashing cursor appears.
SEC E =
1
Press the ! button. Confirm by pressing the % button.

SEC E =
5
Getting Started
8.3.3 COMMUNICATION Menu

Starting from the preceding cell, press the " button once. The heading of the CT
RATIO submenu appears. Press the ! button once. The heading of the
CONFIGURATION menu appears. Then press the $ button 4 times. The heading of
the COMMUNICATION menu appears.
COMMUNICATION
COM. OK =
YES
You wish to use the MiCOM P220 relay for communication, so check that the word
YES appears. If it does not appear, press % once and then ! once. YES appears,
so confirm with % .
If the relay MiCOM P220 is used for communication (via the RS485 port at the rear),
set the various parameters of the COMMUNICATION menu using the buttons:
− " to move from one line to another and also to reduce the value of a
parameter;
− % to select a parameter to be modified and also to confirm the entry of a
parameter,
− ! to increase the value of a parameter.
Then press the " or ! button as many times as necessary, to return to the heading
of the COMMUNICATION menu.
8.3.4 PROTECTION G 1 Menu
Press the $ button once. The heading of the PROTECTION group 1 menu appears.
PROTECTION G1
8.3.4.1 Setting the threshold of thermal current Iθ>

Press the " button once. The heading of the THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu
appears :
[49] THERMAL OVER-LOAD
Press the " button once, the following cell appears.
THERMAL OVERLOAD
FUNCT ? YES
Check that the word YES actually appears. If not, press once on %, then once on
! the word YES appears, confirm with %.
Press the " button twice. The following cell appears :

Getting Started
Iθ > =
0.2 In
Press the % button. A flashing cursor appears:
Iθ > =
0.2 In
Using the !, " and # buttons, set the value of the thermal current threshold Iθ>
corresponding to the machine. Confirm by pressing the % button.
From this point, a minimum configuration has been given for starting up the MiCOM
P220 relay.
This minimum configuration makes it possible to start up the MiCOM P220
relay. It is not in any way sufficient to ensure that the motor is protected. For
this, it is appropriate to configure the MiCOM P220 relay completely.
Getting Started
8.4 COMPLETE CONFIGURATION OF THE MiCOM P220

The MiCOM P220 relay can be completely configured:
− Either by using the interface on the front (buttons !, ", $, # and % and the
display unit);
− or by using the control and setting software MiCOM S1.
You can set the protections and automatic controls of the MiCOM P220 you wish to
use in the following submenus:
− [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD.
− [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT.
− [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT.
− [46] UNBALANCE.
− [48] EXCES LONG START
− [51LR-50S] BLOCKED ROTOR.
− [37] LOSS OF LOAD.
− [49/38] RTD (optional).
− [49] THERMISTOR + RTD (optional).
− [66] START NUMBER.
− MIN TIME BETWEEN 2 STARTS.
− RE-ACCELER AUTORISATION.
You can also set :
− the binary inputs, INPUTS submenu;
− the AND logic equations, AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu;
− the time delays associated with AND logic equations, AND LOGIC EQUAT T
DELAY submenu;
− the auxiliary output relays, AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu;
− the holding of the auxiliary output contact, LATCH OUTPUT Submenu;
− the tripping output relay, TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu;
− the holding of the tripping command, LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu.
Other parameters can be configured:
− monitoring of the breaking device, CIRDCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION
submenu;
− characteristics of the disturbance recording, DISTURB RECORD submenu;
− motor feeder reference name, OP PARAMETERS submenu;
− motor start detection criterion, CONFIG. SELECT submenu;
− allocation of illuminated indicator LED 5, LED 5 submenu;
− allocation of illuminated indicator LED 8, LED 8 submenu.
For further information, refer to chapter 4 and 5 of the MiCOM P220 User Guide.
Do not forget to configure the trip output relay (Relay No. 1, terminals 2-4-6)
in the TRIP OUTPUT RLY. Submenu.
Getting Started
9. COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION

If you need information regarding the operation of the MiCOM product that you
have, please contact your local Schneider Electric agent or the After Sales Service
Department of Schneider Electric and mention the reference of your MiCOM product.
The MiCOM product references are mentioned under the upper flap of the product
front plate.
PLEASE MENTION THE FOLLOWING DATA WHEN YOU CALL US :
− CORTEC code of the MiCOM relay
− Serial number of the MiCOM relay
− Schneider Electric’s order reference
− Schneider Electric’s operator reference
AFTER SALES SERVICE DEPARTMENT ADDRESS AND PHONE/FAX NUMBER:
Service Après Vente/After Sales Service

Schneider Electric
95 avenue de la Banquière – BP75
34975 Lattes Cedex
FRANCE
Phone : 33 (0)4.67.20.55.58 ou 33 (0)4.67.20.55.55

Fax : 33 (0)4.67.20.56.00
E-mail :franç[email protected]
Technical Guide P220/EN CO/C43
MiCOM P220
Connection Diagram
Connection Diagram
CONTENTS
1. CONNECTION DIAGRAM 3
1.1 MiCOM P220 typical connection 3

1.2 Typical application diagram 4
1.3 MiCOM P220 typical connection (with 6 RTD and analogue output options) 5
1.4 MiCOM P220 typical connection (with 2 thermistors and 4 RTD option and
analogue output options) 6
2. CONNECTION 7
2.1 Earth connection 7

2.2 Auxiliary power 7
2.3 Current inputs 7
2.4 Binary inputs 7
2.5 Output relays 7
2.6 Front port connection (RS232) 8
2.7 RS485 rear port 9
2.7.1 Description 9
2.7.2 Connection 9
2.7.3 RS485 cable 10
2.7.4 Protocol convertor: RS232 -> K-Bus 10
2.7.5 RS232 / RS485 converter 10
2.8 Analogue output 11
2.9 RTDs 11
2.10 Thermistors 12
2.10.1 PTC type thermistors 13
2.10.2 NTC type thermistors 13
P220/EN CO/C43 Technical Guide
Connection Diagram
BLANK PAGE
1.
1.1
Alternative :The earth current input is connected to the sommation of the three phase CTs. The earth current input is connected to a core balanced CT.
P2 P1 P2 P1 37
A A
35 Watch dog (4)
S2 S1 S1 Auxiliary WD
B B 36
voltage
C C
S2 S1 Programmable tripping
49 4
RL1 output relay
2
1A 1A
MiCOM P220
12
10 Programmable
Technical Guide
RL2 output relay

1A 1A 8
18
Programmable
RL3 output relay
Connection Diagram
1A 1A 14
5
3 Programmable
1A 1A RL4 output relay
1
11
9 Programmable
5A 5A
RTD1
4c
common
MiCOM 6c
5A 5A 2a
RTD2
4a
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
P220
5A 5A 8c
RTD3
10c
MiCOM P220 typical connection
If 6 RTD option : 12c

Case earth
8a
RTD4
10a
Alternative : Connection to 2 phase CTs + a core blanced CT. 1 2
+ 12a
3 4 Switchgear status 52a 22
P2 P1
Orange connector
A 5 6 input L1 24 RTD5
- 16c
S2 S1 2c 2a 7 8 + common
B 4a Speed switch signal 26 18c
4c
C 6c 6a input L2 28 14a
S2 S1
1 8c 8a 11 12 - RTD6
+ 16a
49 10c 10a
a 13
Programmable common
1A a
14c 14a
input L3 15
a
16c 16a -
+
a
18c 18a Programmable 17
input L4 19
1A a
22c 22a -
a + 2c
Earth connection (5)

24c 24a
26a
a 23 24 Programmable 21
a
28c 28a input L5 23 If thermistor option :
25 26
1A a
30c 30a -
a
32c 32a 27 28 2a
4a
Orange connector
1A Module terminal bl
viewed from rear
(with integral case earth link) Analogue output
Orange connector
5A active source mode

Nota : Case earth 30c
(1) (a) CT shorting links make before (b) and (c) disconnect connection 32c -
(6) If analogue
5A * output option :
(b) Analogue
g output
passive source mode
(c)
30 30a
5A (d) Pins terminals (pcb type)
*
RS 485 32a 2-24 Volt
communication
port
5A (3) Earth connection are typical only
(4) The MICOM P220 relay is shown with power supply off
(5) The shielding is bonded to the earth point located next to the connector.
(6) Important : the analogue output option shall be used either in active source mode or in passive source mode
P0186ENb
P220/EN CO/C43
Page 3/14
1.2
Core balanced CT Stator Vaux
Fuse CT phase A temperature
Page 4/14
A
CT phase B
B Motor 14
CT phase C
P220/EN CO/C43
Bearings
temperature
52a
55 56 49 50 51 52 53 54 1A
A Ambient
Contactor coil 48 41 42 43 44 45 46 5A
A temperature
33
+
Vaux 34 power
- 2 thermistors and 4 RTD +
(orange connector) -
22
Typical application diagram
+ Contactor
24 status 52a
- Input L1
6
On Programmable Communication + PC/PLC
4 RS485 supervisor
Off tripping - 32
2 output relay
Emergency stop MiCOM P220
Auxiliary 26
12 Speed switch signal +
voltage
Klaxon 10 input L2 -
Vaux Programmable output
(see
see note below)) 8 RL2 relay
Analogue output +
32 a/c PLC
Signalling lamp 5 (orange connector) -
3
Programmable output
1 RL4 relay
37
Signalling
35
Watchdog
Emergency
g y startup
p 13 36
+ Programmable
15 18
- Input L3 Signalling
External reset 17 Programmable output
+ Programmable RL3 relay 14
19
- Input L4 11
Signalling
Fuse blown 21 9
+ Programmable Programmable output
23 RL5 relay 7
- Input L5
ATTENTION : • the logic input shall be supplied by a DC auxiliary voltage only
• the auxiliary power could be Ac or DC according to the
model number of the relay The MiCOM P220 is shown with power supply off.
P0187ENa
Connection Diagram
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
1.3
P2 P1 P2 P1 37
A A
35 Watch dog (4)
B B 36
voltage
C C
49 4
RL1 output relay
2
1A 1A
12
MiCOM P220
10 Programmable
RL2 output relay
1A 1A 8
Technical Guide
18
Programmable
14
Connection Diagram
5
3 Programmable
1
11
9 Programmable
5A 5A
RTD1
4c
common
MiCOM 6c
5A 5A 2a
RTD2
P220 4a
5A 5A 8c
RTD3
10c
If 6 RTD option : 12c
Case earth
8a
RTD4
10a
+ 12a
P2 P1
Orange connector
- 16c
4c
S2 S1
1 8c 8a 11 12 - RTD6
+ 16a
49 10c 10a
a 13
Programmable common
1A input L3 18a
a
14c 14a 15
a
16c 16a -
+
a
input L4 19
1A a
22c 22a -
a +

24c 24a
26a
a
28c 28a input L5 23
25 26
1A a
30c 30a -
a
32c 32a 27 28
Orange connector
viewed from rear
Nota : Case earth 30c
(1) (a) CT shorting links make before (b) and (c) disconnect connection 32c -
(6) If analogue
(b) Analogue
g output
passive source mode
(c)
Orange connector
30 30a
*
RS 485 32a 2-24 Volt
communication
port
MiCOM P220 typical connection (with 6 RTD and analogue output options)
P0188ENb
P220/EN CO/C43
Page 5/14
1.4
P2 P1 P2 P1 37
A A
35 Watch dog (4)
B B 36
voltage
C C
49 4
RL1 output relay
Page 6/14
2
1A 1A
12
10 Programmable
RL2 output relay
1A 1A 8
18
Programmable
P220/EN CO/C43

14
5
3 Programmable
1
11
9 Programmable
5A 5A
4c
MiCOM 6c
analogue output options)
5A 5A 2a
P220 4a
5A 5A 8c
RTD1
10c
If 2 thermistors and 12c
Case earth
4 RTD option : 8a
RTD2
10a
+ 12a
P2 P1
Orange connector
- 16c
4c
S2 S1
1 8c 8a 11 12 - RTD4
+ 16a
49 10c 10a
a 13
Programmable common
1A input L3 18a
a
14c 14a 15
a
16c 16a -
+
a
input L4 19
1A a
22c 22a -
a +

24c 24a
26a
a
28c 28a input L5 23
25 26
1A a
30c 30a -
a
32c 32a 27 28
Orange connector
viewed from rear
Nota : Case earth 30c +
(1) (a) connection 32c
CT shorting links make before (b) and (c) disconnect (6) If analogue
(b) Analogue
g output
passive source mode
(c)
Orange connector
30 30a
*
RS 485 32a 2-24 Volt
communication
port
P0189ENb
MiCOM P220 typical connection (with 2 thermistors and 4 RTD option and
Connection Diagram
Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Connection Diagram
2. CONNECTION
The rear face of the MiCOM P220 relay comprises at least 2 connectors. The relay
may have an optional orange third connector dedicated to the connection:
− of 6 temperature RTD sensors or 2 thermistors + 4 RTD sensors
− and one analogue output
2.1 Earth connection
The case shall be earthed according to the local standards.
2.2 Auxiliary power
The auxiliary power for the MiCOM P220 relay can be either Direct (range 24 - 60
Vdc, 48-150Vdc, 130-250Vdc) or Alternating (100-250Vac –50/60Hz). The range of
voltage is specified on the relay indicator plate under the top flap of the front face.
The power should be connected to terminals 33 and 34 only.
A minimum 1.5mm² wire size is recommended.
2.3 Current inputs
The MiCOM P220 relay has 4 analogue inputs for phase and earth currents.
The nominal value of current of these measuring inputs is either 1 Amp or 5 Amp
(according to the wiring diagram). The operator can, for the same relay, mix the 1
and 5 Amp inputs (phase and earth).
A minimum 2.5mm² wire size is recommended.
2.4 Binary inputs
The MiCOM P220 relay has five opto-insulated logic inputs of which three are
programmable. Each input has its own polarity and it shall be powered with a dc
voltage (see chapter 3 of this guide: Technical Specifications).
The control and signalling functions to which the programmable logic inputs are
assigned can be selected by means of the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.
A minimum 1mm² wire size is recommended.
NOTE: A 52a contact (CB auxiliary contact: open when CB is opened)
shall be wired to the binary input n°1 (terminals 22-24).
2.5 Output relays
Six output relays are available on the MiCOM P220 relay. Five relays are
programmable, the last relay being assigned to the signalling of an equipment fault
(WATCH DOG). All these relays are of the changeover type (1 common, 1 normally
opened, 1 normally closed).
The protection and control functions to which these relays are assigned can be
selected via the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.
Connection Diagram
2.6 Front port connection (RS232)

The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector located
under the bottom hinged cover. It provides RS232 serial data communication
(asynchronous RS232 connection according the IEC870 requirements) and is
intended for use with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance).
The relay is a Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. Thus the pin
connections of the relay’s 9-pin front port are as follows:
Pin no. 2 Tx Transmit data
Pin no. 3 Rx Receive data
Pin no. 5 0V Zero volts common
None of the other pins are connected in the relay. The relay should be connected to
the serial port of a PC, usually called COM1 or COM2. PCs are normally Data
Terminal Equipment (DTE) devices which have a serial port pin connection as below
(if in doubt check your PC manual):
Pin no. 2 Rx Receive data
Pin no. 3 Tx Transmit data
Pin no. 5 0V Zero volts common
For successful data communication, the Tx pin on the relay must be connected to the
Rx pin on the PC, and the Rx pin on the relay must be connected to the Tx pin on the
PC. Therefore, providing that the PC is a DTE with pin connections as given above, a
‘straight through’ serial connector is required, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 2,
pin 3 to pin 3, and pin 5 to pin 5.
The cable between the MiCOM relay and the PC is a standard RS232 shielded cable
(male connector on the MiCOM relay side, usually female connector on PC side).
P0179ENb
FIGURE 1 – PC<->FRONT PORT CONNECTION

Connection Diagram
2.7 RS485 rear port

2.7.1 Description
The rear RS485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection
whichever protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to
32 relays can be ‘daisy chained’ together using a simple twisted pair electrical
connection.
2.7.2 Connection
The communication connection (port RS485) is assigned on terminals 31-32
according to the MiCOM P220 relay wiring diagram.
communication
1 2 29 30 connections
3 4 31 32
5 6 33 34
7 8 35 36
9 10 37 38
11 12 39 40
13 14 41 42
15 16 43 44
17 18 45 46
19 20 47 48
21 22 49 50
23 24 51 52
25 26 53 54
27 28 55 56
Rear terminals
P0180ENa
FIGURE 2 – RS485 CONNECTION

The total communication cable from the master unit to the farthest slave device is a
spur, and no branches may be made from this spur. The maximum cable length is
1000m and the maximum number of devices per spur is 32. Polarity is necessary
when RS485 rear port is connected by 2 twisted wires.
The transmission wires should be terminated using a 150 Ω resistor at both extreme
ends of the cable. To this effect, link terminals 30 and 32, if the relay is connected at
the end of the RS485 bus, as indicated in figure 3.
Terminal 29 of each MiCOM relay shall be connected to the RS485 cable shielding,
as mentioned figure 3.
For only one MiCOM relay connected to the RS485 bus, link terminal 29 to the case
earth as indicated in figures 2 and 3.
Connection Diagram
At the extreme end of the

RS485 bus, link terminals
For one and only 30 and 32
MiCOM relay
connected to the
RS485 bus,
terminal 29
is linked to
the case earth
Terminal 29 shall be
connected to the
Shielding RS485 cable shield
Relay connected
RS485 bus 2 core screened cable at the extreme
end of the RS485 bus
P0181ENa
FIGURE 3 – RS485 CONNECTION

2.7.3 RS485 cable
It is recommended that a 2 core screened cable is used with a maximum total length
of 1000 m or 200 nF total cable capacitance.
Typical specification:
• Each core: 16/0.2 mm copper conductors, PVC
insulated
• Nominal conductor area: 0.5 mm2 per core
• Screen: Overall braid, PVC sheathed
• Linear capacitance between
conductor and earth: 100 pF/m
2.7.4 Protocol convertor: RS232 -> K-Bus
KITZ 101,102 and 201 can be used.
Configuration is: 19200 bauds, 11 bits, full duplex.
2.7.5 RS232 / RS485 converter
The following RS232/RS485 converters have been tested by Schneider Electric:
• RS_CONV1 : convertor suitable for a short length and for up
to 4 connected relays
• RS_CONV32 : industrial convertor, suitable for up to 32
connected relays.
Connection Diagram
2.8 Analogue output

The MiCOM P220 relay can include an optional analogue output assigned on the
30-32 terminals (orange coloured connector) which allows certain data and
measuring values to be reassembled on a current loop towards an automatic
controller. The selections of the type of analogue output (options: 0-20 mA or
4-20 mA) and of the type of data to be reassembled are effected in the CONFIG.
SELECT submenu.
It is recommended that a 2-core screened cable is used. The cable shield shall be
bonded to the MiCOM relay case earth connector.
N.B.: The analogue output shall be used either in active source mode
(terminals 30c-32c), or in passive source mode (terminals 30a-
32a).
(1) If the current loop monitoring device is
not earthed (floating potential), the
cable shielding shall be bonded to the
MiCOM relay case earth connector. In
the other case, do not connect the
cable shielding. Case earth
connector
Earthing
(1)
shielding
Current loop 30c
monitoring device +
0-20 mA 32c
or 4-20 mA - MiCOM P220
orange connector
Screened cable
P0182ENa
FIGURE 4 – CONNECTION FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT IN ACTIVE SOURCE MODE

2.9 RTDs
The P220 relay can, as an option, be connected to 6 RTD's or to 4 RTD’s (2
thermistors option), which enables it to monitor temperature (PROTECTION G1 or
PROTECTION G2 menu). The choice of these types of RTD sensors is effected in the
CONFIG. SELECT submenu.
It is recommended that connections between the relay and the RTD's are made using
a 3-core screened cable with a total resistance less than 25 Ω in case of PT100,
Ni100 or Ni120 RTD. For Cu10 RTD, the cable total resistance shall be less than
2.5 Ω. the wire also should have a minimum voltage rating of 300 Vrms. Impedance
of cores connected to both terminals 2c and 4c (see figure 5) shall be of identical
value. The cable shielding shall be bonded to the MiCOM relay case earth connector.
• Each core: 7/0.2 mm, copper conductors heat
resistant PVC,
• Nominal conductor ana: 0.22 mm2 per core
• Screen: Nickel-plated copper wire braid heat
resistant PVC sheathed
• Conductor impedance: Strictly identical for 2 of the 3 cores.
Accuracy difference less than 1%
Connection Diagram
Case earth
connector
earthing
shielding
RTD1 2c
4c
MiCOM P220 orange
6c connector
Screened cable
P0183ENa
FIGURE 5 – RTD CONNECTION

2.10 Thermistors
The P220 relay can, as an option, be connected to 2 thermistors which allows it to
protect against over-temperature conditions (PROTECTION G1 or PROTECTION G2
menu). The choice between these types of thermistor is effected in the CONFIG.
SELCT submenu.
It is recommended that connections between the relay and the thermistors are made
using a screened 2-core cable with a total resistance less than 100 Ω. The wire also
should have a minimum voltage rating of 300 Vrms. Impedance of the 2 cores shall
have similar values. The cable shielding shall be bonded to the MiCOM relay case
earth connector.
• Each core: 7/0.2 mm copper conductors heat
resistant PVC
• Nominal conductor ana: 0.22 mm2 per core
• Screen: Nickel-plated copper wire braid heat
resistant PVC sheathed.
Case earth
connector
earthing
Thermistor 1
shielding
2c
4c
MiCOM P220
6c orange connector
Screened cable
P0184ENa
FIGURE 6 – THERMISTOR CONNECTION

Connection Diagram
2.10.1 PTC type thermistors

For PTC type thermistor, it is usually possible to connect to the same input several
thermistors in series as indicated in figure 7.
Thermistor placed on phase A

winding
2c Thermistor 1 input
4c
Thermistor place on
phase C winding MOTOR
2a
Thermistor 2 input
4a
Thermistors placed on Thermistor placed on phase B MiCOM P220

mechanical bearings winding orange connector
P0185ENa
FIGURE 7 – PTC THERMISTORS CONNECTED IN SERIES

2.10.2 NTC type thermistors
For NTC type thermistors, it is recommended that only one thermistor is connected to
each MiCOM relay input.
Exceptionally, certain NTC type thermistors can be connected in parallel to the same
input. However, we do not recommend such a connection.
Connection Diagram
BLANK PAGE
Technical Guide P220/EN TD/B43
MiCOM P220
Technical Data
Technical Data
CONTENTS
1. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS 3
1.1 Thermal replica 3

1.2 Short-circuit protection 3
1.3 Earth fault protection 3
1.4 Unbalance protection 3
1.5 Too long start-up protection 4
1.6 Locked rotor protection 4
1.7 Under current protection 4
1.8 RTD temperature detection or thermistors 4
2. AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS 5
2.1 Limitation of the number of start-ups 5

2.2 Time between 2 start-ups 5
2.3 Re-acceleration authorization 5
2.4 Logic Inputs / Auxiliary timers 5
2.5 Logic Equations 5
2.6 Logic equation time delay 5
2.7 Auxiliary Output Relays 5
2.8 Latching of the output relays 5
2.9 Trip Output Relay 5
2.10 Latching of the Trip Order 5
2.11 Control and monitoring of the breaker device 6
3. OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS 7
3.1 Optional analogue output 7

3.2 Optional 6 RTD inputs 7
3.3 Optional 2 thermistors inputs 7
4. RECORDING FUNCTIONS 8
4.1 Event recorder 8

4.2 Fault recorder 8
4.3 Oscillography 8
5. COMMUNICATION 9
5.1 MODBUSTM communication 9

5.2 Front communication 9
P220/EN TD/B43 Technical Guide
Technical Data
6. INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 10
6.1 Inputs 10
6.2 Logic inputs 10
6.3 Output relays 10
6.4 Auxiliary voltage 11
7. ACCURACY 11
8. CT DATA 11
9. HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND 11
10. ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT 12
11. ENVIRONMENT 12
Technical Data
1. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
1.1 Thermal replica
Thermal current threshold 1θ> 0.2 to 1.5 In by steps of 0.01 In
Overload time-constant Te1 1 to 180 min by steps of 1 min
Start-up time-constant Te2 1 to 360 min by steps of 1 min
Cooling time-constant Tr 1 to 999 min by steps of 1 min
Negative sequence current recognition factor Ke 0 to 10 by steps of 1
Trip thermal threshold Set to 100%
Trip thermal threshold hysteresis 97%
Thermal alarm threshold 20 to 100% by steps of 1%
Thermal alarm threshold hysteresis 97%
Start-up inhibition 20 to 100% by steps of 1%
1.2 Short-circuit protection
Current threshold I>> 1 to 12 In by steps of 0.1 In
Time-delays tl >> 0 to 100 s by steps of 0.01 s
Operating time < 30 ms
Drop-off time < 30 ms
Hysteresis 95%
1.3 Earth fault protection
Current thresholds lo>, lo>> 0.002 to 1 Ion by steps of 0.001
Ion
Time-delays tlo>, tlo>> 0 to 100 s by steps of 0.01 s
Hysteresis 95%
1.4 Unbalance protection
Negative sequence current threshold li> 0.05 to 0.8 In by steps of 0.025 In
Time-delays tli> 0.04 to 200 s by steps of 0.01 s
Negative sequence current threshold Ii >> 0.2 to 0.8 In by steps of 0.05 In
IDMT time-delay operating time t = 1.2 / (I2/In)
Hysteresis 95%
Technical Data
1.5 Too long start-up protection

Start-up detection criteria (Closing 52) or (closing 52 +
current threshold) optional
Current threshold Istart 1 to 5 Iθ by steps of 0.5 Iθ
Time-delays T Istart 1 to 200 s by steps of 1 s
1.6 Locked rotor protection
Current threshold Istall 1 à 5 Iθ by steps of 0,5 Iθ
Hysteresis 95%
Time delays tlstall 0.1 à 60 s by steps of 0.1 s
Locked rotor at start-up detection Yes/No
1.7 Under current protection
Current threshold I< 0.1 to 1 In by steps of 0.01 In
Time-delays tl< 0.2 to 100 s by steps of 0.1 s
Inhibition time at start-up Tinhib 0.05 to 300 s by steps of 0.1 s
Hysteresis 105%
1.8 RTD temperature detection or thermistors
RTD (or THERMISTOR + RTD) function -Optional YES/NO
Technical Data
2. AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS
2.1 Limitation of the number of start-ups
Reference period Treference 10 to 120 min by steps of 5 min
Number of cold starts 0 to 5 by steps of 1
Number of hot starts 0 to 5 by steps of I
Restart inhibition time Tinterdiction 1 to 120 min by steps of 5 min
2.2 Time between 2 start-ups
Inhibition time Tbetw 2 start 1 to 120 min by steps of 5 min
2.3 Re-acceleration authorization
Voltage collapse duration Treacc 0.2 to 10 s by steps of 0.05 s
2.4 Logic Inputs / Auxiliary timers
1Logic input CB position
1Logic input Speed Switch
3 Programmable Logic inputs
Logic inputs with alarm message on occurence 2 external signals, EXT1 and EXT2
Logic inputs without alarm message on occurence 2 external signals, EXT3 and EXT4
(from V3.A software version)
Timers tEXT1, tEXT2, tEXT3 and tEXT4 0 to 200 s by step of 0.01s
2.5 Logic Equations
4 « AND » logic equations
2.6 Logic equation time delay
Pick-up time delay 0 to 60 min by steps of 0.1 s
Reset time 0 to 60 min by steps of 0.1 s
2.7 Auxiliary Output Relays
1 Trip Output Relay (RL1) Programmable
4 Auxiliary Output relays (RL2,RL3,RL4,RL5) Programmable
1 watchdog relay.( for equipment default)
2.8 Latching of the output relays
Latching of the output relays (RL2,RL3,RL4,RL5)on Short-circuit, earth fault,
unbalance, AND logical gates
2.9 Trip Output Relay
1 Trip Output Relay (RL1) Programmable
(Association of one or more information to the Trip Output Relay).
2.10 Latching of the Trip Order
Latching of the information(s) associated to the RL1.
Technical Data
2.11 Control and monitoring of the breaker device

SW Operating time alarm 0.05 to 1 by steps of 0.05 s
Number of operations alarm 0 to 50 000 operations by steps of 1
Summated contact breaking duty 106 to 4000.106 by steps of 106
Adjustment of the exponent « n » 1 or 2
Close command hold 0.2 to 5 s by steps of 0.1 s
Open command hold 0.2 to 5 s by steps of 0.1 s
Technical Data
3. OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS
3.1 Optional analogue output
Rating 0-20 mA, 4-20 Ma
Insulation 2 kV
Maximum load with active source mode 500 Ω for ratings 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA
Maximum voltage with passive source mode 24 Volt
Accuracy ± 1% full scale
3.2 Optional 6 RTD inputs
RTD type PT100, Ni120, Ni100, Cu10
Connection type 3 wires + 1 shielding
Insulation 2 kV, active supply
Setting of thresholds 0 to 200 °C by steps of 1 °C
Settings of timings 0 to 100 s by steps of 0.1 s
Influence of thermal image Yes/No
3.3 Optional 2 thermistors + 4 RTD inputs
Thermistor type PTC or NTC
Setting of thresholds 100 to 30000 Ω by steps of 100 Ω
Time-delay Set to 2 seconds
Technical Data
4. RECORDING FUNCTIONS
4.1 Event recorder
Capacity 75 events
Time-tag To 1 millisecond
Triggers Any protection alarm and threshold
Any logic input change of state
Self test events
Any setting changes
4.2 Fault recorder
Capacity 5 records
Time-tag To 1 millisecond
Triggers Any trip order (relay RL1 operation)
Data Fault date
Active setting group
Faulty phase(s)
Fault type, protection threshold
Magnitude of the fault current
Phases and earth currents
magnitudes
4.3 Oscillography
Capacity 5 records of 3 s each
Sampling rate 32 samples per frequency cycle
Pre-time setting 0.1 to 3 s by steps of 0.1 s
Post-time setting 0.1 to 3 s by steps of 0.1 s
Triggers Any protection threshold overreach
or any trip order
(relay RL1 operation)
Logic input
Remote command
Data 4 analogue channels (3 phase
currents + earth current)
Logic input and output states
Frequency value
Technical Data
5. COMMUNICATION
5.1 MODBUSTM communication
Mode RTU (standard)
Transmission mode Synchronous
Interface RS 485, 2 wires and 1 Earth
Data rate 300 to 38400 baud (programmable)
Relay address 1 to 255
Connection Multi-point (32 connections)
Cable type Half duplex (screened twisted wire pair)
Maximum cable lengt 1000 meters
Connector Connector screws or snap-on
Insulation 2 kV RMS
5.2 Front communication
Interface RS232
Protocol MODBUSTM RTU
Connectors Sub-D 9 pin female connector
Cable type Screened twisted wire cable, no-crossed
Technical Data
6. INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

6.1 Inputs
Phase current In 1 and 5 Ampere
Earth current Ion 1 and 5 Ampere
Frequency Range 45 to 65 Hz
Nominal 50/60 Hz
Burdens Phase current inputs < 0.3 VA (5A)
< 0.025 VA (1A)
Earth current input < 0.01 VA at 0.1 Ion (5A)
<0.004 VA at 0.1 Ion (1A)
Thermal withstand of the phase 100 In - 1 s
and earth current inputs 40 In - 2 s
4 In – continuous
6.2 Logic inputs
Type Independent optical isolated
Number 5 (3 programmable, 2 fixe)
Burden < 10 mA for each input
Recognition time = 2.5 ms
The logic inputs shall be powered with a dc voltage.
Logic input operation

Cortec Relay auxiliary Minimum voltage Minimum current
Code voltage range* level (Volt) level (milli-Amp)
A 24 – 60 Vdc ≈ 15 V 3,35 mA
F 48 – 150 Vdc ≈ 25 V 3,35 mA
M 130 – 250 Vdc ≈ 38 V 2,20 mA
110 – 250 Vac
* The tolerance on the auxiliary voltage variations for the logic inputs is ±20%
6.3 Output relays
Type Dry contact AgCdO
Number 6 (5 programmable + 1 watchdog)
Commutation capacity Make 30 Amps for 3 s
Carry continuously 5 Amps
Break 135 Vdc, 0.3 Amps (L/R = 30 ms)
250 Vdc, 50 W resistive
250 Vdc, 25 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms)
220 Vac, 5 Amps (50/60Hz-cos ϕ=0.6)
Operation time < 7 ms
Durability > 100 000 operations
Technical Data
6.4 Auxiliary voltage

Auxiliary voltage 3 ranges 24-60 Vdc
48-150 Vdc
130-250 Vdc /110-250 Vac
Variations ±20%
Residual peak to peak ripple 12 %
Power off withstand 50 ms
Burden <3 W standby + 0.25 for each output
relay energized in Vdc < 6 VA in Vac
7. ACCURACY
Protection thresholds ±2%
Time delays ± 2 % with a minimum of 10 ms
NOTE: The user shall take into consiredation the Operating Time
(30ms) of the protection functions when setting the timers to low
values.
Measurements Typical ± 0.2 % at In for currents
± 2 °C for temperatures
Pass band for measurements 500Hz
of true RMS values
8. CT DATA
Phases CT primary 1 to 3000 by steps of 1
Earth CT primary 1 to 3000 by steps of 1
Phases CT secondary 1 or 5
Earth CT secondary 1 or 5
Recommended phases CT 5P10 - 5VA (typical)
Recommended earth CT Residual connection or core balanced CT
(preferred in isolated neutral systems)
9. HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND

Dielectric withstand (50/60Hz) IEC 60255-5 2 kV in common mode
BS 142 1 kV in differential mode
ANSI C37.90
Impulse voltage (1.2/50 µs) IEC 60255-5 5 kV in common mode
BS 142 1 kV in differential
mode
Insulation resistance EC 60255-5 > 100 MΩ
Technical Data
10. ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT

High frequency disturbance IEC 61000-4-12 2.5 kV in common mode, class 3
1 kV in differential mode, class 3
Fast transient disturbance IEC 61000-4-4 4 kV auxiliary supply, class 4
ANSI C37.90.1 2 kV other, class 4
Electrostatic discharge IEC 61000-4-2 8 kV, class 4
Radio frequency impulse ANSI C37.90.2 35 V/m
IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m
11. ENVIRONMENT
Temperature IEC 60255-6
Storing and transportation –40°C to + 70°C
Operation –25°C to + 55°C
Humidity IEC 60068-2-3 56 days at 93% RH and 40°C
Enclosure protection IEC 60529 IP 52, IK 07
Vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Response and endurance, class 2
Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2 Response and withstand, class 1
Seismic withstand IEC 60255-21-3 Class 2
Technical Data
12. THERMAL OVERLOAD CURVES
Thermal overload characteristic curves

Thermal constant times :
- overload condition : T e1 = 12 minutes
- start-up condition : T e2 = 6 minutes
10 000
1 000
Cold curve
Thermal status = 0 %
Operating time (seconds)
100
10
Hot curve
Thermal status = 90%
0
0.1 1 10
Thermal equivalent current I eq in terms of the current thermal threshold
Iθ > P0159ENa
Technical Data

Cold curves
Initial thermal state of 0%
100 000
10 000
Te1 = Te2 = 60 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 54 mn
1 000 Te1 = Te2 = 48 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 42 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 36 mn
100
10
Te1 = Te2 = 30 mn
Te1 = Te2 =24 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 18 mn
1 Te1 = Te2 = 12 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 6 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 1 mn
0
1 10
Thermal equivalent current I eq in terms of the current
thermal threshold I θ> P0160ENa
Technical Data
Thermal overload characteristic curve

Cold curves
100 000
10 000
Te1 = Te2 = 62 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 56 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 50 mn
1 000
Te1 = Te2 = 44 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 38 mn
100
Te1 = Te2 = 32 mn
10 Te1 = Te2 =26 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 20 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 14 mn
1 Te1 = Te2 = 8 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 2 mn
0
1 10
Thermal equivalent current Ieq in terms of the current

thermal threshold I q >
P0161ENa
Technical Data

Cold curves
100 000
10 000
Te1 = Te2 = 64 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 58 mn
1 000 Te1 = Te2 = 52 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 46 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 40 mn
100
Te1 = Te2 =34 mn
10 Te1 = Te2 =28 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 22 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 16 mn
1 Te1 = Te2 = 10 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 4 mn
0
1 10
Thermal equivalent current Ieq in terms of the current
Technical Data

Hot curves
100 000
10 000
1 000
Te1 = Te2 = 60 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 54 mn
100 Te1 = Te2 = 48 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 42 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 36 mn
10
Te1 = Te2 = 30 mn
Te1 = Te2 =24 mn

1
Te1 = Te2 = 18 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 12 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 6 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 1 mn
0
1 Thermal equivalent current I eq in terms of the current 10

Technical Data

Hot curves
100 000
10 000
1 000
Te1 = Te2 = 62 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 56 mn
100
Te1 = Te2 = 50 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 44 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 38 mn
10
Te1 = Te2 = 32 mn
Te1 = Te2 =26 mn
1
Te1 = Te2 = 20 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 14 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 8 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 2 mn
0
1 10

thermal threshold Ιθ > P0164ENa
Technical Data

Hot curves
100 000
10 000
1 000
Te1 = Te2 = 64 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 58 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 52 mn
100
Te1 = Te2 = 46 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 40 mn
10
Te1 = Te2 =34 mn
Te1 = Te2 =28 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 22 mn
1
Te1 = Te2 = 16 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 10 mn
Te1 = Te2 = 4 mn
0
1 10
Technical Data
BLANK PAGE
Technical Data
Cooling down thermal curves
100
90
80
Tr = 96 mn
70 Tr = 84 mn
60 Tr = 72 mn
50
Tr = 60 mn
Tr = 48 mn
Thermal state θ (en %)

40
Tr = 36 mn
30
20
Tr = 24 mn
10
Tr = 12 mn
Tr = 5 mn
0
0 100
Operating time (minutes)
P0221ENa
Technical Data
100
90
80
Tr = 204 mn
70
Tr = 192 mn
60 Tr = 180 mn
50 Tr = 168 mn
Tr = 156 mn

40
30 Tr = 144 mn
Tr = 132 mn
20
Tr = 120 mn
10
Tr = 108 mn
0
0 100 200
P0222ENa
Technical Data
100
90
80
Tr = 450 mn
70 Tr = 425 mn
Tr = 400 mn
60
Tr = 375 mn
50
Tr = 350 mn

40 Tr = 325 mn
30
Tr = 300 mn
20 Tr = 275 mn
10 Tr = 250 mn
Tr = 225 mn
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
P0223ENa
Technical Data
100
90
80 Tr = 96 mn
70 Tr = 84 mn
60 Tr = 72 mn
50 Tr = 60 mn
Tr = 48 mn
Thermal state θ (%)

40
Tr = 36 mn
30
20
Tr = 24 mn
10
Tr = 12 mn
Tr = 5 mn
0
0 100
Operating time (minutes) P0224ENa
Technical Data

100
90
80 Tr = 204 mn
Tr = 192 mn
70
Tr = 180 mn
60
Tr = 168 mn
50
Tr = 156 mn

40
Tr = 144 mn
30
Tr = 132 mn
20
Tr = 120 mn
10
Tr = 108 mn
0
0 100 200 300
P0225ENa
Technical Data

100
90
Tr = 450 mn
80
Tr = 425 mn
70
Tr = 400 mn
60
Tr = 375 mn
50 Tr = 350 mn

Tr = 325 mn
40
30
Tr = 300 mn
20 Tr = 275 mn
10 Tr = 250 mn
Tr = 225 mn
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
P0226ENa
Technical Data
Negative phase sequence protection

Inverse time characteristic curve
Ii>> element
10
Ii>> setting range

from 0,2 to 0,8 I2/In
0
0.1 1 10
Ratio "Negative phase sequence current/rated current" : I2 / In

P0227ENa
Technical Data
13. EQUIVALENCE TABLE BETWEEN THE RTD IMPEDANCE MEASURED

VALUE AND TEMPERATURE
100 OHM 100 OHM 120 OHM 10 OHM

Temperature (°C)
Platinum (Ω) Nickel (Ω) Nickel (Ω) Copper (Ω)
-40 84.27 79.13 92.76 7.490
-30 88.22 84.15 99.41 7.876
-20 92.16 89.23 106.41 8.263
-10 96.09 94.58 113.0 8.649
0 100.0 100.0 120.0 9.035
10 103.9 105.6 127.2 9.421
20 107.8 111.2 134.5 9.807
30 111.7 117.1 142.1 10.19
40 115.5 123.0 149.8 10.58
50 119.4 129.1 157.7 10.97
60 123.2 135.3 165.9 11.35
70 127.1 141.7 174.3 11.74
80 130.9 148.3 182.8 12.12
90 134.7 154.9 191.6 12.51
100 138.5 161.8 200.6 12.90
110 142.3 168.8 209.9 13.28
120 146.1 176.0 219.3 13.67
130 149.8 183.3 228.9 14.06
140 153.6 190.9 238.8 14.44
150 157.3 198.7 249.0 14.83
160 161.0 206.6 259.3 15.22
170 164.8 214.8 269.9 15.61
180 168.5 223.2 280.8 16.00
190 172.2 231.6 291.9 16.38
200 175.8 240.0 303.5 16.78
Technical Data
14. EQUIVALENCE TABLE BETWEEN ANALOGUE OUTPUT SIGNAL VALUE

AND REMOTE MEASUREMENT
The hereafter table provides equivalence data between the current signal issued from
the analogue output of the MiCOM P220 and the measurement value.
Rating 0 - 20 mA :
Rating
Measurement type HMI sign Unit Variation range
0 - 20 mA
Phase A current IA RMS Ampère 0 to 2 In Ias * 2 In / 20 mA
(True RMS value)
Phase A current IB RMS Ampère 0 to 2 In Is s* 2 In / 20 mA
(True RMS value)
Phase A current IC RMS Ampère 0 to 2 In Ias * 2 In / 20 mA
(True RMS value)
Earth current IE RMS Ampère 0 to 2 In Ias * 2 In / 20 mA
(True RMS value)
Motor thermal state TH STATE % 0 to 150 % Ias * 150 / 20 mA
Load in % of the full % I LOAD % 0 to 150 % Ias * 150 / 20 mA
load current
Time before a Tbef Start Minutes 0 to 120 Minutes Ias * 120 / 20 mA
permitted start
Time before a thermal Tbef Trip Minutes 0 to 120 Minutes Ias * 120 / 20 mA
trip
RTD’s temperature T°C RTD °C - 40 to 215 °C Ias * 255 / 20 mA – 40°C
Technical Data
Rating 4 - 20 mA :
Rating
Measurement type HMI sign Unit Variation range
4 - 20 mA
Phase A current IA RMS Ampère 0 to 2 In (Ias – 4 mA) * 2 In / 16 mA
(True RMS value)
Phase A current IB RMS Ampère 0 to 2 In (Ias – 4 mA) * 2 In / 16 mA
(True RMS value)
Phase A current IC RMS Ampère 0 to 2 In (Ias – 4 mA) * 2 In / 16 mA
(True RMS value)
Earth current IE RMS Ampère 0 to 2 In (Ias – 4 mA) * 2 In / 16 mA
(True RMS value)
Motor thermal state TH STATE % 0 to 150 % (Ias – 4 mA) * 150 / 16 mA
Load in % of the full % I LOAD % 0 to 150 % (Ias – 4 mA) * 150 / 16 mA
load current
Time before a Tbef Start Minutes 0 to 120 Minutes (Ias – 4 mA) * 120 / 16 mA
permitted start
Time before a thermal Tbef Trip Minutes 0 to 120 Minutes (Ias – 4 mA) * 120 / 16 mA
trip
RTD’s temperature T°C RTD °C - 40 to 215 °C (Ias – 4 mA) * 255 / 16 mA
– 40°C
NOTE : – Ias is the value of the current signal generated by the

analogue output.
– In the case where the measurement value to remote through
the analogue output is outside the permissible variation
range, the current signal is restricted to the limit value of the
variation range.
– In the case where the thermal alarm « θ ALARM » is not
energised, the current signal value meaning the time before a
thermal trip « Tbef Trip » is equal to 20 mA.
Technical Guide P220/EN AP/B43
MiCOM P220
Application Guide
Application Guide
CONTENTS
1. MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS AFFECTING SETTINGS 3

1.1 Induction motors 3
1.1.1 General 3
1.1.2 Thermal model 3
1.1.3 Start-up 4
1.1.4 Short circuits 5
1.1.5 Motor Duty rating 5
1.1.6 Motor rating as a function of altitude and of temperature 5
1.2 Environment 6
1.2.1 Fused contactor or circuit breaker 6
1.2.2 Residually connected or core-balance current transformers. 6
1.2.3 Choice of CT secondary (1A/5A) and of cross-section of secondary wiring. 7
1.2.4 Dimensioning of phase CT 8
1.3 Characteristics acquisition 8
2. SETTING FUNCTIONS 9
2.1 PROTECTION Menu 9
2.1.1 Thermal overload [49] 9
2.1.2 Short Circuit.[50/51] 15
2.1.3 Earth fault [50N/51N] 15
2.1.3.1 Neutral earthed through an impedance 16
2.1.3.2 Insulated neutral : 17
2.1.3.3 Solidly earthed neutral 17
2.1.4 Unbalance [46] 17
2.1.5 Excessive long start [48] 18
2.1.6 Locked rotor [51LR/50S] 19
2.1.6.1 Locked rotor during the start-up stage [50S] 19
2.1.6.2 Rotor stalled during normal run [51LR] 20
2.1.7 Loss of load [37] 20
2.1.8 RTD probe [49/38] and Thermistor [49] 20
2.2 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu 21
2.2.1 Limitation of the number of start-ups during a given period of time [66] 21
2.2.2 Time between two successive start-ups [66] 22
P220/EN AP/B43 Technical Guide
Application Guide
2.2.3 Re-acceleration 22
2.2.3.1 Authorisation of re-acceleration 23
2.2.3.2 Load shedding on voltage dip 23
3. EXAMPLE OF NUMERICAL APPLICATION 25

3.1 Network data 25
3.2 Motor data: 25
3.3 List of settings: 26
4. SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS 30
4.1 Logic selectivity 30
4.2 Authorisation of re-acceleration – Load shedding on voltage dips 33
4.3 Setting groups 35
5. BIBLIOGRAPHY 36
6. APPENDIX A : SERVICE DUTY 37
7. APPENDIX B : INFORMATION NEEDED FOR ADJUSTMENT 39

Application Guide
1. MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS AFFECTING SETTINGS

1.1 Induction motors
1.1.1 General
Currently the majority of motors used in industry are induction and this application
guide deals with these motors. The P220 relay can nevertheless be used as
multifunction relay to protect a high-power synchronous motor. In this case, one
should draw on the principles of protection of synchronous generators, the
characteristics of synchronous generators being very close to those of synchronous
motors.
1.1.2 Thermal model
The physical and electrical construction of the motor is very complex, the various
applications, the variety of the possible conditions of abnormal operations and the
various modes of failures which can occur make the relations of its thermal state very
complex. This is why, it is difficult to create a mathematical model of the thermal
characteristics of the machine.
There are two principal causes of damage to motors, short-circuits and heating of the
windings. With regard to the heating, it is possible to model the heat propagation
within the motor.
• In a sequence of heating at a constant current, the temperature of the motor
varies with time similar to the charge of a capacitor under a constant voltage
applied via a resistor. The applied voltage is proportional to the square of the
current. The time-constant of the phenomenon is then τ = RC.
So the thermal image takes into consideration the fact that the temperature of the
motor is proportional to the square of the absorbed current.
TEMPERATURE = K. (IR)².(1-e-t/τ)
With
IR = current circulating in the Motor and producing Tmax.
For a current value “I”, the temperature is
TEMPERATURE = K. (I)².(1-e-t/τ)
This results in :
The time “t” during which the motor can support the overload current “I” is:
t = τ. Ln [ 1/ { 1- ( IR / I)² }]
There are three stages of heat exchange, each of them having its own time-constant:
− The start (the value of current >2*[Iθ>], [Iθ>] being the threshold of
thermal overload current) during which the temperature of the copper stator
windings grows before diffusing heat into the laminations, and the
temperature of the rotor rises quickly,
− The common overload (the value of current between 0 and 2*[Iθ>]), the
current being close to nominal or a few percentage points higher. The
phenomenon consists of a slow thermal diffusion process through the mass
of the rotor and the stator.
− The cooling-down (motor stopped), which is a slower phenomenon
compared to the heating-up since the air gap is not cooled by the rotor fan.
Application Guide
• The simulation takes into account the square of the positive phase sequence
component of the current, plus the product of the square of the negative
component of the current by a factor Ke, to give the equivalent thermal current
Ieq: Ieq = I12 + KxI2 2
NOTE: The presence of the negative sequence component of voltage

across the motor terminals creates a pulsating current with a
frequency of 2ω inside the rotor. This overheats the rotor
considerably. The inclusion of the factor Ke in the equation
above allows for the additional heating in the rotor.
Negative sequence components can be created by:
– an unbalanced three phase load
– the presence of an external asymmetrical fault,
– the loss of one or two phases.
1.1.3 Start-up
Induction motors can be started ;
− direct-on-line
− star-delta
− through an auto-transformer
− with a liquid starter,
− by the addition of external rotor resistance
− with an electronic starter
− ……
These limit the rotor torque and the rotor current to acceptable limits
Depending on the type of start, the magnitude of the start-up current fluctuates and
can even become zero (for example, during the change of connection types in a star-
delta start-up). It is thus advisable to consider, the total duration of the sequence as
being the start up time.
The duration of start-up depends on the characteristics of the load and the motor
and, therefore, cannot be derived only from the characteristics of the motor. By way
of illustration one can consider the following equation:
2∏N 1
td = J × × , where
60 Cam
− td : start time
− J: moment of inertia of the «load + motor» set measured about the motor
shaft, in kg∗m2
− N: speed of rotation, in RPM
− Cam : average accelerating torque, in Nm
Application Guide
The start-up current depends on the characteristics of the motor and the type of start
(direct on_line, soft).
• In the case of direct-on-line start-up (100% of the nominal voltage is applied
across the terminals) the currents are large and can reach values up to 10 times
higher than the rated current of the motor, a typical average value being of order
of 5 times the rated current.
• During soft start-ups, however the current can remain at the rated motor values.
However, one should remember that during the re-acceleration stages (caused by
a provisional, total or partial, loss of voltage), the motor will absorb a re-
acceleration current equal to its direct start-up current. This must be taken into
account when adjusting the “Locked rotor” and “Short-circuit” functions.
1.1.4 Short circuits
In the event of a short-circuit close to the motor, the motor will feed the fault by
transforming its kinetic energy into electric power. The resulting current is of short
duration: a few hundreds of milliseconds, except for the high-inertia motors where
the current can last several seconds. In the first moments, the amplitude of this
current is as high as that of the direct-on-line start-up current. Therefore, the
constraints to be taken into account when setting the “ Locked Rotor” and “Short-
circuit” functions are the same as for the re-acceleration, and this contribution to the
fault current should not activate these two functions.
When calculating a possible short-circuit currents on the network, it will be necessary
to take into account the contribution of motors to the fault current. This current
contribution may even exceed double the fault current value during the first 100
milliseconds. Consequently, they affect the setting of instantaneous current base
protections and the rating of the equipment to withstand the fault currents.
1.1.5 Motor Duty rating
The duty ratings can be:
• Continuous
• Temporary
• Intermittent (periodic)
The manufacturers of motors oversize their power by a factor depending on the
service duty. For the service duty chosen, one also obtains the maximum number of
motor starts per hour (or, in other words, a motor will tolerate more or less starts per
hour depending on its oversizing).
1.1.6 Motor rating as a function of altitude and of temperature
As the altitude increases, the air becomes more rarefied so the quality of the motor
cooling deteriorates. Because of this a correction factor being a function of the
altitude must be applied.
Likewise, as the ambient temperature rises, the efficiency of cooling decreases. This
should be taken into account by applying a correction factor.
Application Guide
Shown below is a monogram relating the derating factors applicable to motors at

various altitudes.
Temperature correction factor
40˚C
1
45˚C
50˚C
0.9
55˚C
80˚C
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0 1000 2000 3000

altitude (m)
P0169ENa
The P220 relay . incorporates these derating factors within the relay. The correction is
linear between 40°C (correction factor =1) and 65°C (correction factor = 0,75).
For this purpose, the relay measures the ambient temperature using an external RTD
(resistance temperature detector) probe. This RTD probe is usually placed near the
cooling air inlet of the motor.
1.2 Environment
1.2.1 Fused contactor or circuit breaker
The majority of motors, especially the low-power ones, are connected to the network
via a fused contactor or fused switch. This breaking device may not have sufficient
breaking capacity to interrupt the fault (short-circuit) current. The fault current can
easily reach values of up to ten times the rated current of the motor. Consequently,
when the current exceeds the breaking capacity of the contactor, contactor tripping
should be disabled. This tripping would generate a permanent arc across the contacts
leading to the destruction of the contactor. Back up fuse protection must be used to
ensure that the contactor/switch is not destroyed in the event of excessive current flow.
This problem does not arise when a circuit breaker is used.
1.2.2 Residually connected or core-balance current transformers.
The readings of the zero-sequence current which is characteristic of an earth fault can
be taken either:
• by residual connection of the 3 phase current transformers (CT) (connecting in
parallel the 3 CTs and adding up the secondary currents),
• or by the use of a core balance current transformer with a core incorporating the
3 phase conductors (adding up of the magnetic fields inside the core).
If the neutral of the network is grounded through a limiting impedance or, isolated in
the case of an insulated neutral, a core balance current transformer is preferred as it
avoids the possible problems of a false zero-sequence current created by the
asymmetrical saturation of the phase CTs, or even the complete saturation of one of
them during the start-up. These currents can reach values up to several times the
motor rated current (typically 5 Inmotor), and this phenomenon can be aggravated by
the magnetisation of CTs when opposite retentive fluxes exist in the CTs.
These shortcomings may be overcome by employing suitable earth fault settings and
by careful selection of the CTs, but the use of a core balance transformer is
recommended.
Application Guide
Type of grounding Preferential solution Solution alternative

Solidly earthed neutral 3 CT (+a stabilising 3 CT + core balance
point resistance) transformer
Neutral earthed through 3 CT + core balance 3 CT (+a stabilising
impedance (ex: current transformer resistance), or
limited to30A by a
2 CT + core balance
resistance)
transformer (cost-effective
solution)
Insulated neutral 3 CT + core balance 2 CT + core balance
transformer transformer (cost-effective
solution)
1.2.3 Choice of CT secondary (1A/5A) and of cross-section of secondary wiring.

A current transformer (phase CT or balance-core current transformer) must supply the
power consumed by:
• its internal resistance (design feature of CT)
• the secondary wiring (cross-section 2.5 mm2, 4mm2, 6mm2…)
• connected loads (one or more protection relays etc.)
If the protection relay is situated at a considerable distance from CTs, the load
constituted by the wiring cannot be considered to be negligible:
Example:
• relay 200 m distant from CTs
• rated secondary current 5A
• wiring: copper, cross-section 2.5 mm2
calculation of cable consumption:
− cable length = 2 x 200m = 400m
− cable resistance R = 0.4 km x 18 / 2.5 mm2 = 2.9Ω
− Hence the cable losses = 2.9Ω x (5A)2 = 73 W.
If the rated secondary current is chosen to be 1A, the cable losses are
− cable resistance R = 0.4 km x 18 / 2.5 mm2 = 2.9Ω
− hence the wiring consumption is = 2.9Ω x (1A)2 = 2.9 W
If the CTs are not in close proximity to the relay it is advisabe to use 1A CTs to
minimise the cable losses and to reduce the burden on the CTs.
Application Guide
1.2.4 Dimensioning of phase CT

The consumption of the phase current input terminals of the MiCOM P220 relay is:
− ≤ 0.3 VA In = 5A
− ≤ 0.025 VA In = 1A
The rule to follow in the case of CT saturation is:
• The threshold for the short-circuit current should be set below 90% of the limiting
overload current of CTs. Under these conditions the tripping is guaranteed for
fault currents up to 50 times the value of saturation current without an aperiodic
component of CT current.
Choice of phase CTs:
• Applications only for voltages ≤ 20 kV
• Rf = total resistance of the wiring (+ other possible loads on CT), in Ohms
• In = rated secondary current for CT and relay (1A or 5 A)
• Icc = maximum symmetrical three-phase fault current of the secondary wiring of
CT (in Amps).
Phase CT CT rating (IEC 185) Note

Breaking Load in VA Accuracy
device
Contactor or 5A ≥ (0.3 + Rf x In2) 5P10
Switch
+ Fuse 1A ≥ (0.025 + Rf x In2) 5P10
5A ≥ (0.3 + Rf x In2) 5P K with
 Icc 
K≥   Setting of the
Circuit-  50 × In  threshold of short-
breaker 1A ≥ (0.025 + Rf x In2) 5P K with circuit current:
≤ 0.9 x K x In
 Icc 
K≥  
 50 × In 
NOTE: For economic reasons, a CT with a 10% accuracy (10P) can be
used instead of one with 5% (5P), however the thresholds of
thermal overload and unbalance protections will be less precise,
which can be perfectly acceptable if the motor has been
oversized in relation to its duty or not used for heavy-duty
services.
1.3 Characteristics acquisition
Before setting the relay it is vital to ensure that the correct motor parameters detailed
in appendix have been obtained.
Application Guide
2. SETTING FUNCTIONS
2.1 PROTECTION Menu
2.1.1 Thermal overload [49]
Overloads can result in excessive stator temperature rises in excess of the thermal
limit of the winding insulation. Whilst this may not cause the motor to burn out
immediately, it has been shown that the life of the motor can be shortened if these
overloads persist. The life of the motor is not purely dependant on the temperature of
the windings but on the time that it is exposed to these temperatures. Due to the
relatively high thermal storage capacity of induction motors, infrequent overloads of a
short duration may be tolerated without damage. Sustained overloads of a small
percentage may result in premature ageing and insulation failure.
In the same way, an unevenly distribution of load or a slight unbalance of the
network brings about the appearance of negative sequence currents which also
contribute to the heating of the rotor (for more details, see the negative overcurrent
protection function).
The motor temperature varies exponentially with the increase of the current. Similarly,
the temperature decreases in the same way. So to provide a close sustained overload
protection, the relay incorporates three thermal time constants, thanks to which the
thermal reproduction of the relay is paired narrowly with the protected motor during
heating and cooling conditions.
The thermal withstand capability of the motor is affected by heating in the winding
prior to the fault. The thermal replica is designed to take into account the extremes of
zero pre-fault current, known as the “cold” condition, and full rated pre-fault current,
known as the “hot” condition. With no pre fault current, the relay will be operating on
the “cold curve”. When the motor is , or has been, running at full load prior to a
fault, the windings will already be dissipating heat and the “hot curve “ is applicable.
Therefore, during normal operation, the relay will be operating within these two
limits, unless programmed to do otherwise.
However, it should be noted that the overload protection includes the monitoring of
both the stator and the rotor. This protection can be realised in various ways:
• 1: direct measurement through the use of temperature sensors (see the
corresponding paragraphs),
• 2: indirect measurement by the means of current measurement,
• 3: by a combination of the two preceding principles.
The P220 relay design combines all three principles listed. No.1 is detailed below in
the paragraph dealing with overload protection through the use of temperature
sensors. No.2 and No.3 are described in this paragraph.
Application Guide
In the case of minor overloads and of light-duty service conditions, stator current
measurement is sufficient to ensure protection. This control can be achieved using a
time-independent current threshold setting for a definite time overcurrent protection
or, still better, IDMT overcurrent protection. The thermal protection elements which
are overheated by a fraction of the main current, have a time-constant which is very
close to that of the motor. This makes it possible to obtain a real-time image of the
thermal status of insulation. This type of protection takes into account the fact that the
steady-state temperature of the motor is proportional to the square of the absorbed
current, the protection is also provided with a cold curve and a hot curve to ensure
that the relay takes into account the initial motor temperature.
The thermal protection described above makes use of current measurement to protect
the motor. Hence it will monitor balanced and unbalanced overloads. The thermal
time-constant is adjustable in order to match any type of motor. The positive (I1) and
negative (I2) components of the current are composed together in order to result in a
equivalent thermal current replica of the temperature of the motor.
2 2
This equivalent thermal current is given by the equation : Ieq = √(I1 + Kex I2 ),
where Ke is an adjustable parameter used to account for the effects of heating
produced by the negative component of the current when developing the thermal
image.
From this equivalent thermal current, the thermal state θ of the motor is calculated
every 5 cycles (every 100ms for a network of 50 Hz or 83.3ms for 60 Hz) by the relay
in accordance with the following formula.
θ i+1 = (Ieq/Iθ>)² . [1-e(-t/T) ] + θ i . e(-t/T)
θ i : is the initial thermal state.
If the absorbed current is less than the thermal overload threshold [Iθ>], thus typically
less than the nominal current or the full load current, then
the thermal state θ will be less than 100% , so no tripping occurs.
If the absorbed current is greater than the thermal overload threshold [Iθ>], in this
case the thermal state θ will be greater than 100% and so tripping will take place.
In the thermal model selected, the time of tripping depends on the initial state of the
motor. The equation used to calculate the tripping time for a thermal state of the
motor at 100 % is:
2 2
t = T x ln[ (K - θi) / (K -1)]
The equation is valid for currents whose value is constant over a certain period of
time, where:
− the value of T, thermal time-constant which depends on the value of the ratio
Ieq / Iθ:
T = Te1 if 0 < Ieq ≤ 2*Iθ (overload curve )
T = Te2 if Ieq > 2*Iθ (start-up curve )
T = Tr if Ieq=0 (cooling curve –motor stopped)
NOTE: Ieq = 0 is obtained through the logic input No.1 of the relay
which recovers the information «contactor position open».
− Iθ = thermal current threshold setting
− K = Ieq/ Iθ
− θi = initial thermal state of the motor (ex.: thermal state of 50% ! θi=0.5)
Application Guide
• The heating time-constant Te1 can be estimated from the motor heating curve as
shown below.
Motor heating curve

Temperature
θm
0.632 θ m
Te Time
P0170ENa
This curve corresponds to the following law:

θ(t) = θm * (1 – e-t/Te) ,
Where:
θm = maximum temperature after stabilisation of heat exchange,
in degrees °C
Te = heating time-constant
t = time elapsed
The heating time-constant can be clearly defined. When a motor is absorbing its
rated current indefinitely, it reaches 63.2% of its steady-state temperature (θT =
63.2% θm) after one time-constant Te.
The cold curve of the motor is thus given by:
2 2
t = Tr x ln[ K / (K –1)]
Where the equation for the motor cooling temperature is given by.
θ = K² (1 – e –t/Tr ).
When the motor is stopped, the rotor fan cooling is stopped also, hence the motor
cooling down is few efficient. This causes the cooling time-constant to increase
considerably This constant is generally much longer than the heating time-constant.
In order to compensate for this phenomenon and to obtain a correct thermal replica,
the cooling time constant is used by the relay.
An adjustable cooling time-constant (Tr) is provided in order to take into account the
various modes of cooling.
The cooling time-constant Tr can be estimated from the motor cooling curve in the
following way:
Application Guide
Motor cooling-down curve
Temperature
θm
0.368 θ m
Tr
Time
P0171ENa
This curve corresponds to the following law:

θ(t) = θm * e-t/Tr,
Where:
θm = maximum temperature when motor is stopped
Tr = cooling time-constant
t = time elapsed
The cooling time-constant can be clearly defined . When a motor is stopped, its
internal temperature decreases with time. This internal temperature reaches 36,8% of
the initial temperature (temperature at the time when the motor was turned off) at the
end of the period, which is equal to its time-constant Tr.
The P220 relay also has:
• a thermal alarm to inform the user (when in operation mode) if the motor is likely
to become overloaded before a trip occurs. Remedial action can then be taken
before the motor is tripped.
• Inhibition of a thermal tripping during starting
During the start-up stage (i.e. during the parametrically defined start-up delay time
tIstart), it is possible to inhibit thermal tripping. When thermal inhibition during start-up
is enabled, the calculation of the thermal state during the start-up delay time tIstart
remains effective but should this value exceed 90%, the value of the thermal state
would be retained at 90%. When the start-up delay time expires, the thermal
inhibition during start-up disappears. This function does not affect the operation of
the thermal alarm feature.
This inhibition during start-up can be useful for certain motors which can withstand a
locked rotor for a very short time but normally have very long start up times. This can
be the case of certain motors started using reduced voltage. The time-constant Te2 is
then set to take into account rapid heating which occurs if the rotor is locked,
whereas the motor would be thermally protected during the start-up stage by the
function «Start-up too long» and, as the case may be, by the temperature sensors.
Application Guide
• Thermal prohibition of restart

• To a certain extent, the thermal overload protection can limit the number of start-
ups by selecting a curve located just above the point of start-up. It is is actually
very difficult to satisfy the manufacturer’s recommendations, for the limit of the
number of starts by the thermal overload protection. This may allow the motor to
start and then to exceed the maximum temperature.
The purpose of the "Thermal prohibition of start-up "function is to avoid thermal
tripping during the start-up sequence of the motor. The motor will have to cool down
before it will be authorised to start.
The tripping time for the thermal replica protection is calculated in the following way:
ttrip = T * ln { [(Ieq / Iθ>)2 - θinitial] / [(Ieq / Iθ>)2 - 1] } (1)
in order to avoid thermal tripping during the start-up stage, ttrip > td.
Therefore, according to (1),
td < Te2 * ln { [(Id / Iθ>)2 - θforbid start] / [(Id / Iθ>)2 - 1] }
Hence it follows that the setting of the threshold of prohibition of start-up θforbid start
must be lower than:
θforbid start < [(Id / Iθ>)2 * (1 – exp(td / Te2))] + exp (td / Te2)
Where:
Id = actual start-up current,
td = actual start-up time,
Te2 = thermal time-constant at the moment of start-up,
Iθ> = current threshold of thermal overload,
ttrip = time of tripping for the thermal replica protection.
• Thermal image influenced by the ambiant temperature
At the beginning of this paragraph we said that the overload protection afforded by
the P220 relay can also be ensured by a combination of a temperature sensor (direct
heating measurement), and a current measurement (indirect heating measurement).
In this case, it is possible to modify the calculated thermal image of the motor by
making use of information about the temperature outside of the motor. The
programmed thermal current threshold can be corrected using correction factors to
give a more precise representation of the thermal state of the motor.
This thermal current threshold correction factor is applied automatically by the relay
when calculating the thermal state of the motor – if this facility is set on.
The values of this factor is given below:
Ambient temperature 40° 45° 50° 55° 60° 65°

Thermal current threshold
1 0.95 0.90 0.85 0.80 0.75
correction factor (Coef)
Application Guide
A typical setting of the thermal protection is :
− Thermal overload current threshold [Iθ >] : between 105% et 108% (max.) of
the motor rated current (this threshold is typically equivalent to the full load
current).
NOTE: The nominal current : is the current value for which the moteur
supplies his maximum efficiency.
The Full Load current : is the limit value of the thermal current
value of the motor with the time under its continuous duty rating
(This term is used in North of America)
− Negative sequence current recognition factor : [Ke] = 3
− Heating time-constants (Te1), during the start-up (Te2) and the cooling-down
time constants (Tr):
The manufacturer should be consulted for the heating and cooling time
constants.
⇒ Te1 must be set to be equal to, or even slightly lower than the motor
manufacturer’s value ( Stator thermal heating).
⇒ Te2 must be typically set to be lower than or equal to Te1. It is used to
modify the thermal curve of the motor during the start phase . In case of
a SOFT start, (Yye/Delta) for example, the current absorbed by the
motor after the start phase is 57% of the current controlled by the relay
(Delta connection) while durning the start phase ( Yye connection), the
current absorbed by the motor is equal to the current monitored by the
relay. For that, Te2 is used to reduce the operating time during the start
up. For application with Direct-on-line start up, adjust Te2=Te1, which
results in one thermal curve.
⇒ It is important to plot the thermal characteristics chosen to assure that
the “COLD” curve has no intersection area with the start up
charactersistics. In certain applications, the time constants could not be
available. However, a graphical presentation of these values could be
given. In this case, Te1 should be selected so once it is plotted, it will
match the cold motor curve.
⇒ For applications where neither constant time values nor thermal curves
are given, Te1 and Te2 should be chosen in such a way that they fall
above the start up characteristics but below the motor locked Rotor
current threshold. In this way, the thermal overload protection assure to
a certain degree the protection under locked rotor conditions.
⇒ The cooling-down time-constant Tr should ideally be set slightly higher
than the value provided by the manufacturer.
This element is important with motors having differents functionning
cycles because the precise information of the motor thermal state is
needed during heating and cooling phases. Il is usually a multiple of
Te1.
REMARK: IF HOWEVER THE MANUFACTURER’S DATA ARE NOT KNOWN, ONE SHOULD SET
THE FOLLOWING VALUES: TE1 = TE2 = 14MIN AND TR = 28MIN.
Application Guide
• Alarm threshold θALARM: Its setting is primarily related to the motor operation
modes and the concept of protection. A typical adjustment consists of setting the
threshold θALARM to be slightly higher than the ratio (Irated motor / Iθ>)2 , which
generally corresponds to a value of about 90%.
2.1.2 Short Circuit.[50/51]
A phase to phase short-circuit at the terminals of the motor or in the feeder cables,
draws very large currents capable of damaging the motor and its feeder cable This
also poses the threat of fire within the motor room.
In this case ,it is essential to detect the fault and to send the tripping command
rapidly to the breaking device. To attain these objectives, the P220 relay is provided
with an overcurrent element operating on fundamental component, with a settable
definite time delay.
The current threshold must be set as low as possible, without tripping due to
− the start-up current of the motor
− the contribution of the motor to an external fault as well as
− the re-acceleration current due to voltage drops.
In order to achieve this, the direct on-line start-up current must always be taken into
account in the calculation of the setting even if the motor started under reduced
voltage (soft start). Thus the short-circuit current threshold must be set higher than the
direct on-line start-up current value.
Taking into account aperiodic current components, the typical settings are:
− [I>>] = 130% x kstart x Inmotor and [tI>>] = 100ms
− [I>>] = 180% x kstart x Inmotor and [tI>>] = 0 ms
where kstart : start-up current of the motor in per unit.
It should then be checked that the threshold [I>>] is lower than :

− 90% of the limiting saturation current of the CTs used, and
− 1/3 of the minimum three-phase fault current at the motor terminals.
IMPORTANT: IF A FUSED CONTACTOR IS USED TO CONTROL THE MOTOR , THE SHORT
CIRCUIT PROTECTION MUST NOT TRIP THE CONTACTOR. THE SHORT
CIRCUIT PROTECTION MUST BE DISABLED AND THE FUSE SHOULD
INTERRUPT THE FAULT CURRENT. IF THE CONTACTOR IS ALLOWED TO
INTERRUPT FAULT CURRENT, SERIOUS DAMAGE COULD BE CAUSED DUE
TO EXCESSIVE ARCING AT THE CONTACTS.
2.1.3 Earth fault [50N/51N]
Overheating of the stator windings is likely to lead to insulation deterioration. Since
the windings are surrounded by an earthed metal case, stator faults usually manifest
themselves as earth faults.
To protect against this, the P220 relay is provided with two independent earth fault
overcurrent elements with settable definite time delays. This function reacts only to the
fundamental component of the earth fault current, and thus remains insensitive to the
disturbances of the higher-order harmonics (equal to or higher than 2).
Application Guide
The earth fault protection function may be provided either by residual connection of
the 3 phase current transformers (CTs), or by the use of a core-balance current
transformer.
It is preferable to use a core balance current transformer as this is more stable and is
more sensitive. If residually connected CTs are used, the tripping setting would have
to be increased by as much as 10 % higher than the rated current of the CT. This is
highly undesirable because of the resulting increase in the earth fault current setting.
Incorrect tripping can result from the saturation of one or more CTs during motor
starting. Increased stability can be achieved in two ways :
• increasing the current threshold,
• insertion of a stabilising resistance in series with the P220 relay.
The value of stabilising resistor can be found from the following equation.
Rstab > (Id / Is) * (RCT + 2*Rf + RRE),
where:
Id = start-up current magnitude brought to the secondary
Is = earth fault setting in Amps (threshold Io> or Io>>)
RCT = dc resistance of CT secondary windings.
Rf = resistance of single lead from CT to relay
RRE = other resistances connected in series to the CT (relays etc.)
The following earthing systems may be employed.

2.1.3.1 Neutral earthed through an impedance
The earth fault current is mainly comprising active current component resulting from
the resistance of neutral point, the capacitive zero sequence (residual) contribution
from the cables being of much lower value, even negligible.
Typical settings are :
• in the case of a residual connection to three phase CTs:
− [Io>>] is higher than 10% of the CT rated primary current, and
− 2 times higher than the capacitive residual current resulting from the motor
feeder cables in case of external fault, and
− lower than the residual current resulting from the resistance of neutral point,
and
− [t Io>>] = 100 ms
• in the case of a core balance transformer.
− [Io>>] is 2 times higher than the capacitive residual current resulting from
the motor feeder cables in case of external fault, and
− lower than the residual current resulting from the resistance of neutral point,
− [tIo>>] = 100 ms
Note that current settings lower than 1 Amps are usually not applied.
Application Guide
2.1.3.2 Insulated neutral :

A core balanced transformer is used as the fault current is due to the cable capacitive
leakage current.
A single earth fault will not cause the relay to trip but the fault should be localised .
− [ Io>> ] is 2 times higher than the capacitive residual current resulting from
the motor feeder cables in case of external fault, and
− lower than the capacitive residual current resulting from the other cables,
− [tIo>>] = 100 ms.
Note that current settings lower than 1 Amps are usually not applied.
If these settings are not compatible with the maximum value of the earth fault current,
it is then necessary to use a directional earth fault relay.
2.1.3.3 Solidly earthed neutral
The earth fault current is mainly inductive current, with magnitude being close to that
of the three-phase short-circuit fault currents. The contribution of capacitive residual
current from the cables is negligible.
• in the case of a residual connection to three phase CTs:
− [Io>>] is higher than 10% of the CT rated primary current, and
− [tIo>>] = 100 ms
2.1.4 Unbalance [46]

Under normal motor running conditions only positive sequence current components
flow. The presence of a negative sequence component produces a field revolving in
an opposite direction to that of the rotor. It induces rotor winding currents at double
the supply network frequency. The skin effect in the rotor winding bars at this
frequency can cause a significant increase in the resistance of the rotor. The rotor will
overheat leading to deformation of the rotor bars and damage to them. This imposes
additional heating of the stator that is in excess of the manufacturers rating.
Even if the thermal protection provided by this relay takes into account negative
sequence component of the current, it will not account for the additional heating due
to high unbalance rate. In the event of the motor losing one phase of its supply,
considerable overheating would occur, hence protection for negative sequence is
employed separately
In order to provide this function, the P220 relay is equipped with two independent
negative sequence overcurrent elements. The first one, denoted by [Ii>], is an alarm
threshold associated with an adjustable constant time. The second, denoted [Ii>>], is
a threshold of tripping associated with a inverse time characteristic curve. The
features of this curve are described in chapter 5.3 of this technical guide.
The equation of this curve is :
for 0.2 < (I2/In) < 2 --> t = 1.2 / (I2/ In)
Application Guide
This type of curve has the following advantages:

1. For an external fault:
• to desensitise the relay during a violent unbalance fault occurring upstream or on
external feeders, when the motor temporarily behaves like a negative current
generator ; selective tripping at the faulty feeder level is secured - the inverse time
characteristic curve allows co-ordination with the faulty feeder protection relay.
• to avoid nuisance tripping which may occur due to high starting currents causing
the CTs to saturate.
2. For a motor fault.
• To ensure rapid fault interruption, but to retain co-ordination with protective fuses
when fused contactors are used.
It should be noted that the single-phase and two-phase faults also generate negative
currents. However, the value of the single-phase fault current is generally limited, and
in any case these faults are eliminated by relevant protection with a time shorter than
that afforded by the IDMT curve.
Typical settings are
• alarm threshold : [Ii>] = 15% of the motor rated current, with a delay time of
about 8 to 10s,
• tripping threshold : [Ii>>] = 20% of the motor rated current.
2.1.5 Excessive long start [48]

The start-up current is specific to each motor and depends on the start-up method
used (direct on-line, autotransformer, rotor resistance insertion, etc.). As for the start-
up time, it is dependent of the load connected to the motor.
During the start-up period, this current surge imposes a thermal strain on the rotor.
This is exaggerated as the rotor will have lost all of its ventilation because it does not
rotate at the full speed. Consequently, a long start-up causes a rapid heating of the
motor. For this reason, this protection is complementary to the thermal overload
protection, and makes it possible to check that the start-up sequence does not exceed
the parameters given by the manufacturer
The MiCOM P220 relay offers the choice of motor start-up detection as follows :
• closure of the contactor/circuit breaker, or
• closure of the contactor/circuit breaker and overshoot of the starting current
threshold [Istart].
The user can configure either option using the CONFIGURATION menu. Method 1 is
recommended. This detects the start sequence on the circuit breaker closure.
The function " Excessive long start " is initiated either by the detection of a start-up
sequence, or (under normal operation) by the detection of a phase of re-acceleration.
If at the end of delay time [tIstart] the current remains higher than the threshold [Istart],
then a trip takes place.
Application Guide

• [Istart] is equal to:
⇒ 1.5*[Iθ>] if the motor start-up current is lower than 4 times the rated
current;
⇒ 2*[Iθ>] if the motor start-up current is equal to or higher than 4 times the
rated current and lower than 8 times the rated current;
rated current.
• [tIstart] = 120 % of the time of start-up and shorter than withstand time for the
motor.
2.1.6 Locked rotor [51LR/50S]
There are two possible conditions for the rotor becoming locked : at motor start-up or
during normal run. Whatever the case, a locked rotor produces an input current
equivalent to the direct on-line starting current.
The most frequent cause of a locked rotor is to a phase break (eg: melting of a fuse
protecting the motor, or one pole of a contactor remaining open.). A stationary motor
can not start and remains stationary with two phases feeding the stator. In the same
way, a locked rotor can take place after the loss of a phase after the motor has been
working normally. The appearance and the importance of a locked rotor depend on
the motor load at the time when the loss of phase occurs. In both cases the result is
likely to be a thermal overloading of the rotor windings.
Under healthy conditions, a revolving flux is induced in the rotor, which generates
balanced rotor current in the windings which produce symmetrical rotor heating. In
the event of the loss of one phase of the supply, a heterogeneous flux is induced in
the rotor as a result of the positive component and the negative components of the
current. This causes uneven heating of the rotor windings which depend on the
position of the rotor bars. This can lead to the damage of the rotor bars. For these
reasons, it is important to eliminate the fault as quickly as possible.
2.1.6.1 Locked rotor during the start-up stage [50S]
This function is enabled only during the motor start-up stage. In order to take
advantage of this function, the motor has to be equipped with a tachometric control,
which indicates if the motor turns. This information is carried to a digital input of the
relay so that the relay can detect whether the motor’s speed is or is not zero. A locked
rotor is detected if, after expiration of delay time [tIstall], the digital input indicates zero
speed (logic 0).
Motors for which the real start-up time is shorter than their locked rotor withstand
time can be protected against locked rotor condition at start-up without the help of a
tachymetric control device (speed switch). For such cases, the use of [tIstart] time setting
(refer to « [48] Excessive long start » function) shorter than the motor locked rotor
withstand time allows to provide efficient protection against both too long start-up
sequence and locked rotor at start-up conditions.
Application Guide
2.1.6.2 Rotor stalled during normal run [51LR]

This function is valid only outside the re-acceleration and start-up stages. Tripping
takes place if the current remains higher than [Istall] for a time period equal to or
higher than delay time [stall].
Typical settings of the function [ 51LR/50S ] are :
• [Istall] :
⇒ 1.5*[Iθ>] if the motor start-up current is lower than 4 times the rated
current;
rated current and lower than 8 times the rated current;
⇒ 3[Iθ>] if the motor start-up current is equal to or higher than 8 times the
rated current.
• [tIstall] is 1 to 2 s for a pump and a fan, and 5 to 10 s for a crusher. In all the
cases, this setting must be lower than the withstand time for the motor with the
rotor stalled.
2.1.7 Loss of load [37]
This function makes it possible to detect the motor running without a load connected
on the output shaft. It is automatically disabled when the motor is off, and it is
reactivated after the inhibit time has expired [Tinhib]. This delay time [Tinhib] allows the
motor to perform an off-load start.
The use of this undercurrent protection function allows:
• protection against the electrical pumps becoming unprimed.
• protection against a drive belt or drive shaft breakdown.
Typical settings are:
• [I<] = higher than the no-load running current of the motor and lower than the
normal running current of the motor in normal operation,
• [Tinhib] = This setting depends on the load connected to the motor. If the motor is
started on load , this delay time is set to its minimal value, that is to say 0,05 s. If
the motor is idle-started, this delay time is set to be slightly longer than the load
increase time of the motor.
• [tI<] = depends on the load driven by the motor (often set to a few seconds).
2.1.8 RTD probe [49/38] and Thermistor [49]
Prolonged overloads make the windings hot, which can cause a premature ageing of
the insulation. In the same way, the excessive heating of the bearings can lead to
irreversible damage.
As explained in the paragraph dealing with the thermal overload protection [ 49],
this function can be realised either indirectly, by the means of an overcurrent relay or
using the thermal replica, and/or by the means of direct temperature measurement.
Certain motors can be equipped with resistor probes, placed in the stator slots. They
are resistors made out of platinum, or sometimes out of nickel or copper, their
resistance varying with the temperature. There are generally six of them, distributed in
the stator winding.
Application Guide
The setting of the tripping and alarm thresholds depends on the temperature class of
the motor, the ambient temperature and the altitude of the site where the motor is
installed.
When the correction of the thermal replica by the measurement of the motor outside
temperature is used, RTD1 probe should be placed near the cooling air inlet of the
motor.
2.2 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu
2.2.1 Limitation of the number of start-ups during a given period of time [66]
The start-up of a motor is often carried out at the price of an increase in temperature
above the normal level – especially in the case of several successive start-ups having
relatively long start-up times. In this situation there exists the danger of premature
ageing of the motor insulation and, furthermore, the rotor undergoes high thermal
strains. For more precise details, see the paragraphs relating to the excessive start-up
times functions and locked rotor.
In order to limit the start-up repetition frequency for a motor, the P220 relay has a
counting and locking system based on four following parameters:
− duration of the reference period;
− the number of cold starts;
− the number of hot starts;
− the restart prohibition delay time [Tinterdiction].
The reference delay time is activated once a start-up is detected, and provided that it
was initially equal to zero for the reference period, a counter records the number of
hot starts, and another one records the number of cold starts. If one of them reaches
the upper limit threshold programmed by the user, the delay time [Tinterdiction] is
initiated but the start-up inhibition signal will be activated only at the moment when
the motor stops the next time. As long as this delay time has not expired, any start-up
is inhibited.
It should be noted that a start-up is considered as cold start if the motor’s thermal
status is lower than 50%, and that a start-up is described as hot start if the thermal
state is equal to or higher than 50%.
The recommended settings have to be compared to the motor characteristics
provided by the manufacturer. Nevertheless, the programming of these parameters
can also depend on the operation mode of the set “motor and/motor-driven unit” as
a whole.
If these data are not available, the default settings are as follows:
− duration of the reference period = 60min;
− the number of cold starts = 3;
− the number of hot starts = 2;
− the delay time of prohibition of restart-up [Tinterdiction] = 30min
It should be noted that this function does not make it possible to limit the repetition
frequency for any two successive sequences of start-ups as long as [Tinterdiction] has not
been initiated. This limitation is ensured by the complementary function " Time
between two successive start-ups " (see the corresponding paragraph).
Application Guide
2.2.2 Time between two successive start-ups [66]

This function is complementary to that limiting the number of successive starts during
a given period of time. It makes it possible to prevent two consecutive motor starts .
This may be a limitation of the motor or of the motor starting equipment.
The setting of the delay time [Tbetween 2 start ] should be based on the minimum time
which is required between 2 start-ups.
2.2.3 Re-acceleration
A fault in an installation, or a fault close to the sources of supply may cause high
voltage drops which will result in supply voltages lower than the minimal permissible
levels. For example, a three-phase fault in a point of the network produces voltage
dip in the equipment in the neighbourhood. This voltage dip could result in
difficulties, which do not necessarily disappear with elimination of the fault and the
ultimate return to a normal voltage.
As the voltage dip appears, the motor torque, which is roughly proportional to the
square of the voltage, undergoes a brutal reduction causing the deceleration of the
motor. This deceleration is a function of the amplitude and the duration of the
voltage dip. It is mainly governed by the moment of inertia of the rotating masses
and by the torque-speed characteristic of the motor-driven motor.
In the most unfavourable case, the motor can stall, the new torque that it develops
being lower than the braking torque of the motor-driven unit. This phenomenon is
illustrated on the following figure.
Torque
Cm1
Cm0 = Cr0
Cr1
Cm
Cm Cm0
N1 Nn Ns Speed of rotation
P0172ENa
The curves shown above represent, respectively:

• motor torque Cm versus rotation speed N and corresponding to the rated voltage
Vn;
• motor torque C'm versus rotation speed N and corresponding to a voltage V

lower than Vn;
• braking torque Cr of the motor-driven unit, versus rotation speed.
When the voltage dip appears, the motor torque passes abruptly from the value
Cm0 = Cr0 to the value C'm0 < Cr0. Therefore, the motor-drive unit will slow down,
and when the voltage is restored, the motor torque abruptly increases to the value
Cm1, whereas the braking torque is of value Cr1. Hence the motor cannot accelerate
and would return to its normal speed only if Cm1 is higher than Cr1 (see the figure
above).
Application Guide
After the fault has cleared, the motor has a value of internal impedance close to the
corresponding value when it is stopped. So, when the system voltage is re-
established, the motor draws a current close to its start-up current at the full voltage.
This current is higher if the motor slip becomes high.
This stage of re-acceleration does not always involve serious consequences, except if
a number of large motors are re-powered on simultaneously. In this case, these
motors can result in large voltage dip further restricting the re-acceleration of the
motors. So, it may be necessary to carry out load shedding of a certain number of
motors, in order to be able to ensure the re-acceleration of the priority motors.
The parameters of MiCOM relay can either be set so as to authorise a re-acceleration
of the motor after a voltage dip, or they can also be set to give a command to stop
the motor in the event of prolonged voltage dip.
2.2.3.1 Authorisation of re-acceleration
An external voltage relay connected next to busbars is used to report on any voltage
dip as well as to indicate any restoration of the voltage. This “voltage dip”
information is sent via a wiring link to a logic input of the MiCOM P220 relay
programmed at «VOLT. DIP»
Treacc delay time should be set to be equal to the maximum duration of voltage dip
of the network for which one wishes to authorise a re-acceleration of the motor. Thus,
for any voltage dip shorter than Treacc delay time, an authorisation of re-acceleration
will be activated. On the other hand, if the voltage dip lasts longer than Treacc delay
time, the relay does not modify its operation and any attempt of re-acceleration of the
motor could be seen by the relay as a “Rotor locked” condition (the amplitude of the
re-acceleration current being the same as that in “Rotor locked” condition) – and,
consequently, causing a possible tripping command.
2.2.3.2 Load shedding on voltage dip
The same voltage relay can be used to realise load shedding when the supply voltage
dips. Two cases are possible:
− When it is desired to turn off the motor in the event of the voltage dip,
− When it is desired to turn off the motor only if the voltage dip lasts longer than
the value it was assigned in the re-acceleration authorisation.
A programmed logic input on EXT. 1 (or EXT. 2) should to be connected to the
voltage relay detecting the presence of a voltage dip. Associated delay time tEXT1 (or
tEXT2) will be set as follows:
− equal to the duration of voltage dip for which one wishes to carry out a load
shedding,
− equal to Treacc.
The external tripping command EXT. 1 (or EXT. 2) will be programmed to send the
shutdown command (assignment on the output relay RL1).
Thus any voltage dip longer than the programmed duration will result in a shutdown
command.
Application Guide
NOTE:
⇒ The determination of the maximum duration for which one wishes
to authorise re-acceleration of the motor is specific to each site and
it depends on the characteristics of the network (source impedance,
impedance of the other loads - in particular, presence of other
revolving machines) as well as of the characteristics of the given
motor and its load (magnitude of the direct-on-line start-up current,
inertia). The value of this duration is generally obtained as a result
of a study of the dynamic stability of the system.
⇒ The «voltage dip» information generated by the voltage relay must
exist as long as the conditions of voltage dip exist. With the return
of the voltage on the busbars, this «voltage dip» information must
disappear as soon as possible. The voltage relay used to generate
«voltage dip» information must have very short pick-up time and
drop off time, ideally less than one and half periods (times lower
than 30 ms for a 50 Hz system).
⇒ This assumes that the value of the voltage is the same on the
busbars as on the terminals of the motor. If this is not the case, it
will be necessary to estimate the voltage drop between the busbars
and the motor’s terminals and to take this into account when setting
the voltage relay thresholds corresponding to appearance and
disappearance of the of «voltage dip» conditions.
Application Guide
3. EXAMPLE OF NUMERICAL APPLICATION

3.1 Network data
• MiCOM P220 current input ranges:
− Phase current input : In = 5 A ;
− Earth current input : Ion = 1 A
• Breaking device type : circuit breaker
• Maximum value of the three-phase short-circuit current on the busbars 6.2 kV:
Icc3φ = 9 kA
• Neutral point connection mode for the network 6.2 kV : by a resistance limiting
the maximum value of the earth fault current to 30 A
• Length of the feeder cable connecting the motor to the busbars 6.2k V : 100 m
• Measuring transformers :
− CT ratio: 300 / 5A
− Core balance CT connection: ratio 25
• "Speed switch" device available
3.2 Motor data:
Induction motor:
– rated power ==> Pn = 2200kW - cosϕ = 0.8
– rated voltage ==> Vn = 6.2kV – 50 Hz
– rated current ==> In = 256 A
– open-circuit (no-load) current ==> Ino-load = 134A
– start-up type (direct-on -line, soft) ==> Direct
– start-up current ==> ---
– direct start-up current (if soft start used) ==> Id = 5.4*In i.e. 1382A
– start-up time ==> td = 4 s
– maximum repetition frequency of starts ----> Hot = …x 2, cold = …x 3
– withstand time for locked rotor (for hot & cold start) ----> 2s
– heating curve ==> ---
– time-constants of: heating , start-up, cooling- down ==> 14min, 10min, 28min
– transient characteristic curve at unbalance ----> ---
– permanent allowable unbalance ----> ---
– motor service use (driven equipment: compressor, ==> pump
crasher, mill, pump, fan...)
– start-up : no-load/ load ----> no-load
(30 s loading after the end of
start-up)
Application Guide
3.3 List of settings:

OP PARAMETERS Menu
Password AAAA
Reference ALST
Frequency 50 Hz
CONFIGURATION Menu
CONFIG.SELECT Submenu
Change Group Input EDGE

Setting Group 1
Default display % I LOAD
Start detection criterion 52A (closing of the breaking
device)
Analogue output type (optional) 4 - 20 mA
Value transmitted by the analogue output (optional) % I LOAD
RTD type (optional) PT100
CT RATIO Submenu
Primary rating of the phase CT 300

Secondary rating of the phase CT 5
Primary rating of the earth CT 25
Secondary rating of the earth CT 1
LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 Submenus LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8
Assignment: thermal tripping (overload) No No Yes No
Assignment: thermal alarm θALARM No No No Yes
Assignment: tI>> Yes No No No
Assignment: tIo> Yes No No No
Assignment: tIo>> Yes No No No
Assignment: tIi> Yes No No No
Assignment: tIi>> Yes No No No
Assignment: tI< Yes No No No
Assignment: tIstart (excessively long start) No Yes No No
Assignment: tIstall (stalled rotor when running) No Yes No No
Assignment: locked rotor at start No Yes No No
Assignment: emergency restart No No No No
Assignment: forbidden start No No No Yes
Assignment: tRTD1 ALARM, tRTD2 ALARM, tRTD3 ALARM No No No Yes
(optional)
Assignment: tRTD1TRIP, tRTD2 TRIP, tRTD3 TRIP (optional) No No Yes No
Application Guide
LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 Submenus LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8
Assignment: tRTD4 ALARM, tRTD5 ALARM, tRTD6 ALARM No No No Yes
(optional)
Assignment: tRTD4 TRIP, tRTD5 TRIP, tRTD6 TRIP (optional) No No Yes No
Assignment: Thermist 1 and Thermist 2 (optional) No No No No
Assignment: tEXT1 No No No No
Assignment: tEXT2 No No No No
Assignment: motor stopped No No No No
Assignment: motor running No No No No
Assignment: successful start No No No No
Configuration Inputs submenu
Inputs : 54321 11111
COMMUNICATION MODBUS Menu
Communication enabled ? Yes

Data transmission rate 19 200 Bauds
Parity No
Number of data bits 8
Number of stop bits 1
Relay address 1
Date Format PRIVATE
Programming for Group No.1 of PROTECTION Menu:

THERM.OVERLOAD[49] Primary Secondary
Comments
Submenu setting setting
Thermal overload function
Yes
enabled ?
Thermal inhibition on start
No
enabled ?
5.5% of overload authorised
Threshold Iθ> 270 A 0.9In (CT)
= 1.055 x In(motor)
Ke 3
Te1 14 min See motor characteristics
Te2 10 min See motor characteristics
Tr 28 min See motor characteristics
Influence RTD (optional) No
θALARM enabled? Yes
Thermal alarm threshold
92% 0,92 > (256 / 270)2
θALARM
θ FORBID START enabled ? Yes
0,78 < (1382 / 270)2 * (1-exp(4
FORBID START 78%
/ 10*60)) +exp(5 / 10*60))
Application Guide
Submenu [50/51] Primary Secondary

Comments
SHORT-CIRCUIT setting setting
Short-circuit function enabled ? Yes
Threshold I>> 1800A 6In 130% of motor start-up current
tI>> 0.1s
Submenu [50/51] Primary Secondary

Comments
EARTH FAULT setting setting
Earth fault function enabled ?: No Only one earth fault current
threshold Io> threshold can be programmed
Thresholds Io> 0.002Ion
tIo> 0s
Earth fault function enabled ?: Yes
threshold Io>>
Threshold Io>> 2A 0.08Ion Setting to 6,7 % of maximum
earth fault current
tIo>> 0.1s
Submenu [46] Primary Secondary

Comments
UNBALANCE setting setting
Function Unbalance enabled ?: Yes Alarm threshold enabled
threshold Ii>
Threshold Ii> 25.6 A 0.085 In Setting to 10% of Inmotor
(CT)
tli> 10s
Function Unbalance enabled ?: Yes Tripping threshold enabled
threshold Ii>>
Threshold Ii>> 51.2A 0.171 In Setting to 20% of Inmotor
(CT)

Comments
EXCESS LONG START setting setting
Excess long start function Yes
enabled ?
Threshold Istart 540A 2Iθ Id = 5.4*Inmotor ! Istart = 2*Iθ
tIstart 5s 1.2 * td = 4.8s

Application Guide
Submenu [51LR/50S] Primary Secondary

Comments
BLOCK ROTOR setting setting
Block rotor function enabled ? Yes
tIstall 1.8s See motor characteristics
Stalled-in-run rotor function Yes

enabled ?
Threshold Istall 540A 2Iθ Id= 5.4*Inmotor ! Istall = 2*Iθ
Blocked-at-start rotor function Yes Presence of zero speed detector is
enabled ? necessary (speed switch)

Comments
LOSS OF LOAD setting setting
Loss of load function enabled ? Yes Motor-driven pump
Threshold I< 165A 0.55In Higher than no-load current
tI< 3s Depends on process
Tinhib 40s Tinhib > (5 + 30)

Comments
START NUMBER setting setting
Start number limitation function Yes Parameters depend on trade-off
enabled ? of motor characteristics against
process requirements
Treference 60 min
Hot starts number 2
Cold starts number 3
Tinterdiction 30 min
Submenu MIN TIME Primary Secondary

Comments
BETW 2 START setting setting
Time between starts function Yes Parameter depends on trade-off
enabled ? of motor characteristics against
Tbetween 2 start 10min
Submenu RE-ACCEL Primary Secondary

Comments
AUTHORIZ setting setting
Re-acceleration authorisation Yes Parameter depends on trade-off
function enabled ? of motor characteristics against
Treacc 0.2s
Application Guide
4. SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS
4.1 Logic selectivity
The objective is to reduce the fault clearing times by reducing the selectivity steps.
Thus the logic selectivity makes it possible to reduce the clearing time of the busbar
fault while preserving a perfect co-ordination between protection devices.
The example given below involves the MiCOM P122 relay but it is absolutely possible
to replace it by another MiCOM relay used as lead-in protection, for example a
standard relay P123, P141, P142 or P143.
P122
26 28
_
Logic
selectivity
+ + +
7 11 7 11 7 11
P220 P220 P220
M1 M2 M3
P0173ENa
In our example, the delay times of short-circuit protection (I>>) and earth fault
protection (Io>>) of the P220 (downstream protections) and P122 (upstream
protection) relays are set to 100 ms.
A fault on the busbars will be detected only by protection (P122) and the command to
clear the fault will be generated after 100ms.
In the event of fault on a motor feeder cable, the P220 relay protecting it will send a
signal through to the P122 relay. On receipt of this logic signal the P122 relay will
use a logically selected delay that has been separately set. This delay time will replace
the normal delay time while there is an output from one of the P220 relays. In our
example, it could be set to 350 ms to correspond to a 250 ms selectivity step between
the downstream protection and the upstream protection. Thus, 100 ms after the
appearance of the fault, protection P220 of the outgoing motor feeder will generate
the command to clear the fault. In the event of non-clearance of the fault, the fault
can be eliminated selectively 250 ms later thanks to the upstream protection used in
logic selectivity.
Application Guide
NOTE: • The MiCOM P220 relays located downstream can deliver

following instantaneous information indicating that a current
threshold was exceeded:
– phase overcurrent threshold I>>
– earth overcurrent threshold Io>
– earth overcurrent threshold Io>>
• If this facility is required then additional cabling will be
required between the output contacts of the motor protection
relay and the selected logic input of the upstream relay.
• The logic selectivity delay time of the upstream relay must be
set selectively with reference to the settings of normal delay
times for the I>> and Io>> thresholds of the downstream
relays.
Example of programming:
Logic selectivity between the P220 protections installed on the motor outgoing feeders
and the MiCOM P122 protection relay on the lead-in.
P220 relay
PROTECTION menu: SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu [50/51]
Designation Function Programming

FUNCTION Use of the short-circuit threshold (I>>) enabled ? yes
I>> ?
tI>> Delay time of the phase overcurrent threshold 100ms
PROTECTION menu: EARTH FAULT submenu [50N/51N]

FUNCTION Use of the 2nd earth overcurrent threshold (Io>>) yes
Io>> ?
tIo>> Delay time of the 2nd earth overcurrent threshold 100ms
AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: Submenu AUX OUTPUT 5 4 3 2

Assignment I>> 1 0 0 0
Assignment Io>> 1 0 0 0
The instantaneous information of one of thresholds I>> and Io>> being exceeded is
transmitted to the output relay RL5 of the P220 relay.
Application Guide
MiCOM P122 (or P123 or P140) relay

PROTECTION menu: [50/51] PHASE O/C Submenu

[51] I>> Use of the 2nd phase overcurrent threshold (I>>) yes
enabled ?
tI>> Delay time of the 2nd phase overcurrent threshold 100ms
PROTECTION menu: [50N/51N] E/Gnd Submenu

[51N] Ie>> Use of the 2nd earth overcurrent threshold (Io>>) yes
enabled ?
tIe>> Delay time of the 2nd earth overcurrent threshold 100ms
AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: INPUTS Submenu

INPUT 2 Parameter setting of the logic input No.2 to receive SL LG1
the logic selectivity command
AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: SEL LOG1 Submenu

SEL1 tI>> Use of "logic selectivity" function to protect the 2nd yes
phase overcurrent threshold (I>>) enabled ?
SEL1 tIe>> Use of "logic selectivity" to protect the 2nd earth yes
overcurrent threshold (Ie>>) enabled ?
tSEL1 Setting of delay time associated to the "logic 350 ms
selectivity" function
Application Guide
4.2 Authorisation of re-acceleration – Load shedding on voltage dips

Let us consider three motors M1, M2 and M3 connected to the same busbars. A
voltage relay, for example MiCOM P922 relay, is used to detect any voltage dip on
the busbars. Each MiCOM P220 relay receives from the P922 relay the “voltage dip”
information via its logic inputs.
The following functioning is required:
− In the event of voltage dip shorter than 250 ms, the re-acceleration of the
motor M1 must be possible, but if the voltage dip is longer than 250 ms the
motor M1 must be stopped.
− In the event of voltage dip duration equal or longer than 100 ms, the
motors M2 and M3 must be stopped.
MiCOM P922
18 20
_ _ _ _
17 19 21 23 17 19 17 19
P220 P220 P220
M1 M2 M3
P0174ENa
Application Guide
Programming the P220 relay associated to the motor M1:

REACCEL AUTHORIZ Submenu
Function Authorisation of re-acceleration enabled ? Yes

Treacc 250 ms
INPUTS Submenu
Assignment input No.3 NONE

Assignment input No.4 EXT 1
Assignment input No.5 VOLT. DIP
tEXT1 250 ms
Logic input No.4 is used to stop the motor in the event of a prolonged voltage dip,
logic input No.5 is used to authorise re-acceleration.
AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: TRIP OUTPUT RLY Submenu
EXT 1 ? Yes
Information of tripping EXT 1 is sent to the trip output relay (RL1).

Programming the P220 relays associated to the motors M2 and M3:
REACCEL AUTHORIZ Submenu
Re-acceleration authorisation function enabled ? No

Treacc 0,2 second
INPUTS Submenu

Assignment input No.4 EXT 1
tEXT1 100 ms
Logic input No.4 is used to stop the motor in the event of a voltage dip whose
duration is equal to or more than 100 ms.
AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: TRIP OUTPUT RLY Submenu
EXT 1 ? Yes
Information of tripping EXT 1 is sent to the trip output relay (RL1).

Application Guide
4.3 Setting groups

If an electrical network can be fed from two different sources of supply, the relay can
make use of two different setting groups each individually set to accommodate the
parameters of the two networks. For example if a network is normally fed via the
mains distribution system, and it is provided with a standby emergency generator, the
relay can be provided with two groups of fault settings for the two sources of supply.
The passage of a group of parameters to another will have to be carried out each
time the network’s supply mode changes (distributor mains/generator). A pulse will
have to be sent to a logic input of the relay that has been programmed to allow this.
The use of the two groups of settings also proves useful for double-speed motors. For
these motors, the setting group No.1 could be used when the motor turns at the lower
speed (1), the setting group No.2 being used when the motor turns at the higher
speed (2) An impulse must be sent to the relay each time the motor changes speed so
that it passes from one setting group to the other.
_ _ _
13 15 13 15 13 15 11
P220 P220 P220
M1 M2 M3
P0175ENa
Programming the P220 relays associated with the motors M1, M2 and M3:
AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: INPUTS Submenu
Assignment input No.3 SET GROUP
Logic input No.3 is used to pass from one setting group to another.
Application Guide
5. BIBLIOGRAPHY
• Moteurs asynchrones triphasés fermés, Schneider Electric Réseau Commercial
France
• Guide de l’ingénierie électrique, ELECTRA, Lavoisier
• Protective relays APPLICATION GUIDE, Schneider Electric
• Electrotechnique Industrielle, Guy SEGUIER Francis NOTELET, Lavoisier
• Symmetrical components for power systems engineering, J.Lewis BLACKBURN
Application Guide
6. APPENDIX A : SERVICE DUTY
P0229ENa
Application Guide
P0230ENa
Application Guide
7. APPENDIX B : INFORMATION NEEDED FOR ADJUSTMENT
Maximum short-current between phases at the motor’s terminals

Neutral point connection mode for the network feeding the motor
Characteristics provided by the motor manufacturer
- rated power
- rated voltage
- rated current
- start-up type (direct-in-line, soft)
- start-up current
- direct start-up current (if soft start-up used)
- start-up time
- maximum repetition frequency of start-ups
-- withstand time for blocked rotor (for hot & cold start)
- heating curve
- time-constants of: heating , start-up, cooling-down
- transient characteristic curve at unbalance
allowable permanent unbalance
- motor service use (driven equipment: compressor, breaker, pump,
ventilator...)
- open-circuit current (for “loss of load” protection
Ratios for measured-value converters (CT, PT and balance-core CT)
connected to the protection
Assignment output contacts of the protection relay
Application Guide
BLANK PAGE
Technical Guide P220/EN FT/B43
MiCOM P220
User Guide
User Guide
CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION 3
1.1 Object of this document 3

1.2 Definitions 3
2. DESCRIPTION OF THE MiCOM P220 MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY 4
3. THE OPERATOR INTERFACE 6
3.1 Description of the front panel 6

3.2 The LEDs 7
3.3 The keypad 8
3.3.1 ALARM keys 8
3.3.2 Programming keypad 8
3.4 Liquid crystal display screen 8
4. THE MENUS 9
4.1 Default display 10

4.2 Access to the menus 11
4.3 Access to the setting parameters 11
4.3.1 Protection by password 11
4.3.2 Entering the password / modification of the parameters 11
4.4 The OP. PARAMETERS menu 13
4.5 The CONFIGURATION menu 13
4.5.1 The CONFIG. SELECT submenu 13
4.5.2 The CT RATIO submenu 16
4.5.3 The LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus 16
4.6 The MEASUREMENTS menu 17
4.7 The PROCESS menu 18
4.8 The TRIP STATISTICS menu 19
4.9 The COMMUNICATION menu 19
4.10 The PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2 menus 20
4.10.1 The [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu: protection against thermal overload
conditions 21
4.10.2 The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu 25
4.10.3 The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu 26
4.10.4 The [46] UNBALANCE submenu 26
4.10.5 The [48] EXCES LONG START submenu: protection against excessively long starts 27
4.10.6 The [51LR/50S] LOCKED ROTOR submenu 28
4.10.7 The [37]LOSS OF LOAD submenu: protection against undercurrent/loss of load
conditions 29
P220/EN FT/B43 Technical Guide
User Guide
4.10.8 The [49/38] RTD submenu: temperature protection by RTD (optional) 30

4.10.9 The [49] THERMISTOR submenu: temperature protection by thermistor (optional) 31
4.11 The AUTOMAT. CTRL menu 32
4.11.1 The [66] START NUMBER submenu : limitation of the number of starts per period 32
4.11.2 The MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu: minimum time between two starts 34
4.11.3 The REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu: Reacceleration authorization 36
4.11.4 Binary inputs and outputs – Logical gates 39
4.11.5 The AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu: AND programmable logic gates 43
4.11.6 The AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY: AND logic gate time delay 44
4.11.7 The AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu : auxiliary programmable output relays 45
4.11.8 LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS submenu 45
4.11.9 The TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu: Configuration of the trip output relay 46
4.11.10 The LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu : Latching of the output relays 46
4.11.11 The SW SUPERVISION submenu: 47
4.12 The RECORD menu 48
4.12.1 The FAULT RECORD submenu 48
4.12.2 The DISTURBANCE RECORD submenu 49
4.12.3 The SW MONITORING submenu 50
4.13 ALARM messages 51
4.13.1 The MOTOR ALARM messages 51
4.13.2 The HARDWARE ALARM messages 51
5. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS 53
5.1 Event records 53

5.2 Recording of the form of the starting current 53
6. PC CONNECTION D’UN PC – LOCAL COMMUNICATIONS 54
6.1 Connection configuration 54

6.2 Configuration of the relay and PC 54
User Guide
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Object of this document
The purpose of this document is to present the characteristics of the P220 motor
protection relay and to guide the operator through the setting procedures.
After an overview of the product, this manual explains the functions performed by this
protection relay and how they must be used. The menu associated with each of these
functions is presented and explained.
1.2 Definitions
Tripping
This operation consists of a command to open the breaking device (circuit breaker or
fuse contactor) connected to the motor. A tripping command can be given:
• either on detection of a fault by the MiCOM P220 relay,
• or by the operator (in this case it is an external tripping command).
Alarm
The detection of a fault by the MiCOM P220 relay leads to the display of an alarm
message.
Acknowledgement of an alarm
This operation consists of making an alarm message disappear.
Function in service / out of service
The MiCOM P220 relay offers a certain number of protection, monitoring and control
functions. The operator can select from these functions the ones he wishes to use:
• he must bring into service the functions he chooses to use,
• he can take out of service the functions he does not wish to use.
Activated / deactivated function
Not all the protection functions of the P220 relay are activated at the same time.
They are alternately activated / deactivated automatically by the P220 relay itself to
ensure that the motor has protection specific to its various operating conditions:
underload or overload conditions, starting phase, locked rotor condition, and motor
shut down.
NOTE: A function cannot be activated or deactivated unless the operator
has previously brought it into service.
User Guide
2. DESCRIPTION OF THE MiCOM P220 MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY

The MiCOM P220 relay uses digital techniques to fulfil the functions of protection,
control and monitoring of motors.
It is equipped with 4 analogue inputs (3 phase current inputs and 1 earth current
input). The current inputs have dual ratings of 1 or 5 amperes (it is possible to
combine an earth current rating of 1 A and a phase current rating of 5 A).
It is possible to program the output relays to respond to any of the protection or
control functions available. The different logic inputs can also be allocated to control
functions.
The auxiliary power supply is provided by a direct current or alternating current
auxiliary source via an internal converter. Satisfactory operation of the P220 relay is
guaranteed during brief interruptions of the auxiliary power supply lasting less than
50 ms.
The front panel gives the operator access to the data of the MiCOM P220 relay
either via LEDs or via the display unit and the keypad. The various alarms are stored
in the memory and made available to the operator on the backlit display device.
These alarms can be read and acknowledged directly without a password. All the
parameters and measurements are accessible without a password. The setting values
can only be modified after entering the password stored in the memory.
The MiCOM P220 relay records and measures a large number of data with very
great accuracy. It continuously measures the phase and earth currents taking into
account the true RMS values up to the 10th harmonic for a 50 Hz motor and the 8th
harmonic for a 60 Hz motor.
The MiCOM P220 relay has on the rear connector a RS485 type link with a choice of
MODBUS™, RTU mode, Courier or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocols. This
enables the operator to read the data stored by the relay (measurements, alarms,
parameters), or modify the different settings and allocations of outputs of each relay,
or transmit remote orders.
It is also possible to reassemble or modify these data via the RS232 communication
located on the front panel by using the MiCOM S1 support software.
The MiCOM P220 relay can be connected directly via this link to a digital monitoring
and control system (for example: MiCOM S10, SCADA). All the data available are
then at the disposal of the supervisor and can be utilised either locally or remotely.
The MiCOM P220 relay can be withdrawn while it is live. This means that its live
parts can be withdrawn from the metal housing while the relay is supplied with power
via the auxiliary source. When the relay is drawn out of its housing:
− the current circuits from the phase and earth CTs are not interrupted thanks to
the presence of internal short-circuiting devices located at the current inputs
(metal housing part),
− no tripping order is generated,
− the watchdog relay drops out,
− the RS485 link is not interrupted. However, communication is no longer
possible for the relay which is drawn out.
User Guide
REMOTE
COMMUNICATION
parameterisation,
measurements, control
MMI
LCD display device
MOTOR 8 LEDs for indication
7 pushbuttons
RS232 port
PROTECTION
+
measurements, automatic
controls, monitoring,
disturbance
recording
ELECTRICAL POWER CONTRACTOR/

SYSTEM CIRCUIT BREAKER
phase currents Status (closed, open)
earth current tripping/closing commande
MCC
MOTOR CONTROL
P0190ENa
FIGURE 1 - ENVIRONMENT OF THE MiCOM P220 RELAY

User Guide
3. THE OPERATOR INTERFACE

3.1 Description of the front panel
The front panel of the MiCOM P220 relay serves as an interface between the human
and the protection relay. It enables the operator to enter settings, to gain access to
the display of measured values and alarms, and also to display in a simple manner
the different actions performed by the MiCOM P220 relay.
FIGURE 2 - FRONT PANEL OF THE MiCOM P220 RELAY

The front panel of the relay has three separate parts:
− The display device and keypad,
− The LEDs,
− The two zones under the upper and lower flaps
The display device on the front of the MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with a liquid
crystal display (LCD). This screen displays data such as settings and measured
values, even under difficult conditions, thanks to the backlighting of the data. The
keypad has 7 touch-sensitive keys. The two keys located under the screen are
dedicated to alarms; the other 5 keys are for reading the measurements and
modifying the parameters of the MiCOM P220 relay.
The LEDs are located on the left side of the front panel. The first four LEDs are
dedicated to the operation of the relay (tripping LED, alarm LED, equipment fault
LED, and auxiliary power supply LED).
The following four LEDs are programmable by the operator.
The wording associated with the LEDs appears by default in English on the front
panel but the operator has self-adhesive labels supplied with the P220 relay on which
he can write the titles of his choice using a ball-point pen.
User Guide
Under the upper flap, there is a label identifying the relay by its model number and
serial number. This information defines the product uniquely and specifically. When
requesting any information from the factory, do not forget to indicate these two
numbers. The auxiliary power supply range of the relay is also indicated on the lower
part of the label.
Under the lower flap, the RS232 link permits the connection of a portable PC to the
MiCOM P220 relay.
The live part can be withdrawn from the housing by opening the two flaps and
applying traction to the two notches located behind these flaps.
ATTENTION : IT IS NECESSARY- AFTER PIVOTING THE EXTRACTOR - TO WAIT 2 OR 3
SECONDS BEFORE MAKING COME OUT THE ACTIVE PART, TO LEAVE
DISCHARGING THE CAPACITORS IN THE ACTIVE PART THUS AVOIDING
POSSIBLE ELECTRIC ARCS IN THE EVENT OF DIRECT CONTACT OF THE
CONNECTOR BLOCKS WITH METAL LIMP.
3.2 The LEDs
The LEDs are numbered from 1 to 8 starting from the top.
NOTE: The LEDs are turned off when the auxiliary power supply is lost.
When the power supply is back the state of the LEDs is restored.
LED 1 Colour: RED Wording: TRIP
The LED indicates that the relay has transmitted a tripping order to the breaking
device (fuse-contactor / circuit breaker). This LED copies the tripping command sent
to logic output No. 1 (tripping relay). Its normal state is extinguished. It lights up as
soon as a tripping command is issued. It is extinguished when the associated alarm
is acknowledged (disappearance of the fault and acknowledgement by the operator).
LED 2 Colour: YELLOW Wording: ALARM
This LED indicates that a motor alarm has been taken into account by the MiCOM
P220 relay.
The management of the ALARM LED is directly linked to the status of the motor
alarms in the memory (MOTOR ALARM menu).
If one or more messages are not read and not acknowledged, the ALARM LED
flashes.
If all messages are read but not acknowledged, the ALARM LED shows a steady light.
If all messages have been read and acknowledged, the ALARM LED is extinguished.
LED 3 Colour: YELLOW Wording: WARNING
This LED indicates equipment faults of the MiCOM P220 relay.
The management of the WARNING LED is directly linked to the status of the
equipment alarms in the memory (HARDW ALARMS menu).
When a minor internal alarm (minor equipment fault, typically a communication
failure) is detected, the WARNING LED flashes.
When the fault is classed as serious, (major equipment failure) the WARNING LED is
lit.
The WARNING LED can only be extinguished when the cause which produced the
alarm has disappeared (repair of the module, disappearance of the fault).
User Guide
LED 4 Colour: GREEN Wording: HEALTHY

This LED indicates that the MiCOM P220 relay is energised within the rated range
(0.8 to 1.2 Vaux).
LEDs 5 to 8: Colour: RED
These LEDs can be programmed by the operator in the CONFIGURATION menu.
3.3 The keypad
The keypad has seven keys arranged in two groups:
The two keys located immediately below the screen (keys ! and "),
The five keys positioned in the centre of the front panel for programming.
3.3.1 ALARM keys
The two keys ! and " are dedicated to reading and acknowledgement of the
alarms respectively. To display the successive alarms, press the ! key.
The alarms are arranged in the order in which they were detected (the most recent
last, the oldest first). To acknowledge the alarms, the operator can either
acknowledge each alarm by pressing the " key, or go to the end of the MOTOR
ALARMS menu and perform a general acknowledgement.
3.3.2 Programming keypad
The five keys situated in the centre of the front panel of the MiCOM P220 relay are
dedicated to programming
The keys # $ % and & make it possible to move in the direction indicated in the
different levels of the menus.
The ' key permits the confirmation of a choice or a value (modification of
parameters).
3.4 Liquid crystal display screen
The liquid crystal display screen has two lines each with sixteen characters. The
screen lights up as soon as a key on the keypad is activated. It remains lit up for 5
minutes after a key on the keypad was last used. The screen has backlighting which
makes it easy to read, regardless of the ambient lighting conditions.
User Guide
4. THE MENUS
The menu of the P220 relay is organised into main menus, some of which are
subdivided into submenus. The operator dialogue of the MiCOM P220 relay is
divided into 10 menus ( menu column)
HEADING SUB MENU DESCRIPTION

OP PARAMETERS Data for general settings of MiCOM P220
CONFIGURATION
CONFIG. SELECT Change of Group, default display setings, Start
detection criterion, Analogical Output
(4-20mA), RTD and Thermistors.
TC RATIO Settings of the CT Ratio
LED LED 5 to Configuration of Programmables LEDs
LED 8
CONFIGURATION Configuration of logic inputs
INPUTS
MEASUREMENT Measured (Ia, Ib, Ic …) and calculated
parameters (Idirect, I inverse), Max values.
PROCESS Measurements related to the application:
Thermal Overload, Time before thermal
tripping, RTD Temperature, Permit start
number, time before start, Emergency start
number…
TRIP STATISTICS Number of different type of tripping
COMMUNICATION Settings of the protocol parameters.
PROTECTION G1 Configuration of the protection functions
[49] THERMAL Submenu of thermal overload function
OVERLOAD
[50/51] SHORT Submenu of short circuit function
CIRCUIT
[50N/51N] EARTH Submenu of earth Fault function
FAULT
[46] UNBALANCE Submenu of Unbalance function
[48] EXCESS LONG Submenu of excess long start function
START
[51LR-50S] BLOCKED Submenu of Blocked rotor function
ROTOR
[37] LOSS OF LOAD Submenu of Loss of load function
[49/38] RTD SENSORS Submenu of RTD sensors function
option
[49] THERMISTORS Submenu of Thermistors function
option
User Guide
HEADING SUB MENU DESCRIPTION

Protection G2 Like PORTECTION G1
AUTOMATIC CTRL
[66] START NUMBER HOT and COLD start numbers
MIN TIME BETW 2 Configuration of the minimum time between
START two consecutive starts.
REACCEL Autorization of reacceleration after a dip
AUTORIZATION voltage detection
INPUTS Configuration of logic inputs.
AND LOGIC Configuration of 4 Logic Equations
EQUATION
AND LOGIC EQUAT T Configuration of time delays associated to the
DELAY logic equations.
AUX OUTPUT RELAYS Configuration of Auxiliary output relays ( other
than tripping relay RL1)
LATCH OUTPUT Latching of the auxiliary output relays
RELAYS
TRIP OUTPUT RELAY Configuration of the trip output relay ( RL1)
LATCH TRIP ORDER Latching of the tripping output relay (RL1)
SW SUPERVISION configuration of operating time, operation
number, sum of interrupted current, closing
and tripping time
RECORD
FAULT RECORD Visualization of last five faults
DISTURBANCE Configuration of disturbance records
RECORD
SW MONITORING Data related to real functioning of the
switching devise (CB)
From the default display, access is gained to these different menus by using the #
and & keys.
To return to the default display from any one of the menus, press the $ key.
4.1 Default display
By default, a value is continuously displayed, and the operator can select this value
from a list in the CONFIG. SELECT submenu.
As soon as an alarm is generated by the MiCOM P220 relay, the relay indicates it by
an alarm message: this display takes priority and replaces the default value (see the
ALARMS menus).
User Guide
4.2 Access to the menus

Access is gained to the different menus via the and keys.
It is possible to read all the parameters and measurements without the password.
The parameters can only be modified after entering the password.
4.3 Access to the setting parameters
Access to the setting parameters of the MiCOM P220 relay is possible in different
ways:
− either locally: by using the keys or the RS232 port on the front panel,
− or remotely: via the RS485 port at the rear.
4.3.1 Protection by password
Modification of the relay parameters via the pushbuttons on the front panel is
protected by password.
This protection applies to the relay configuration settings, particularly the selection of
the different thresholds, time delays, communication parameters, allocation of the
binary inputs, logic gates and output relays.
The password consists of four alphanumerical characters in capitals. On leaving the
factory, the password is AAAA. The operator can define his own combination of
characters. If the password is lost or forgotten, modification of the parameters stored
in the memory of the relay is inhibited. All that is required then is to contact
Schneider Electric T&D or its agent, stating the serial number of the relay, to receive
an emergency password specific to the relay concerned.
4.3.2 Entering the password / modification of the parameters
To modify a parameter, first press the key to go into updating mode (or
parameterisation mode).
The operator is asked to enter the password as soon as a parameter is modified in
any of the menus or submenus. So when the operator presses the key, to make
an adjustment, and the password is not active, the following display appears on the
screen:
PASSWORD ?
AAAA
The password consists of the letters between A and Z. The password is entered letter
by letter by using the and keys to move forwards and backwards in the
alphabet.
After each letter, press the key to enter the next letter.
At the end of the input press the key to confirm the password. If the password is
correct the message PASSWORD OK appears on the screen.
After 2 seconds, the display returns to the previous point in the menu. Press the
key again. A cursor appears on the first field of the data to be updated:
Example: modification of the current threshold I >> ([50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT
submenu)
User Guide
I >> =
1.0 In
A flashing cursor indicates that the operator can change the value in the cell. To
scroll through the possible values for a cell, use the # and $ keys.
After each value, press the & key to enter the next digit.
At the end of the input, press the ' key to confirm the modification.
While the relay is in setting mode, the letter P (Parameter) is displayed at the bottom
right of the menus and submenus headers. For instance, the letter P is displayed in
the [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu header:
[50/51]
SHORT-CIRCUIT
P
If no action is taken on the keypad for 5 minutes, the password is deactivated and the
letter P disappears. Any subsequent modification of parameters will give rise to a
further request for the password.
NOTE: – The parameterisation mode only allows modification of the
relay configuration via the interface through which is was
activated: if for example the password was entered by the
keys on the front panel, only modifications carried out using
these keys will be accepted.
– When the parameterisation mode is activated by entering
the password via the front panel (pushbuttons), as long as
this mode of parameterisation remains active, it is no longer
possible to modify the relay parameters via the RS485 or
RS232 communication ports. The parameters of the P220
relay can only be modified by using the pushbuttons. Once
the parameterisation mode is deactivated (no action on any
pushbutton for 5 minutes), it is then possible to modify the
parameters of the P220 relay by using one of the
communication ports.
– Pressing the " key during modification makes it possible
to return to the value before modification.
– To modify the active password, gain access to the OP.
PARAMETERS menu then to the PASSWORD point in the
menu.
User Guide
4.4 The OP. PARAMETERS menu

In this menu, the operator has access to the following information:
− the type of MiCOM relay, here it is the model P220
− the software version of the relay
− the Active Group
− the state of all the logic inputs
− the state of the programmable output relays
In this menu, the operator can also:
− modify the password
− give the relay/motor feeder a reference (4 characters, letters or figures)
− indicate the rated frequency of the motor (50 or 60 Hz)
− modify the date and time.
4.5 The CONFIGURATION menu
The CONFIGURATION menu makes it possible to configure the MiCOM P220 relay.
This menu is divided into 7 submenus:
− CONFIG. SELECT
− CT RATIO
− LED 5
− LED 6
− LED 7
− LED 8
− CONFIGURATION INPUTS
4.5.1 The CONFIG. SELECT submenu
4.5.1.1 Change of Active Setting group
The MiCOM P220 relay has two configuration groups corresponding to two
protection groups (menus PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2). The operator
can thus carry out 2 settings for each parameter: one for configuration group 1 and
the other for configuration group 2.
This menu allows the selection between the 2 groups. The active group by default is
group 1.
User Guide
The changeover of the configuration can be ordered by:

a) a local command:
− via a logic input which must have been previously configured by the operator,
− via the keys on the front panel
− via the RS232 port on the front panel.
NOTE: For the changeover via a logic input, it is necessary to Know that:
When the user selects the option “LEVEL”, in the CONFIGURATION/CONFIG SELECT
submenu, the changeover of the groups is ONLY authorized by a logic input, (no
possibility to change the active group neither by communication, nor by the front
panel).
ACTIVE GROUP CHANGEOVER WITH “LEVEL” OPTION :
When switching ON the auxiliary supply, the selected group corresponds to the logic
input state. This means:
A - LEVEL option and Logic input configuration = 0
Groupe 1 = logic Input is not active
Groupe 2 = logic Input is active
If the programmed logic input is supplied with +V, then the active group will be G1.
If the programmed logic input is not supplied with +V , then the active group will be
G2.
B - LEVEL option and Logic input configuration = 1
Groupe 1 = logic Input is not active
Groupe 2 = logic Input is active
If the programmed logic input is supplied with +V, then the active group will be G2.
If the programmed logic input is not supplied with +V, then the active group will be
G1.
If the user wishes to change the groups by the communication or by the front panel,
he has to select the option “ EDGE”.
ACTIVE GROUP CHANGEOVER WITH “EDGE” OPTION :
A- FRONT option with Logic input configuration = 1
The active group changes every time the voltage applied to the logic input changes
state from 0V to +V.
Switch OFF the relay, then if we
1. Switch ON the power supply of the relay with the voltage applied to the logic
input =0V:
The group will not change. It will remain as before the switching off of the relay.
input =+V:
The group will change and it will change after every switching off.
User Guide
B- FRONT option with Logic input configuration = 0

The active group changes every time the voltage applied to the logic input changes
state from +V to 0V.
Switch OFF the relay, then if we
input =0V:
The group will change state and it will change after every switching off.
input =+V:
The group will not change. It will remain as before the switching off of the relay.
NOTE : It is important to set properly the change active group with
FRONT option via a logic input. In general the customer should
be conform to the cases A-1 and B-2, so no group changes will
take place upon energizing the relay.
b) a remote command via the RS485 port at the rear.
NOTE: LEVEL could be high or low level
EDGE could be riding or falling edge
The list of access methods above is given in the order of priority:
for example the configuration changeover order given by a logic
input takes priority over the one given by the keys on the front
panel.
4.5.1.2 Selection of a default value to be display
The operator can select the measured value permanently displayed on the LCD
screen from the following list:
− one of the 3 phase currents IA RMS, IB RMS, IC RMS,
− the neutral current IN RMS,
− the thermal state of the motor TH. STATE,
− the current value consumed by the motor as a percentage of the thermal
current threshold value Iθ >: %ILoad.
4.5.1.3 Criterion for detecting a start
The MiCOM P220 relay offers the choice of start detection criteria as follows:
− closure of the contactor / circuit breaker: criterion listed as 52A,
− closure of the contactor / circuit breaker and overshoot of the starting current
threshold Istart ([48] EXCES. LONG START submenu). These two events must
appear within an interval of time of approximately 90 ms for the detection of a
start to be accepted. This criterion is known as 52A + I.
This facility makes it possible to adapt the configuration of the P220 relay to the type
of starting used: direct on_line or soft start.
NOTE: The P220 relay detects the information "contactor / circuit
breaker position" via logic input No. 1 (paragraph 4.11.4.1.
"Fixed" inputs). The connection of this logic input to the
status of the breaking device is obligatory.
User Guide
4.5.1.4 Analogue output (optional)

The MiCOM P220 relay offers an optional analogue output to make the data
available to a logic controller, at 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA as desired. The current loop
support can be used as an active source circuit or a passive source circuit. The
measured value which can be transmitted by this analogue output is selected from the
following list:
− one of the 3 phase currents IA RMS, IB RMS, IC RMS,
− the neutral current IN RMS,
− the thermal state of the motor TH. STATE,
− the current consumed by the motor as a percentage of the thermal current
threshold value Iθ >: % Ioad,
− the waiting time before another start is permitted: T bef Start,
− the time before a thermal trip occurs: T bef Trip,
− one of the temperatures measured by the RTD (optional): T°C RTD1, T°C RTD2,
T°C RTD3, T°C RTD4, T°C RTD5, T°C RTD6.
The table of correspondence of the analogue output is given in the chapter 5-3.
4.5.1.5 Type of RTD temperature probes or thermistors (optional)
The P220 relay offers optional monitoring of 6 RTD temperature probes or 2
thermistors + 4 RTD temperature probes to provide protection against temperature
rises in the stator and mechanical bearings of the motor (PROTECTION menu).
The type of RTD (PT100, Ni100, Ni120, Cu10), or the type of thermistor (PTC/NTC) is
selected in the CONFIG. SELECT submenu.
The table of correspondences between the temperature and resistance of the RTD is
defined in the chapter 5-3.
4.5.2 The CT RATIO submenu
In the CT RATIO submenu, the operator sets the primary and secondary ratings of the
Phase and Earth CTs.
NOTE: Where the earth current input is connected to a CT summation of
the 3 phase current circuits (residual connection, no core CT),
the primary and secondary values of "Earth CT" must be set to
the same values of those of the "Phase CTs".
4.5.3 The LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus
Four identical submenus LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 permit configuration of the
4 programmable LEDs of the MiCOM P220 relay.
These data can originate inside the relay (protection, automatic control, or internal
logic state function) or outside the relay (logic input).
− One LED is lit if at least one of the pieces of information associated with it is
valid (logic OR). It is extinguished:
− either after acknowledgement of the of associated data item or items
− or on the disappearance of the data item or items which gave rise to it.
User Guide
− The "EMERG. RESTART" information is activated:

− either following reception of an emergency start command via the logic
input programmed on "EMERG. RESTART". It stays lit up as log as the
associated logic input is excited
− or following an emergency start remote order sent via the communication
network. It will be extinguished when the "SUCCESSFUL START" information
appears.
− The "FORBIDDEN START" information is active if at least one of the three pieces
of data inhibiting starts is active:
− either thermal inhibition of starting "θ FORBID. START"
− or inhibition due to limitation of the number of starts " START NB LIMIT "
− or inhibition due to a minimum time between 2 starts "T betw 2 start".
− The motor shut down information "MOTOR STOPPED" is activated when logic
input No. 1 (terminals 22-24) is not excited. It remains active until logic input
No. 1 is excited.
− The motor running information "MOTOR RUNNING" is activated when logic
input No. 1 (terminals 22-24) is excited. It remains active until logic input No.
1 is de energized.
− The successful start information "SUCCESSFUL START" is activated after a motor
start phase if at the end of the time delay t Istart the following criteria are
respected:
− the locked rotor at start information ""LOCKED ROTOR" is not present
− the excessively long start information "EXCES NG START" is not present.
− This information stays active until the motor shuts down (deenergisation of logic
input No. 1).
4.6 The MEASUREMENTS menu
− The measurements of the phase currents and the earth current are expressed as
true root-mean-square values. For a 50 Hz motor, the harmonics are taken
into account up to the 10th order; for a 60 Hz motor the harmonics are taken
into account up to the 8th order.
− The measurement of the symmetrical components is taken from the
fundamental component of the current. The positive and negative sequence
components of the current are calculated on the basis of the three phase
currents, and the zero phase sequence component is calculated from the earth
current input. The following formulae are used to calculate the symmetrical
components:
Ipositive = 1/ 3 ⋅ (I A + a ⋅ IB + a² ⋅ IC )
Inegative = 1/ 3 ⋅ (I A + a² ⋅ IB + a ⋅ IC )
I zero phase sequence = 1/ 3 ⋅ Iearth

User Guide
− The frequency measurement is given if the amplitude of at least one of the three
phase currents is greater than 10 % of In (In is the rating of the phase current
inputs, 1 A or 5 A defined in the CT RATIO submenu, on the line "SEC PHASE
="). Where the frequency cannot be calculated, the relays displays "****".
− The phase current maximeter retains the greatest current value of one of the
three phases outside the motor starting phase. This variable is expressed as a
true RMS value.
4.7 The PROCESS menu
A set of measurements relating to operation displayed in the PROCESS menu makes
it possible to monitor the utilisation and state of the motor.
− The estimate of the time before a thermal trip “T before TH TRIP” is given under
the following conditions:
− the thermal alarm threshold θ ALARM is reached
− the equivalent thermal current Ieq is greater than the thermal current
threshold Iθ >
− considering the constant motor overload rate Ieq / Iθ >.
When the above conditions are not respected, the P220 relay displays the value
“****”.
− The number of authorised starts of the motor “PERMIT START NB” takes into
account all the criteria for limiting or inhibiting starting, that is, the functions:
− "limitation of the number of starts",
− "minimum time between 2 starts",
− "thermal criterion for inhibiting a start".
When there is no limit to the number of authorised starts, the relay displays the value
“****”.
− The indication of the time before a further start is authorised “T before START" is
given when an inhibition on starting is in progress. This indication takes into
account all the criteria for limiting or inhibiting starting, that is, the functions:
− "limitation of the number of starts",
− "minimum time between 2 starts",
− "thermal criterion for inhibiting a start".
− The counter for the number of starts of the motor is incremented at each start.
In contrast, authorisation for the motor to re-accelerate does not increment this
counter.
− The counter for the number of motor operation hours is the sum of hours
during which the motor is running.
NOTE: After confirming the password, the user can reset the value of the
THERMAL STATE value to zero by pressing the " key.
User Guide
4.8 The TRIP STATISTICS menu

In the TRIP STATISTICS menu the following are displayed:
− the total number of tripping operations,
− the number of tripping operations per type of fault.
Tripping can have two possible causes:
− tripping on a fault: when the P220 relay detects a fault (exceeding a threshold),
it generates a tripping order;
− deliberate tripping: the operator can order tripping from three access points:
− a logic input,
− the RS232 port on the front panel,
− the communications network via the RS485 rear port.
NOTE: – The tripping orders stored in the memory of the MiCOM P220
protection relay for the statistics are only those transmitted to
the tripping relay (logic output No. 1). This relay is one of the
logic outputs of the MiCOM P220. It is configured in the TRIP
OUTPUT RLY submenu.
– Motor shutdowns for which the command was not relayed via
the output relay No. 1 of the MiCOM P220 are not taken into
account in the TRIP STATISTICS menu.
4.9 The COMMUNICATION menu
− The MiCOM P220 relay can communicate under the MODBUS, Courier or
IEC 60870-5 protocols via the RS485 port located at the rear. These protocols
are based on the master-slave principle. The P220 relay can therefore be
integrated, as a slave, in a digital monitoring and control system. In this
system, the supervisor (master), for example a PC, can:
− read and modify the setting values,
− remote the measurements, alarm data, changes of state (changes of state of
inputs/outputs, changes of setting group), values relating to fault recordings,
disturbance recording and the form of the starting current,
− issue remote orders such as commands to open or close the circuit
breaker/contactor (motor On / Off), to trig disturbance recording or to
acknowledge the relay remotely.
User Guide
4.10 The PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2 menus

The menus PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2 are identical and enable the
operator to program 2 different configuration groups (CONFIGURATION menu).
Each of these 2 menus is divided into 8 submenus corresponding to the different
protection functions:
− [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD
− [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT
− [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT
− [46] UNBALANCE
− [48] EXCES. LONG START
− [51LR/50S] LOCKED ROTOR
− [37] LOSS OF LOAD
− [49/38] RTD SENSORS or [49] THERMISTOR (optional)
The operator can bring each of these protections into service or take them out of
service in the submenus of the menu PROTECTION G1 or PROTECTION G2.
The setting parameters of the functions taken out of service do not appear on the
LCD unit and are not accessible via the communication
If the threshold or thresholds of these functions are reached, a time delay with a
duration preset by the operator is started. When this time delay expires, if the fault is
still present, an instantaneously signal is generated and can be used to excite one of
the output relays.
All the algorithms of the protection functions are based on the fundamental
component of the current.
User Guide
STATE OF THE PROTECTION FUNCTIONS (ACTIVE/INACTIVE)

ACCORDING TO THE OPERATION MODE OF THE MOTOR
The MiCOM P220 protection functions are automatically* activated or deactivated by
the relay itself according to the motor's operation mode (motor halted, start-up
sequence, re-acceleration phase or normal running condition). The table below
indicates under which conditions these protection functions are active or inactive.
Protective Start-up Re-acceleration

Motor halted Motor running
functions sequence phase
Activated Activated Activated
Thermal image Activated (Tr)**
(Te2)** (Te1)** (Te2)**
Short-circuit Activated Activated Activated Activated
Excessive long start Deactivated Activated Deactivated Activated
Locked rotor at start Deactivated Activated Deactivated Deactivated
Stalled rotor whilst
Deactivated Deactivated Activated Deactivated
running
Unbalance Activated Activated Activated Activated
Earth fault Activated Activated Activated Activated
Loss of load Deactivated Activated*** Activated*** Activated***
Over temperature Activated Activated Activated Activated
* These protection functions are activated by the relay only if they have previously
been commissioned by the user.
** The time constant used in the thermal model depends on the value of the motor
load current and on the motor's operating mode. The time constant indicated in
brackets is the one used by the relay.
*** The "loss of load" function is activated upon expiry of the Tinhib timer. This
timer is user settable, it is initiated by the relay when a motor start is detected.
4.10.1 The [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu: protection against thermal overload
conditions
The MiCOM P220 relay produces a thermal image of the motor from the positive
and negative components of the current consumed by the motor, in such a way as to
take into account the thermal effects created in the stator and in the rotor. The
negative component currents consumed in the stator generate in the rotor large
amplitude currents which create a substantial temperature rise in the rotor winding.
The composition carried out by the MiCOM P220 results in an equivalent thermal
current Ieq, the image of the temperature rise caused by the current in the motor. The
current Ieq is calculated according to the following formula:
Ieq = (Ipositive ² + Ke ⋅ Inegative ²)0.5

User Guide
Starting from this equivalent thermal current, the thermal state of the motor θ is
calculated every cycle by the MiCOM P220 relay according to the following formula:
θi+1= (Ieq/Iθ>)² . [1- e(-t/T)] + θi . e(-t/T)
in which:
− Ke is the negative sequence current recognition factor (adjustable).
− Iθ > is the thermal overload current threshold.
− θi is the value of the thermal state calculated previously.
− Τ is the time constant of the motor. As a function of the operating
conditions of the motor, the relay uses one of the following 3 thermal time
constants:
• the thermal time constant Τe1 which is applied when the equivalent thermal
current Ieq lies between 0 and 2 ⋅ Iθ >, that is when the motor is running (load or
overload conditions);
• the starting time constant Τe2 which is applied when the equivalent thermal
current Ieq is greater than 2 ⋅ Iθ >, that is when the motor is in the starting phase
or locked rotor condition;
• the cooling time constant Τr which is applied when the motor is shut down (logic
input L1 in the zero logic state - terminals 22-24). In this case, the motor no
longer consumes current and the value of the thermal state θ therefore decreases
as time passes according to the formula:
θi+1= θi . e(-t/Tr)
A thermal overload signal “THERM.OV” is generated when the value of the thermal
state θ reaches 100 %.
NOTE: – On interruption of the auxiliary power supply to the P220
relay, the value of the thermal state θ is stored in the non-
volatile memory. On reenergisation of the relay, the value of
the thermal state θ is reset to its value before the interruption
if it was lower than 90 %. In the opposite case (greater than
90 %), it is reset to 90 %, to avoid premature tripping of the
relay P220 when the auxiliary voltage returns.
– The thermal state θ of the motor is displayed in the PROCESS
menu.
– On the second line of the PROCESS menu, after having
entered the password, it is possible to reset the value of the
thermal state θ of the motor to zero.
– Even if the "thermal overload" protection function is not used,
the thermal current threshold Iθ > must be set so that it is
possible to use the excessively long start “EXCES LONG
START” and stalled rotor while motor is running “STALLED
ROTOR” protection functions.
– Examples of the thermal overload curve are shown in
chapter 5-3.
User Guide
4.10.1.1 Function inhibiting thermal tripping during a start: θ INHIBIT

This function permits inhibition of the thermal tripping information THERM. OV.
during the starting phase. It may be necessary to use this function for some motors
with temperature rise characteristics in a starting phase very different from those in a
locked rotor condition.
If the user brings this function into service, this inhibition is activated as soon as the
starting time delay tIstart begins (cf. submenu [48] EXCES. LONG START). On expiry
of tIstart (end of the time allowed for starting), this inhibition is deactivated.
When this function is activated, that is during the motor starting phase, the value of
the thermal state θ calculated cannot exceed 90 %. This means that thermal tripping
cannot take place under any circumstances. At the end of the time allowed for
starting, the value of the thermal state is authorised to exceed 90 %.
NOTE: – This function has no influence on the thermal alarm signal “θ
ALARM” and thermal inhibition of starting function “θ
FORBID. START”.
– When this function is brought into service, the motor is still
thermally protected by the monitoring of the starting time.
4.10.1.2 Function of the thermal image influenced by ambient temperature (optional):
INFLUENCE RTD
When the ambient temperature exceeds + 40 °C, the admissible motor current
diminishes in relation to its rated current. A setting of the protection parameters
which is suitable under normal temperature conditions is no longer suitable when the
ambient temperature rises above + 40 °C.
The MiCOM P220 relay offers the possibility of taking into account this necessary
derating of motors. The thermal image can be modified by the ambient temperature
measurement.
When this function is brought into service by the user, if the ambient temperature rises
above + 40 °C, the value of the thermal threshold Iθ > is automatically modified to
adapt the motor protection to the external temperature conditions.
The rule for the ambient temperature measurement influencing the thermal image is:
− For an ambient temperature lower than or equal to + 40 °C, the thermal
image is not modified.
− For an ambient temperature between + 40 °C and + 65 °C, the thermal
threshold Iθ > is modified by a multiplying coefficient in compliance with the
following formula:
Multiplying coefficient = 1 - (ambient temperature in °C - 40) / 100
− For a temperature greater than or equal to + 65 °C, the thermal threshold Iθ >
is modified by a multiplying coefficient of 0.75.
User Guide
The table below gives the relationship between the ambient temperature
measurement and the influence on the thermal image:
Ambient temperature
+40 °C +45 °C +50 °C +55 °C +60 °C +65 °C
(in °Celsius)
Correction coefficient for
the thermal threshold Iθ > 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.85 0.80 0.75
(multiplying coefficient)
NOTE: – This function can only be used if the relay has the option "6
RTD monitoring".
– The probe used for this function is RTD 1 (terminals 2c-4c-6c).
To use this function, a probe measuring the ambient
temperature of the place where the motor is located must be
connected to terminals 2c-4c-6c.
– The operator can program the temperature thresholds of
RTD 1 ([49/38] RTD submenu) even if he has brought this
INFLUENCE RTD function into service.
ATTENTION : FOR 2 THERMISTORS + 4 RTD OPTION, THIS FUNCTION WILL BE
PROVIDED BY THE RTD CONNECTED TO TERMINALS 8C-10C-12C.
4.10.1.3 Thermal alarm function: θ ALARM
The purpose of this function is to produce an alarm signal indicating that the thermal
state θ of the motor has exceeded an adjustable threshold: θ ALARM. Corrective
action can thus be taken before thermal tripping occurs.
Once the threshold θ ALARM is exceeded, the MiCOM P220 relay calculates and
displays, in the PROCESS menu (cf. chapter 4.7 The PROCESS menu), an estimate of
the time remaining before a thermal trip THERM. OV. occurs. This estimate is given
for a constant overload rate.
4.10.1.4 Thermal start inhibition function: θ FORBID. START
This function makes it possible to inhibit a start on a hot motor, or not, as a function
of its thermal state. When this function has been adjusted in service by the user, a
further start is inhibited for the motor as long as its thermal state θ is higher than an
adjustable threshold θ FORBID START. It is then necessary to wait until the motor
cools down. When the value of the thermal state θ falls below the threshold θ
FORBID START, the starting of the motor is authorised.
The information inhibiting starting on a thermal criterion FORBID START is activated if
the following two conditions are fulfilled:
− Motor shut down: logic input L1 in the zero state (terminals 22-24).
− Thermal state value θ higher than the threshold θ FORBID START.
User Guide
The following diagram illustrates the operation of the thermal start inhibit criterion:
Shutdown of
Thermal state θ of the motor
the motor
Restarting of the
motor
FORBID START
threshold
Time
Binary input L1 : interlock o/o (52A)
θ FORBID START signal
P0191ENa
4.10.2 The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu

The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT function which protects the motor against short-circuits
between phases uses a definite time phase overcurrent protection. In this menu a
short-circuit current threshold I >> and its associated time delay tI >> are
adjustable.
The P220 relay generates a signal if the phase current exceeds the threshold I >> for
a length of time greater than tI >>.
In addition to this time-delayed threshold, an instantaneous information (threshold
I >> without time delay) is available.
IA
IB >=1 I>> tI>> 0 Internal
IC logic
signals
P0192ENa
NOTE: – The time delay tI >> can be set to instantaneous.

– When the operator has adjusted the SHORT-CIRCUIT [50/51]
function in service, this function is always active whatever the
mode of operation of the motor (motor running, shut down,
starting phase, locked rotor condition).
– In the event of saturation of the phase CTs, the MiCOM P220
will detect a short-circuit under the following conditions:
– Fault current lower than 200 times the limit current value for
saturation of the CTs.
– No remanent flux in the CTs at the time of establishing the
fault.
– No direct current component at the time of establishing the
fault.
– Short-circuit threshold I >> set below 0.9, the limit current
value for saturation of the CTs.
User Guide
4.10.3 The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu

The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT function which protects the motor against faults
between one or more phases and earth uses a definite time zero phase sequence
overcurrent protection.
Earth faults create a zero phase sequence current measured either by 3 phase CTs in
a residual connection, or directly by a core balanced CT surrounding the 3
conductors.
Two independent earth current thresholds (Io > and Io >>) with their associated time
delays (tIo > and tIo >>) enable the operator to configure for example an alarm
threshold and a tripping threshold.
The settings of the thresholds are expressed as a function of the residual current (3
times the zero phase sequence component).
For each earth current threshold, time-delayed information and instantaneous
information is available.
tIo> 0
Io>
3 Io Internal
logic
Io>> tIo>> 0 signals
P0193ENa
4.10.4 The [46] UNBALANCE submenu

The [46] UNBALANCE function, which protects the motor against unbalance
conditions, broken conductor and phase inversions, is based on the measurement of
the negative sequence component of the current.
Two negative sequence overcurrent thresholds are available:
− one of them, Ii >, is associated with a definite time delay,
− the other, Ii >>, is associated with a inverse time characteristic.
The user can use the threshold Ii > to detect the inversion or loss of a phase, or to
give an unbalance alarm.
The threshold Ii >> has an inverse time characteristic which enables it to allow slight
instantaneous unbalances to pass whilst more substantial unbalances will be detected
more quickly. This inverse time characteristic permits selective clearance of external
two-phase faults which appear on the system. This operating characteristic in
compliance with the withstand of the motors is given in the appendix.
t Ii> 0
Ii>
IA Internal
IB Inegative logic
IC signals
Ii>>
P0194ENa
User Guide
4.10.5 The [48] EXCES LONG START submenu: protection against excessively long starts
The [48] EXCES LONG START function protects the motor if the starting phase lasts
too long. To do this, it uses a starting current threshold Istart> and a starting time
delay tIstart. This threshold and this time delay can be adjusted to allow the starting
current to pass.
This function is activated (time delay tIstart initiated) as soon as the MiCOM P220 relay
detects a start (the criterion for detection of a start is selected in the
CONFIGURATION menu).
It is deactivated on expiry of the starting current time delay tIstart.
If, on expiry of the time delay tIstart, the current consumed by the motor has not fallen
below the threshold Istart> again, a prolonged start signal “LONG START t Istart” will be
generated.
IA
IB >=1 Istart >
IC
Motor &
tI start 0
start-up
detection Internal
>=1 logic
signals
Successful
start signal
&
Re-acceleration tI start 0
authorisation
P0195ENa
Information indicating a "successful start" is generated on expiry of the time delay tIstart
if no tripping order has been given.
NOTE: During normal operation of the motor, the excessively long start
function “EXCES LONG START” can be reactivated during a
flying restart of the motor (re-acceleration of the motor following
a voltage dip), that is when re-acceleration is authorised
(AUTOMAT. CTRL menu).
User Guide
4.10.6 The [51LR/50S] LOCKED ROTOR submenu

4.10.6.1 Rotor stalled whilst the motor running
This function, which makes it possible to detect stalling while the motor is running, is
activated immediately after the starting period, that is on expiry of the starting time
delay tIstart (submenu [48] EXCES LONG START).
Two parameters can be set: the stalled rotor current threshold Istall with its associated
time delay tIstall, the stalled rotor time.
The MiCOM P220 relay detects the overcurrent caused by stalling and generates
information that the rotor has stalled while the motor is running if the phase current
exceeds the threshold Istall for a length of time greater than tIstall.
IA
IB >=1 Istall>
IC
tI stall 0
&
Successful
start signal
Re- Internal
acceleration >=1 logic
in progress signals
Motor
starting tI stall 0
criterion : &
52A+I
Motor start-
up non
detected
Motor
shutdown
( EL1 = 0 )
P0196ENa
NOTE: – During authorisation of re-acceleration (AUTOMAT. CTRL

menu), this function is deactivated during the time delay
allowed for starting tIstart.
– On starting the motor, when the start detection criterion
selected is "closure of the contactor / circuit breaker and
exceeding of the starting current threshold Istart (52 A + I)", if
the relay sees only one of these events, (closure of the
breaking device or the appearance of a current greater than
Istart), then the function of monitoring a stalled rotor whilst the
motor is running is activated.
User Guide
4.10.6.2 Locked rotor at start

This function, which makes it possible to detect that the motor is locked at the start, is
activated only during the starting phase, that is during the course of the starting time
delay tIstart.
It uses speed signal from the motor received by logic input No. 2 of the P220 relay
(terminals 26-28), and the time delay tIstall: locked rotor time (a speed switch device
must be connected to this logic input: paragraph 4.11.4.1. "Fixed" inputs).
On detection of a start, the "locked rotor at start" function is activated: the time delay
tIstall begins. At the end of this time delay, the motor speed logic input (input No. 2)
must be in logic state 1 to indicate that the motor speed is not zero. The opposite
case (zero speed) means that the rotor is locked, so the P220 relay generates a
locked rotor at start order LOCKED ROTOR.
Motor t Istall 0
start-up
detection Internal
& logic
signals
Speed switch
open
(EL2 = 0)
P0197ENa
NOTE: – The speed switch device sends information to the P220 relay
indicating, by the closing of a contact, that the rotor is
rotating.
– The time delay tIstall is common to the protection functions for
"rotor stalled while motor is running" and "rotor locked at
start".
– If the motor is not fitted with a speed switch device, this
function cannot be used and must therefore be deactivated.
4.10.7 The [37]LOSS OF LOAD submenu: protection against undercurrent/loss of load
conditions
The [37] UNDERCURRENT function which makes it possible to detect a loss of load
(for example the draining of a pump or breakage of a conveyor belt), uses definite
time undercurrent protection. The user sets the following parameters:
− undercurrent threshold I <
− time delay tI < associated with the undercurrent threshold
− the inhibit start time delay Tinhib.
This function is deactivated when the motor is shut down (logic input No. 1 in the 0
state) and also during the inhibit time delay Tinhib.
When the P220 relay detects that the motor is starting, this function is activated at the
end of the inhibit time delay Tinhib.
The time delay Tinhib is useful for motors with no-load starting which take on load
gradually at the end of starting.
When the motor is running (and after expiry of the inhibit time delay Tinhib), if the value
of one of the phase currents consumed by the motor is lower than the threshold I <
for a period greater than or equal to tI <, the P220 relay will generate a loss of load
signal “ t I< ”.
User Guide
IA
IB >=1 I<
IC Internal
tI< 0
logic
&
signals
Motor tinhib
start-up
detection
Motor
shutdown
( EL1 = 0 )
P0198ENa
4.10.8 The [49/38] RTD submenu: temperature protection by RTD (optional)

The [49/38] RTD SENSORS [49/38] function is intended to detect abnormal
temperature rises of the motor by direct temperature monitoring. This is achieved by
monitoring 6 RTDs (Remote Temperature Detectors). The RTDs can be selected from
the following types: PT100, Ni120, Ni100 or Cu10 (types selected in the
For each RTD, the user sets:
− an alarm threshold RTD # ALARM,
− a time delay associated with the alarm threshold t RTD# ALARM,
− a tripping threshold RTD # TRIP,
− a time delay associated with the tripping threshold t RTD TRIP #.
An alarm signal is generated if the temperature measured exceeds the programmed
alarm threshold for a period of time equal to the time delay associated with this
threshold.
A tripping signal is generated if the temperature measured exceeds the programmed
tripping threshold for a period of time equal to the time delay associated with this
threshold.
The P220 relay continuously monitors the satisfactory operation of the RTD's. An
alarm will be generated if:
− a RTD wiring circuit is opening
− a RTD is short-circuited.
On detection of a RTD failure, a “ RTD/Therm ERROR ” alarm message is generated
and the over temperature thresholds corresponding to this RTD will be deactivated.
The RTD can be located:
− at the stator windings (protection of the stator, indirect protection of the rotor,
detection of failure of the cooling system),
− at the mechanical bearings (to detect failure of the lubrication),
− outside the motor (ambient temperature measurement), at the same level as
that of the entry of cooling air.
User Guide
NOTE: – The symbol # corresponds to the number of the RTD.

– The RTDs monitored must obligatorily be all of the same type
(all of type PT100, or Ni100, or Ni120, or Cu10).
– It is possible to connect only the RTDs that one wishes to
monitor.
– RTD 1 can be used to measure the ambient temperature and
thus influence the thermal image (see § 4.10.1.2).
4.10.9 The [49] THERMISTOR submenu: temperature protection by thermistor (optional)
This submenu provides the monitoring of 2 thermistors + 4 RTD sensors.
The [49] THERMISTOR function, like the preceding one, detects abnormal
temperature rises. It operates with thermistors of type PTC or NTC (selected in the
The P220 relay can monitor 2 thermistors. Each thermistor input is linked to an
independent threshold (Thermist#) with a fixed time delay of 2 seconds. For each
thermistor, the user sets a threshold in ohms.
A "Thermist#" order is generated if the thermistor resistance measured exceeds this
threshold for a length of time greater than or equal to 2 seconds.
NOTE: – The symbol # corresponds to the number of the thermistor.
User Guide
4.11 The AUTOMAT. CTRL menu

The AUTOMAT. CTRL menu comprises the following 10 submenus:
• [66] START NUMBER
• MIN TIME BETW 2 START
• RE-ACCEL AUTHORIZ
• INPUTS
• AND LOGIC EQUATION
• AND LOGIC T EQUA DELAY
• AUX OUTPUT RLY
• LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS
• TRIP OUTPUT RLY
• LATCH TRIP ORDER
• SW SUPERVISION
4.11.1 The [66] START NUMBER submenu : limitation of the number of starts per period
The [66] NB DEM function allows the number of motor start-ups over a given period
to be limited. In effect, starting the motor too frequently can be too constraining for
the motor (over-heating), for its starting system (starting impedance, electrolytic
bath,...) or can in some cases reveal an anomaly in the process operation,
The [66] NB DEM function uses the following adjustable parameters.
− a monitoring period Treference
− a number of hot starts limit HOT START NB
− a number of cold starts limit COLD START NB
− a start inhibit time delay Tinterdiction.
Each time an motor start is detected, the Treference time delay is initiated and the
number of starts registered by the counter corresponding to the temperature of the
motor (hot or cold) is incremented by one. At the end of this time delay, the counter
in question will be decremented by one.
Each time the motor is stopped (change of state of logic input No. 1: from state 1 to
state 0) relay P220 establishes whether either of the two counters has been reached.
If so, start inhibit signal START NB LIMIT will be generated for a length of time equal
to Tinterdiction. At the end of Tinterdiction, this signal drops out, and it is possible to start the
motor again.
Examples: Taking as an example cold starts where the limit of the number of cold
starts has been set at 3 for a period of Treference.
User Guide
Case n°1:
The number of cold starts limit has been reached and the motor is stopped before the
end of the Treference period: the Tinterdiction time delay is therefore initiated when the motor
stops. A new start up is permitted at the end of the Tinterdiction time delay.
Istart 2 more starts permitted 1 more start permitted No start permitted
IN motor
t
T reference
T reference
T reference
T inter diction
START NB LIMIT
P0199ENa
Case n°2:
The number of cold starts limit is reached but the motor is not stopped until after the
end of the Treference period: therefore the Tinterdiction time delay is not initiated. There is
no start inhibit.
Istart
2 more starts permitted 1 more start permitted No start permitted 1 more start permitted
IN motor
t
T reference
T reference
T reference
START NB LIMIT (logic state at 0)

P0200ENa
User Guide
Case n°3:
Particular cases where at the end of the Tinterdiction time delay, the number of starts
counter is still reached (the Tinterdiction time delay period is completed before the end of
Treference): any new start up is inhibited until the end of the Treference period (the START NB
LIMIT signal is extended).
Istart
2 more start permitted 1 more start permitted No start permitted
IN motor
t
T reference
T reference
T reference
T interdiction
START NB LIMIT
P0201ENa
NOTE: – A start is considered cold if the value of the motor’s thermal

state is less or equal to 50% when an motor start phase is
detected.
– A start is considered warm if the value of the motor’s thermal
state is more than 50% when an motor start phase is
detected.
– In cases where at the end of the Tinterdiction time delay period,
one of the counters is still reached, the START NB LIMIT start
inhibit signal will not drop out until the counter in question is
decremented (example case No.3).
– The number of authorised starts and the waiting time before a
new start is authorised are available in the PROCESS menu
(see section 4.7. The PROCESS menu).
4.11.2 The MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu: minimum time between two starts
Excessive motor or starting system heating caused by two consecutive starts can be
avoided by means of the MINI TIME BETW 2 START function.
It is based on the use of an adjustable time delay: minimum time between 2 starts “ T
betw 2 start ”.
This time delay is initiated on detection of an motor start up by the P220 relay. When
the motor stops, if the “ T betw 2 start ” time delay has not finished, start inhibit signal
“ Tbetw 2 start ” is generated until the end of the “ Tbetw 2 start ” time delay.
User Guide
Examples
Case n°1: Case n°2:

The stopping of the motor takes place The stopping of the motor takes place
before the end of the “ Tbetw 2 start ” after the end of the “ Tbetw 2 start ”
time delay period. time delay period, no start inhibit
A start inhibit signal “Tbetw 2 start ” signal is generated.
is generated during the “ Tbetw 2
start ” period.
Istart Istart
IN motor IN motor
t t
T betw 2 start T betw 2 start

T betw 2 start
T betw 2 start (logic state at 0)
P0203ENa
P0202ENa
User Guide
4.11.3 The REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu: Reacceleration authorization

A fall in voltage from the electrical network causes a reduction in rotor speed. When
the voltage is restored, the rotor starts on a re-acceleration phase in order to regain
its nominal speed. This re-acceleration manifests itself as a intake of current of
approximately the same value as that of the locked rotor current, its duration being
relative to the magnitude of the fall in voltage.
The MiCOM P220 can be informed of the fall in voltage from the mains. A
programmable logic input of the relay (input VOLT. DIP - the submenu INPUTS, see
section 4.11.4.2. The submenu INPUTS: programmable inputs) receives a binary
siganl indicating that there is a reduction in voltage from the mains. By comparing
how long this voltage reduction lasts with an adjustable time delay Treacc, the relay
will authorise or prevent the motor’s re-acceleration.
The user adjusts a time delay Treacc. This time delay corresponds to the maximum
duration of a voltage sag for which the motor re-acceleration is to be authorised.
On receipt of binary signalling a voltage sag, the MiCOM P220 relay initiates the
Treacc time delay. Two circumstances are possible:
• If the duration of the voltage sag is less than the time delay Treacc and if in the 5
seconds following the end of the voltage sag the current absorbed by the motor
exceeds the lstall> threshold ([51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR function), then:
− The P220 goes into monitoring of a start phase (initiation of the tIstart time
delay, EXCES LONG START function) and it deactivates the “ stalled rotor
whilst running ” function.
− At the end of the tIstart delay allowed for a start, the relay P220 reactivates
the “ stalled rotor whilst running ” function.
• If the duration of the voltage sag is more than the Treacc time delay, the P220
relay does not modify its operation. When the motor tries to reaccelerate, an
tripping order will be generated by the “ stalled rotor whilst running ” function if
the current absorbed by the motor exceeds the Istall> threshold for a length of time
exceeding tlstall.
User Guide
Examples
Case n°1:
The duration of the drop in voltage is less than the Treacc time delay, when the mains
voltage is restored, re-acceleration of the motor is authorised.
Voltage sag
Network/mains
voltage
Current
absorbed by Istall > threshold
the motor
Motor
reacceleration
Fixed window of 5 s
T reacc
" Drop in voltage " signal

(binary input)
t Istart
Reacceleration authorization
" stalled rotor whilst running " function active

" stalled rotor whilst running "
function deactivated
P0204ENa
User Guide
Case n°2:
The duration of the voltage drop is greater than the Treacc time delay, re-
acceleration of the motor is not authorised. When the current absorbed exceeds the
current threshold Istall> (non authorised re-acceleration attempt), the “ stalled rotor
whilst running ” function starts up in order to give an instruction to stop the motor.
Voltage sag
Network/mains
voltage
Current
absorbed by Istall > threshold
the motor
Motor
reacceleration
T reacc
"Drop in voltage" signal

(binary input)
t Istall
No reacceleration authorisation (logic state 0)
Instruction to stop the motor given by the

"stalled rotor whilst running" function
P0205ENa
NOTE: A drop in voltage is only taken into account if it lasts for at least
100 ms.
User Guide
4.11.4 Binary inputs and outputs – Logical gates

Thanks to its programmable scheme logic, inputs and outputs, the MiCOM P220
relay allows control and logic diagrams to be realised. The P220 relay has:
− 5 logic inputs of which 3 are programmable
− 6 logic outputs of which 5 are programmable
− 4 AND logic gates
In order to realise the control and logic diagrams, two types of data are taken into
account by the relay:
• internal type data:
− logic state of protection function (instantaneous, time delayed signals)
− logic state of an logic or state function (start inhibit, successful start)
• external type data:
− data received via its logic inputs
− data received via the communication network (remote control by the
supervisor).
User Guide
Below, a logic diagram shows the different possibilities offered by the MiCOM P220
relay:
toperation treset
&
PROTECTION
functions
toperation treset
&
Output
External and relays
internal allocation:
AUTOMAT. logic signals toperation treset
CTRL & RL1
RL2
RL3
EXT 1 toperation treset
t o & RL4
Logic s RL5
input
EXT 2
Logic
t o
input
EXT 3
t o
Logic
input
EXT 4
Logic
t o
input
Internal
logic signals
Remote
communication
P0206ENa
4.11.4.1 “ Fixed ” inputs

Two of the P220’s logic inputs are predefined for a fixed use, these are:
• Logic input No 1 (terminals 22 - 24) is linked to the position of the fuse-contactor
or circuit breaker (52a). This input should be linked to the 52a interlock of the cut
off device (the 52a interlock is open when the cut off device is open, it is closed
when the cut off device is closed). The connection of this logic input is
compulsory.
• The logic input No. 2 (terminals 26-28) is linked to motor speed binary data.
This logic input links up to a speed sensor usually known as a “ speed switch ”.
The “ speed switch ” should be open when the rotor is not turning and should
close as soon as it detects rotor rotation. The connecting of this logic input to a
“ speed switch device ” is necessary in order to be able to use the “ locked rotor at
start ” protection function.
NOTE: When the logic input No. 2 is not linked to a “ speed switch ”,
this logic input has no assignment.
User Guide
4.11.4.2 The INPUTS submenu: programmable inputs

The user can program three of the P220’s logic inputs. These are logic input No. 3
(terminals 13-15), No 4 (terminals 17-19) and No 5 (terminals 21-23). The user
chooses the allocation of these logic inputs in the INPUTS menu.
NOTE: Except for the "None" allocation, any other function can be
allocated to only one logic input.
Options of allocated Label Operation mode of logic input
information of logic inputs
EMERGENCY START EMERG ST LEVEL
SWITCHING BETWEEN SET GROUP LEVEL/ EDGE
CONFIGURATIONS
DISTURBANCE TRIGGERING DIST TRIG EDGE
EXTERNAL EXT RESET LEVEL
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
RE ACCELERATION VOLT DIP LEVEL
AUTHORIZATION
AUXILIARY 1 and 2 EXT 1 and EXT 2 LEVEL
AUXILIARY 3 and 4 EXT 3 and EXT 4 LEVEL
No Assignement NONE
EMERGENCY START
An emergency start may be necessary for safety reasons. When the logic input
having been assigned to the “ EMERG ST ” function is powered on (logic state is
active), the P220 relay reacts as follows:
− The thermal state value θ is muzzled at 90% so that no thermal trip order
“ THERM. OV. ” can occur during the motor start up phase (see section
4.10.1.1. Function inhibiting thermal tripping during a start: θ INHIBIT). At the
end of the tIstart time delay allocated to the start up, the thermal condition value
θ will be allowed to exceed 90%.
− The thermal start inhibit signal “ θ FORBID START ” is suppressed.
− The start inhibit “ START NB LIMIT ” signal from the “ limitation of number of
starts ” function is suppressed.
− The “ T betw 2 start ” start inhibit signal from the “ minimum time between 2
starts ” function is suppressed.
The motor can therefore be restarted and no thermal tripping can take place during
the start up phase.
NOTE: – The logic input “ EMERG ST ” must be kept powered during
the whole of the motor start up phase.
– The relay P220 can also receive a remote emergency start
command via the communication network.
– An emergency start up instruction “ EMERG ST ” does not
order the closure of the cut off device (motor start up) but
makes the motor start up possible.
User Guide
SWITCHING BETWEEN CONFIGURATIONS (PASSAGE FROM ONE SETTING GROUP

TO ANOTHER)
The P220 relay has two configurations (2 setting groups). The switching from one
configuration to another can be achieved using one programmed logic input on
“ SET GROUP ”. When you allocate the information “SET GROUP” to a logic input, it
is possible to configure the operation of this logic input on LEVEL or on EDGE
(minimum duration of 15ms).
The change from one configuration to another can also be achieved via the operator
menu or the communication network (see section 4.5.1.1. Configuration Group).
A parameter setting group change is not possible if one of the following protection
functions is in progress (that is to say if the current threshold of these functions is
exceeded):
− [50/51] SHORT CIRCUIT function
− [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT function
− [46] UNBALANCE function
− [48] EXCES LONG START function
− [50S/51LR] BLOCK ROTOR function
− [37] LOSS OF LOAD function
− [49/38] RTD (optional)
− [49] THERMISTOR
TRIGGING OF THE DISTURBANCE RECORDING
By assigning the command “ DIST TRIG ” to a programmable logic input, the
operator will be able to initiate the disturbance recordings (RECORD menu) from this
input. The energising (rising front) of this programmed logic input on “ DIST TRIG ”
will trigger a disturbance recording.
EXTERNAL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
By dedicating a logic input to the external acknowledgement command “ EXT
RESET ”, the operator can acknowledge the alarms and unlatch the output relays if
the latter were kept energised (see section 4.11.10. The LATCH TRIP ORDER
submenu), by energising this logic input.
RE-ACCELERATION AUTHORISATION
The voltage drop data “ VOLT. DIP ” can be assigned to one of the inputs to enable
relay P220 to take voltage drops into account in order to authorise re-accelerations if
necessary (refer to chapter REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu).
AUXILIARY 1 AND AUXILIARY 2 DATA
The “ EXT1 ” and “ EXT2 ” assignments allow relay P220 to acquire two lots of
external binary data. A time delay (t EXT 1 and t EXT 2 respectively) is linked to each
assignment.
The internal “ EXT1 ” signal to the relay is in logic state 1 if the associated logic input
is energised for a time longer or equal to t EXT 1 time delay. When the logic input is
no longer energised, the logic state of the internal ” EXT1 ” signal drops back to 0.
User Guide
The internal “ EXT2 ” signal to the relay is in logic state 1 if the associated logic input
is energised for a time longer or equal to t EXT 2 time delay. When the logic input is
no longer energised, the logic state of the internal ” EXT2 ” signal drops back to 0.
When the t EXT 1 and t EXT 2 timers expire, the following happen:
− an alarm message is sent
− the Alarm LED is lit
− an event is recorded.
AUXILIARY 3 AND AUXILIARY 4 DATA
The “ EXT3 ” and “ EXT4 ” assignments operate similarly to “ EXT1 ” and “ EXT2 ”,
but when the associated timers expire, there is no alarm message and the Alarm LED
is not lit. The only result is an event record.
NO ASSIGNMENT
When a logic input is programmed on “ NONE ” (None) it becomes inactive.
Whether this logic input is switched on or not, relay P220 takes no account of it.
4.11.5 The AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu: AND programmable logic gates
The AND LOGIC EQUAT function allows the operator to programme 4 “ AND ” logic
equations, known respectively as A, B, C and D.
Each equation can be the logic “ AND ” of one, two or several items of internal logic
signals (protection or automatism functions) or external data (state of logic inputs
“ EXT 1 ”, “ EXT2 ”, “ EXT 3 ” and “ EXT4 ”) to the relay P220.
In this menu, the user constructs each of the 4 logic equations by creating logic
“ AND ” gate between several items of data. Data is assigned to a logic equation by
positioning the corresponding digit to 1. When the digit is set at 0, the data is not
assigned to the corresponding logic equation.
Examples:
You want to create 2 “ AND ” logic equations.
For the first equation, you wish to implement the “ AND ” logic of the following data:
− time delayed earth fault 1st element (tlo>)
− successful start (SUCCESS START)
− logic state of one of the binary inputs(EXT1)
tIo>
SUCCESS START
EXT 1
&
P0207ENa
User Guide
For the second logic equation, you wish to implement le logic “ AND ” of the
following data:
− unbalance fault 1st element (tli>)
− logic state of one of the binary inputs (EXT1)
tIi>
EXT 1 &
P0208ENa
Programming in the AND LOGIC EQUAT menu is carried out as follows. In this
example, the first equation will be the A equation and the second B:
Allocation of the “ t lo> ” data to equation A.

t I0> DCBA
0001
Allocation of the “ t li> ” data to equation B.

t Ii> DCBA
0010
Allocation of the “ EXT1 ” data to logic equations A

EXT1 DCBA
and B.
0011
Allocation of the “ SUCCESS START ” data to equation

SUCCESS DCBA
A.
START 0001
4.11.6 The AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY: AND logic gate time delay
2 time delays can be linked to each of the 4 programmable logic equations: one
operation time delay and one reset time delay. These 8 independent time delays (4
logic equations, 2 time delays per equation) are configurable in the AND LOGIC
EQUAT T DELAY submenu.
The operation time delay (Toperat) is initiated only if all the associated data in a logic
equation are valid (AND gate). It allows the logic equation validation to be delayed
for a time Toperat.
The reset time delay (Treset) is initiated as soon as any of the data associated with the
equation disappears. This allows the equation to remain valid after an item of data
has disappeared for a length of time Treset.
User Guide
Example:
Logic equation C obtained from the combination (AND logic) of three lots of data 1,
2 and 3 with the Toperat and Treset time delays.
Equation C
T operat T reset
P0209ENa
4.11.7 The AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu : auxiliary programmable output relays
In this menu the user assigns the MiCOM P220 internal or external data to the
auxiliary output relays (relays No2, No3, No4 and No5). These are changeover type
relays (1 common, 1 normally open contact, 1 normally close contact). One relay is
switched on when at least one of the data items linked to it is valid (OR logic). It
drops back once all its associated data has disappeared.
− Data assignable to the auxiliary output relays can be:
− of the internal type
− logic state of a protection function (instantaneous, time delayed
signals)
− logic state of an automatism or state function (start inhibit, successful
start)
− the result of an “ AND ” logic equation
− of the external type
− signal received via logic inputs (“ EXT1 ”, “ EXT2 ”, “ EXT3 ” and
“ EXT4 ”)
− signal received via the communication network (remote control by
the supervisor).
4.11.8 LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS submenu
This submenu makes it possible to maintain closed the contacts of outputs assigned to
one or more thresholds after the disappearance of the cause; this type of latching is
carried out by relay and not by function.
User Guide
4.11.9 The TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu: Configuration of the trip output relay
Data which is going to control the relay No 1 (terminals 2-4-6) can be assigned using
the TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu. This changeover type relay is used to give a tripping
order to the cut-off device.
The relay No1 (tripping relay) has the same electrical and mechanical characteristics
as the other output relays.
Reminder: A certain number of the MiCOM P220 functions are based on the
operation of relay No1, i.e.
The Trip Cause Statistics (refer to § 4.8)
The Latching of the Trip Output Relay (refer to § 4.11.10)
The Surveillance of the cut-off device (refer to § 4.11.11)
The display of data relating to the cut-off device (refer to § 4.12.3)
The record of fault values (refer to § 4.12.1)
The triggering of disturbance record (refer to § 4.12.2)
4.11.10 The LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu : Latching of the output relays
In this menu, the user selects which functions are to maintain the output relays
energised when an order is generated by these functions.
The functions for which output relays can be latched are:
− time delayed threshold tl>> ([50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu)
− time delayed threshold tlo>> ([50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu)
− time delayed threshold tli>> ([46] UNBALANCE submenu)
− AND logic equation A (AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu)
− AND logic equation B (AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu)
− AND logic equation C (AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu)
− AND logic equation D (AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu)
Thus, when one of the above functions generates a command via one or several
output relays, the corresponding relays remain energised after the disappearance of
the command. It will be necessary to come and acknowledge the P220 in order to
switch off the output relay(s).
NOTE: – Latching of the output relays is optional for each of these
functions. The user can chose whether to assign these
functions to the “ output relay latching facility ”.
– There are three possible ways to acknowledge the P220, and
thus switch off the output relays in the event of latching:
- press the " button
- send an acknowledge order to the configured logic input
on “ EXT RESET ”
- send a acknowledge remote order via the communication
network (order given by a supervisor)
– On loss of auxiliary power, the output relays drop back. On
return of auxiliary power, the output relays are re-energised,
independently of the fault status (still present or cleared).
User Guide
4.11.11 The SW SUPERVISION submenu:

The P220 relay monitors the operation of the cut-off device (fuse-contactor or circuit
breaker). Three criteria are monitored and for each of these an adjustable alarm
threshold is available to the user. These thresholds are based on:
− Monitoring of the time of opening of the cut-off device. This is the time from
the moment when the P220 sends an order to the output relay No1 to the
moment when the P220 relay receives the data on the logic input No. 1
(terminals 22-24) indicating that the cut-off device is open.
− Monitoring of the number of opening orders. This is the number of tripping
orders which have been given to relay No 1.
− Monitoring of the summation of the amps to exponent “ n ” cut by the cut-off
device The value of the intensity being taken into account is that of the current
at the moment when the output relay No 1 receives a tripping order.
When one of the thresholds described above is exceeded, an alarm message is
available on the display and logic data can be assigned by the user on one or
several of the auxiliary output relays (relays No 2,3,4 or 5).
So as to adapt the MiCOM P220 to any type of cut-off device, the user can also
configure 2 time delays:
A making time (Ttrip) for maintaining the tripping order information: For each
tripping order sent on the relay No 1, this one is maintained excited for (Ttrip) time (if
the “ trip output relay latching ” facility were not parameterized)
A marking time (Tclose) for maintaining the closing order information: A command
of interlocking (closing of the switchgear) given by the communication network
(remote control CLOSE ORDER) is maintained on the auxiliary output relay during a
time equal to Tclose. It is about the output relay to which the CLOSE ORDER was
affected (AUX OUTPUT RLY menu).
NOTE: – For the summation of the amps to exponent “ n ” cut, the
exponent “ n ” can be adjusted to the value 1 or the value 2.
– In all cases, the orders sent on the output relay No1 (tripping
order) are maintained for at least 100 ms.
User Guide
4.12 The RECORD menu

The RECORD menu comprises 3 sub menus
− FAULT RECORD
− DISTURB RECORD
− SW MONITORING
4.12.1 The FAULT RECORD submenu
A collection of data on each of the 5 last faults registered is displayed in the FAULT
RECORD sub menu.
For each logging, the relay memorises:
− the fault number
− the time of the fault
− the date of the fault
− setting group (group G1 or G2) active at the time of the fault
− the faulty phase
− the function which detected the fault
− magnitude of fault current (in fundamental value)
− the 3 phase currents (in True RMS values)
− the earth current (in True RMS value)
The recordings of the fault are accessible:
− either through the Human Machine Interface (display front face)
− or using the remote communication network (RS485 rear port)
− or using the MiCOM S1 support software (RS232 front port)
Fault number 5 is the last fault registered, fault number 1 is the oldest.
NOTE: – Data registered in the non volatile memory are available for
one year without auxiliary power thanks to a backup battery
housed in the front face.
– These data are not erasable. They are managed in a circular
list: when this is full, the oldest fault is erased.
– Faults are signalled by one or several alarm messages.
User Guide
4.12.2 The DISTURBANCE RECORD submenu

The MiCOM P220 relay offers the possibility of saving 5 disturbance records. The
data are acquired at a frequency of 32 samples per electrical cycle, ie. 1600Hz in a
50Hz system or 1920 Hz in 60Hz system, and allows for a very faithful reconstruction
of the analogue signals.
For each recording, the relays memorises:
− the 3 phase currents
− the earth current
− the frequency
− the state of the 5 logic inputs
− the state of all the output relays (including the watchdog relay)
− the date and the time
The total duration of a recording is defined by the configuration of the pre-time and
post-time. The pre-time defines the duration of the recording before the disturbance
recording triggering order, the post time defines the duration of the recording after
the disturbance recording triggering order. In all cases, the total duration of a
recording cannot exceed 3 seconds.
Duration of recording : 3 seconds maximum
Pre-time Post-time
Triggering order
P0210ENa
The triggering of a disturbance recording can be generated:

− when a logic entry programmed on “ DIST TRIG ” is excited (see section
4.11.4.2.3 Trigging of the disturbance recording)
− on receipt of a remote control from a supervisor on the communications
network (RS485 rear port)
− on receipt of a remote control from MiCOM S1 support software (RS232 front
port)
− when one of the following occurs (exclusive choice):
− instantaneous over-stepping of one of the following current thresholds:
l>>, lo>, lo>> (instantaneous short-circuit, instantaneous earth fault 1st
threshold and instantaneous earth fault 2nd threshold data respectively)
− or when output relay No 1 is excited (relay dedicated to the tripping of the
cut-off device). The excitement of this relay can be due to the detection of
an electrical fault or to a voluntary opening order (opening remote control
on the communication network, external order relayed by one of the logic
inputs).
User Guide
The disturbance recordings can be retrieved:

− either using the communication network (RS485 rear port)
− or using the MiCOM S1 support software (RS232 front port)
NOTE: – If the configuration of the pre-time and post-time corresponds
to total recording duration of more than three seconds then
the post-time duration is automatically reduced so that the
total recording duration is 3 seconds.
– Disturbance recordings are not erasable. They are managed
in a circular list: when this is full, the oldest recording is
erased.
– The data registered in non volatile memory are available for
1 year without auxiliary power, thanks to a back-up battery
housed in the front face.
– When the disturbance recordings are extracted from relay
P220 using the MiCOM S1 support software, they are stored
in the COMTRADE format.
4.12.3 The SW MONITORING submenu
In this menu the operator with access to data relating to the cut-off device:
− Summation of the amps exponent “ n ” switched by the cut-off device for each
phase.
− Total number of operations of relay No 1
− Opening time of the cut-off device.
NOTE: – These data are those calculated by the relay P220 whilst in
the SW SUPERVISION menu the operator with access to the
adjustment of the parameters to generate alarm data when a
threshold is exceeded.
– The way in which relay P220 calculates its data is explained in
the section SW SUPERVISION (§ 4.11.11).
User Guide
4.13 ALARM messages

The management of the alarms is carried out directly on the front face screen. The
display of alarm messages takes priority over that of the value by default (selected in
CONFIG. SELECT submenu), so that as soon as an alarm is detected by the, the
message is displayed on the MiCOM P220 relay screen.
The alarm messages are classified into 2 categories:
− Motor alarm message
− Relay hardware or software fault, or RTD/thermistor failure message
The display of a HARDWARE ALARM message takes priority over the display of a
MOTOR ALARM message.
NOTE: Upon loss of auxiliary power supply, the alarm messages
disappear. They are restored upon return of the power supply.
4.13.1 The MOTOR ALARM messages
Data considered as motor alarm are displayed in the MOTOR ALARMS menu.
If several alarms appear, they are written to memory in the order of their detection.
They are displayed in reverse chronological order (the most recent alarm first, the
oldest last). Each message is numbered and the total number of messages is
indicated.
Example
This message indicates an earth fault (time delayed threshold tlo>>). This alarm is
the 2nd out of total of 7.
t I0>> 2/7
The operator can read all the alarm messages using the ! key, without needing to
key in the pass word.
The operator can acknowledge the alarms using the ! key. Keying in the password
is not necessary. The operator can acknowledge each message one at a time, or
acknowledge all the messages by going to the end of the list and acknowledging all
the messages by pressing the " key.
NOTE: If an alarm has not been acknowledged, it will not be possible to
view the default display programmed by the operator.
4.13.2 The HARDWARE ALARM messages
The safety and availability of the MiCOM P220 relay can be improved by a cyclic
autotest procedure of both hardware and software. Each time the P220 relay is
switched on, auto-diagnostic tests are initiated: these tests deal with the output relays
(engaging / triggering tests), the microprocessor, the memories (EEPROM checksum
calculation, RAM tests) and the acquisition circuit of each analogue input.
User Guide
The hardware faults are split into 2 groups:

• Minor faults: these are faults classified as non serious (communication fault,
analogue output fault, 3.6V battery, RTD or thermistor failure and date indicator
fault).
• Major faults: these are serious faults (RAM fault, EEPROM data fault, EEPROM
calibration fault, analogue signal acquisition fault, watchdog fault).
Any major fault recorded is immediately the subject of an alarm and provokes the
activation of the WATCHDOG relay (relay No0, terminals 35-36-37), as well as the
switching off of the other output relays.
The acknowledged alarms are all written to memory in the order of their appearance.
The display of the alarms is ensured in reverse chronological order (the most recent
alarm first, the least recent last). Each message is numbered and the total number of
messages is indicated in the top left hand corner of the display.
The operator can read all of the alarm messages using the ! key, without any
necessity to key in the pass word.
The acknowledgement of the relay hardware alarm messages is IMPOSSIBLE. Only
the disappearance of the cause of the alarm will provoke their acknowledgement.
The display of a hardware fault (equipment fault) takes priority over the other alarms
(non equipment fault).
NOTE: In the case of major hardware alarm and even when the tripping
relay is configured to be latched, it drops out.
User Guide
5. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
5.1 Event records
The MiCOM P220 relay registers 75 changes of state in non volatile memory and
dates them with a precision of 1 ms. For each change of state the relay indicates the
date, the time and the wording of the event.
This applies to any change of state of the logic inputs / outputs, the alteration of one
or several setting parameters, alarm or triggering data. Please refer to Chapter 6-
Communications for more information.
The recordings of the consignment of states can be downloaded:
• either using the remote communication network (RS485 rear port)
• or using the MiCOM S1 support software (RS232 front port)
NOTE: – The data are registered in non volatile memory and are
available for one year without auxiliary power thanks to a
back-up battery housed in the front face.
– These consignments are not erasable. They are managed in
a circular list: when this is full, the change of state of the
oldest is erased.
5.2 Recording of the form of the starting current
The MiCOM P220 relay records the form of current of the last start. In order to do
this, it records at each period (every 20 ms if the frequency is at 50 Hz) the maximum
value of one of the three phase currents. The values recorded are expressed in True
RMS values.
The recording is initiated following detection by the relay of an motor start up, it stops
at the end of the tlstart time delay allocated to the start up.
The file containing the recording of the form of the starting current can be repatriated
on a PC:
• either using the remote communication network (RS485 rear port)
• or using the MiCOM S1 support software (RS232 front port). The data will be
stored in COMTRADE format.
NOTE: – The data are recorded in non volatile memory and are
available for one year without auxiliary power, thanks to a
back-up battery housed in the front face.
– The maximum duration of a recording is limited to 40
seconds.
User Guide
6. PC CONNECTION D’UN PC – LOCAL COMMUNICATIONS

6.1 Connection configuration
Configuration is indicated in the figure below:
P0220ENb
The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector located
under the bottom hinged cover.
It provides RS232 (IEC60870 compliant) serial data communication and is intended
for use with a PC connected locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) as shown in the
figure above. This is a pin-to-pin connection which must not be used as a permanent
connection.
6.2 Configuration of the relay and PC
Once the physical connection is established, the relay and PC settings must be
checked in order to start the communication.
The default communication settings of the RS232 port are as follows:
Protocol Modbus
Rate 19 200 bits/s
Address Must be set in the "Communication" menu, "Address" line.
Message format 11 bit - 1 bit start, 8 bits data, 1 bit even, 1 bit stop.
Technical Guide P220/EN HI/B43
MiCOM P220
Menu of the HMI

Menu of the HMI
CONTENT
1. THE OP PARAMETERS MENU 3
2. CONFIGURATION MENU 5
2.1 CONFIG. SELECT submenu 5
2.2 The CT RATIO submenu 6
2.3 The LED submenus 7
2.4 CONFIGURATION INPUTS submenu 9
2.5 Date Format submenu 9
3. THE MEASUREMENTS MENU 10
4. THE PROCESS SUBMENU 11
5. THE TRIP STATISTICS MENU 12
6. THE COMMUNICATION MENU 14
7. THE PROTECTION MENU 15

7.1 The [49] THERMAL OVERLOD submenu 15
7.2 The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu 16
7.3 The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu 17
7.4 The [46] UNBALANCE submenu 18
7.5 The[48] EXCES LONG START submenu 19
7.6 The [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu 20
7.7 The [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu 21
7.8 The [49/38] RTD submenu 22
7.9 The [49] THERMISTOR submenu 23
8. THE AUTOMATIC CTRL MENU 24

8.1 The [66] Start number submenu 24
8.2 The MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu 24
8.3 The REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu 25
8.4 The INPUTS submenu 26
8.5 The AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu 27
8.6 The AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu 29
8.7 The AUX OUPUT RLY submenu 30
8.8 The LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS submenu 33
8.9 The TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu 34
P220/EN HI/B43 Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
8.10 The LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu 36

8.11 The SW SUPERVISION submenu 37
9. RECORD MENU 38
9.1 The FAULT RECORD submenu 38
9.2 The DISTURB RECORD submenu 39
9.3 The SW MONITORING submenu 40
10. MENUS CONTENT 41

Menu of the HMI
1. THE OP PARAMETERS MENU
Press the ! and " keys to move around in the OP

OP PARAMETERS PARAMETERS menu.
Modification of the password : key in the old password

PASSWORD =
and confirm it. Then press the # key, key in the new
****
password and confirm the whole input with the # key.
The message NEW PASSWORD OK is displayed to
indicate that the password has changed.
Displays the model of MiCOM relay.

TYPE =
P220
Displays your reference code. It contains letters

REFERENCE =
between A and Z. To enter it, press the # key for each
XXXX
letter and use the ! and " keys to move forwards
and backwards in the alphabet.
After each letter, press the $ key to enter the next letter.
At the end of the input, press the # key to confirm
your reference code.
Displays the software version code.

SOFTWARE VERSION =
3.C
Acquisition of the reference frequency of the electrical

FREQUENCY=
power system. There is a choice of: 50 Hz or 60 Hz
50 Hz
Displays the Active Group.

ACTIVE GROUP=
1
Displays the state of the binary inputs.

INPUT 54321
The binary inputs are numbered from 1 to 5 starting
ST = 00000
from the right. The state of each binary input is
displayed immediately below:
- state 0: input inactive.
- state 1 : input active
Displays the state of the output relays. The output
OUTPUT 54321
relays are numbered from 1 to 5 starting from the
ST = 00000
right. The status of each output relay is displayed
immediate below:
- state 0: input inactive.
- state 1 : input active
Selection and display of the date.
DATE
14/09/00
Menu of the HMI
Selection and display of the time.

TIME
16:35:30
Menu of the HMI
2. CONFIGURATION MENU
Press the ! and " keys to enter the

CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION menu
2.1 CONFIG. SELECT submenu
To move about in the CONFIG. SELECT submenu, use

CONFIG. SELECT the ! and " keys. To go into the CT RATIO, LED 5,
LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus, press the % and $
keys.
Selection of the mode of operation of the logic inputs.

CHANGE GROUP
Choice of: EDGE/LEVEL.
INPUT = EDGE
Selection and display of the configuration group.

SETTING GROUP
Choice of: group 1 or group 2.
1
Selection and display of a default value. There is a

DEFAULT DISPLAY
choice of: IA RMS or IB RMS or IC RMS or I0 RMS or
IA RMS
THERM ST or % I LOAD
Selection and display of the start detection criterion.

START DETECTION
Choice of: 52A or 52A +I
52A + I dem
Selection and display of the type of analogue output:

ANALOG. OUTPUT
0-20 mA or 4-20 mA (optional)
0 - 20 mA
DATA TYPE ANALOG Selection and display of the value transmitted by the
analogue output (optional). Choice of: IA RMS, IB
IA RMS RMS, IC RMS, I0 RMS, THERM ST, % I LOAD, Tbef
START, Tbef TRIP (respectively time delay before start,
time delay before thermal tripping) T°C RTD1, T°C
RTD2, T°C RTD3, T°C RTD4, T°C RTD5, T°C RTD6.
Selection and display of the type of RTD temperature

RTD type =
probe (optional): PT100, Ni100, Ni120 or Cu10
PT100
Selection and display of the type of thermistor 1

Thermist 1 type =
(optional) : choice of PTC or NTC
PTC
Selection and display of the type of thermistor 2

Thermist 2 type =
(optional) : choice of PTC or NTC
NTC
Menu of the HMI
2.2 The CT RATIO submenu

CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION menu
To move around in the CT RATIO submenu, press the

CT RATIO ! and "keys.
To go into the CONFIG. SELECT, LED 5, LED 6, LED 7
and LED 8, press the % and $ keys.
Selection and display of the primary rating of the
PRIM PH =
phase CT. The value is entered on 4 figures: from 1 to
****
3000 in steps of 1.
Selection and display of the secondary rating of the

SEC PH =
phase CT. The value is to be selected between either 1
*
or 5.
Selection and display of the primary rating of the earth

PRIM E =
CT. The value is entered on 4 figures: from 1 to 3000
****
in steps of 1.
Selection and display of the secondary rating of the

SEC E =
earth CT. The value is to be selected between either 1
*
or 5.
Menu of the HMI
2.3 The LED submenus

CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION menu.
To move around in the LED 5 submenu, press the !

LED 5 and " keys. To go to the CONFIG. SELECT, CT
RATIO, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus, press the %
and $ keys.
To link LED 5 with the "thermal overload" function so
THERM OVERLOAD ?
that it lights up if the thermal overload function
YES
operates, press #, select YES by using the ! and "
keys, then press # again to confirm
This links LED 5 to the thermal alarm threshold

θ ALARM ?
θALARM.
NO
This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tI>>

t I >> ?
(protection against short-circuits).
NO
This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIo>

t Io > ?
(protection against Earth faults)
NO
This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIo>>

t Io >> ?
(protection against Earth faults)
NO
This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIi >

t Ii > ?
(protection against unbalances).
NO
This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIi >>

t Ii >> ?
(protection against unbalances)
NO
This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold t I<

t I< ?
(protection against undercurrent / losses of load).
NO
This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIstart

EXCES LONG
(protection against excessively long starts).
START ? NO
This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold t Istall

t Istall ?
(protection against rotor stalling when the motor is
NO
running)
Menu of the HMI
This links LED 5 to the function "rotor locked on

LOCKED ROTOR ?
starting"
NO
This links LED 5 to the "emergency restart" information.

EMERG RESTART ?
NO
This links LED 5 to the "forbidden start" information

FORBIDDEN START ?
NO
This links LED 5 to the time delayed thresholds tRTD1

t RTD 1, 2, 3 ALARM ?
ALARM, tRTD2 ALARM and tRTD3 ALARM (temperature
NO
protection: optional)
This links LED 5 to the time delayed thresholds

t RTD 1, 2, 3 TRIP ?
tRTD1 TRIP, tRTD2 TRIP and tRTD3 TRIP (temperature
NO

t RTD 4, 5, 6 ALARM ?
tRTD4 ALARM, tRTD5 ALARM and tRTD6 ALARM
NO
(temperature protection: optional)

t RTD 4, 5, 6 TRIP ?
tRTD4 TRIP, tRTD5 TRIP and tRTD6 TRIP (temperature
NO

Thermist 1, 2?
Thermist 1 and Thermist 2 (temperature protection:
NO
optional)
… ditto for thermistor 2 (optional)
This links LED 5 to the auxiliary time delay tEXT1
EXT 1 ?
NO
This links LED 5 to the auxiliary time delay tEXT2

EXT 2 ?
NO
This links LED 5 to the indication with the information

MOTOR STOPPED ?
"motor stopped"
NO

MOTOR RUNNING ?
"motor running".
NO
Menu of the HMI

SUCCESSFUL
"successful start"
START ? NO
2.4 CONFIGURATION INPUTS submenu
Configuration of the mode of operation of logic inputs.

Inputs : 54321
Choice: 0 or 1.
11111
2.5 Date Format submenu
Configuration of the Date format for synchronization.

DATE FORMAT:
Choice: PRIVATE or IEC.
PRIVATE
NOTE: If the choosen protocol for communication is Modbus, so you will

find this submenu in the "COMMUNICATION" menu.
Menu of the HMI
3. THE MEASUREMENTS MENU
Press the ! and " keys to move about in the

MEASUREMENTS MEASUREMENTS menu.
Display of the current of phase A (true RMS value)

IA RMS =
taking into account the phase CT ratio (CT RATIO
0.00 A
submenu)
Display of the current of phase B (true RMS value)

IB RMS =
0.00 A
submenu)
Display of the current of phase C (true RMS value)

IC RMS =
0.00 A
submenu)
Display of the earth current (true RMS- value) taking

IN RMS =
into account the earth CT ratio (CT RATIO submenu)
0.00 A
Display of the positive sequence current

I1 POSITIVE =
0.00 A
Display of the negative sequence current

I2 NEGATIVE =
0.00 A
Display of the zero sequence current

Io ZERO =
0.00 A
Display of the frequency of the power system supplying

FREQUENCY =
the motor, calculated from the phase currents
0.0 Hz
Display of the maximum phase current value outside

MAX PH CURRENT =
the starting period
PROCESS 0.00 A
NOTE: The 3 phase currents and the earth current are displayed as true
RMS values: taking into account up to the 10th harmonic at 50
Hz, and up to the 8th at 60 Hz.
Menu of the HMI
4. THE PROCESS SUBMENU

PROCESS PROCESS menu.
Display of the current consumed by the motor as a

% I FLC
percentage of the thermal tripping current threshold
0%
Iθ>
Display of the thermal state of the motor (tripping at

THERMAL STATE =
100 %).
CLR ?= CL 0%
For the test phases of the relay P220, you can reset the
thermal state to zero by pressing the key &.
Display of the time before thermal tripping occurs,

T before TH TRIP =
0s once the thermal alarm threshold θALARM is exceeded.
Display of the temperature of the probe RTD1

Temperature
(optional).
RTD 1 = °C
... and similarly for RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5 and
RTD6 (optional).
Display of the number of starts permitted.
PERMIT START NB
0
Display of the time to wait before a new start is

T before START
permitted.
0s
Display of the current of the last start.

Last Start I =
0.00 A
Display of the duration of the last start.

Last Start Time
0s
Display of the number of starts of the motor.

MOTOR START NB
To reset to zero press & key.
CLR ? = CL 0
Display of the number of emergency starts.

EMERG RESTART NB
To reset to zero: press & key.
CLR ? = CL 0
Display of the number of operating hours of the motor.

MOT OPERAT HOURS
To reset to zero: press & key.
CLR ? = CL 0 h
Menu of the HMI
5. THE TRIP STATISTICS MENU
Press the ! and " keys to move about in the TRIP

TRIP STATISTICS STATISTICS menu.
To reset all the tripping statistics to zero, press key &.

STATISTICS
CLR ? = CL NO
Display of the total number of tripping operations (with

TOTAL TRIP NB
and without fault)
0
Display of the number of deliberate tripping operations

OPERATOR TRIP NB
(without fault)
0
Display of the number of tripping operations caused by

THERM TRIP
a thermal overload
NB = 0

t I >> TRIP
a short-circuit
NB = 0

t Io>, t Io>> TRIP
an Earth fault
NB = 0

t Ii > , t Ii >> TRIP
an unbalance
NB = 0

t Istart TRIP
an excessively long start
NB = 0

t Istall TRIP
a stalled rotor while the motor is running
NB = 0

LOCKED ROTOR TP
a locked rotor when starting
NB = 0
Menu of the HMI

t I < TRIP
the protection against undercurrents/loss of load
NB = 0

RTD1 TRIP
the temperature protection function by probe RTD1
NB = 0
(optional)
...and so on for RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5 and RTD6
(optional
thermist 1 TRIP
the temperature protection function by thermistor 1
NB = 0
(optional)
...ditto for thermistor 2 (optional)
Display of the number of tripping operations on
EQUATION A TRIP
account of the validation of equation A
NB = 0
… ditto for equations B, C and D.
Menu of the HMI
6. THE COMMUNICATION MENU

• If communication is under the MODBUS protocol

COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION menu
Use of the communication (RS485) at the rear of the

COM. OK =
MiCOM P220 relay.
YES
To activate the communication, press the # key, select
YES by using the ! and " keys, then press # again
to confirm.
Selection and display of the transmission speed.

DATA RATE =
Choice of: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200 Bd
19200 or 38400 bauds.
Selection and display of the parity in the

PARITY =
communication frame. Choice of: With (even or odd)
WITHOUT
or Without
Selection and display of the number of data bits in the

DATA BITS=
frame. Choice of: 7 or 8
7
Selection and display of the number of stop bits. Au

STOP BITS =
Choice : 1 or 2
1
Selection and display of the address of the MiCOM

RELAY ADRESS =
P220 relay in the network. Choice from: 1 to 255
1
• If communication is under the Courier protocol

COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION menu.
Use of the communication (RS485) at the rear of the

COM. OK =
MiCOM P220 relay
YES
To activate the communication, press the # key, select
YES by using the ! and " keys, then press # again
to confirm.
Selection and display of the address of the MiCOM
RELAY ADRESS =
P220 relay in the network. Choice from: 1 to 255
1
Menu of the HMI
7. THE PROTECTION MENU

7.1 The [49] THERMAL OVERLOD submenu
Press the ! and " keys to enter the PROTECTION G1

PROTECTION G1 menu.
To move about in the submenu [49] THERMAL

[49] THERMAL OVER
OVERLOAD, press the ! and "keys.
LOAD
To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys.
To switch on the "thermal overload" function: press the

THERMAL OVERLOAD
# key, select YES by using the ! and ".
FUNCT ? YES
Confirm with #.
To switch on the "thermal inhibition on starting"

θ INHIBIT ?
function, press the # key, select YES using the ! and
YES
" keys.
To confirm the selection, press the # key.
Setting of the thermal overload current threshold Iθ>:

Iθ > =
from 0.2 In to 1.5 In in steps of 0.01 In
0.2 In
Setting of the value of the negative sequence

Ke =
contribution factor Ke in the thermal image :
3
from 0 to 10 in steps of 1
Setting of the value of the overload time constant Te1:

Te1 =
from 1 to 180 minutes in steps of 1 min
1 mn
Setting of the starting time constant value Te2:

Te2 =
from 1 to 360 minutes in steps of 1 minute
1 mn
Setting of the value of the cooling time constant Tr:

Tr =
from 1 to 999 minutes in steps of 1 minute
1 mn
To switch on the function of "influence of a RTD

RTD1 INFLUENCE ?
temperature probe" (optional): press the # key, select
YES
YES using the ! and " keys. To confirm the
selection, press the # key.
To switch on the "thermal alarm" function: press the #
θ ALARM ?
key, select YES using the ! and " keys. To confirm
YES
the choice, press the # key.
Menu of the HMI
Setting of the thermal alarm threshold value θALARM:

θ ALARM =
from 20 % to 100 % in steps of 1 %
20 %
To switch on the "thermal inhibition of start" function:

θ FORBID START ?
press the # key, select YES using the ! and " keys.
YES
Setting of the threshold value for thermal inhibition of

θ FORBID START =
start θforbid:
20 %
from 20% to 100% in steps of 1%
7.2 The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu

PROTECTION G1 menu.
To move about in the [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT

[50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu, press the ! and " keys..
To switch on the "short-circuit" function :

I>> FUNCTION ?
press the # key. Select YES by using the ! and "
YES
keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key.
Setting of the short-circuit current threshold value I>>:

I >> =
from 1 to 12 In by steps of 0.1 In.
1.0 In
Setting of the time delay tI>> associated with the

t I >> =
threshold I>>:
10 ms
from 0 to 100 s in steps of 0.01 s
Menu of the HMI
7.3 The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu

PROTECTION G1 menu.
To move about in the [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT

[50N/51N] EARTH
submenu, press the ! and " keys
FAULT
To switch on the "earth fault" function (threshold Io>):

Io> FUNCTION ?
press the # key.
YES
Select YES by using the ! and " keys.
Setting of the first earth fault current threshold value
Io> =
Io>:
0.002 Ion
from 0,002 to 1 Ion in steps of 0,001 Ion
Setting of the time delay tIo> associated with the

t Io> =
threshold Io>:
0 ms
from 0 to 100 s in steps of 0.01
To switch on the "earth fault" function (Io>> threshold):

Io>> FUNCTION ?
press the # key.
YES
Select YES by using the ! and " keys
Setting of the second earth fault current threshold value
Io>> =
Io>> :
0.002 Ion
from 0.002 to 1 Ion in steps of 0.001 Ion
Setting of the time delay associated with the threshold

t Io>> =
Io>> :
10 ms
from 0 ms to 100 s in steps of 0.01 s
Menu of the HMI
7.4 The [46] UNBALANCE submenu

PROTECTION G1 menu.
To move about in the [46] UNBALANCE submenu,

[46] UNBALANCE press the ! and " keys.
To switch on the "unbalance" function (threshold Ii>):

Ii> FUNCTION ?
press the # key, select YES by using the ! and "
YES
keys.
Setting of the first unbalance current threshold value
Ii > =
Ii> :
0.05 In
from 0.05 to 0.8 In in steps of 0.025 In
Setting of the time delay tIi> associated with the

t Ii > =
threshold Ii> :
40 ms
To switch on the « unbalance » function (Ii>>

Ii>> FUNCTION ?
threshold) : press the # key, select YES by using the !
YES
and " keys.
Setting of the second unbalance current threshold
Ii >> =
value Ii>>:
0.2 In
from 0,2 to 0,8 In in steps of 0,05 In
Menu of the HMI
7.5 The[48] EXCES LONG START submenu

PROTECTION G1 menu.
To move about in the [48] EXCES LONG START

[48] EXCES LONG
submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other
START
submenus, press the % and $ keys.
To switch on the "excessively long start" function: press

EXCES LONG START
the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys.
FUNCT ? YES
Setting of the Istart detection threshold :

Istart DETECTION
from 1 to 5 Iθ pain steps of 0,5 Iθ
= 1.0 Iθ
Setting of the time delay tIstart associated with the

t Istart =
threshold Istart:
14 s
Menu of the HMI
7.6 The [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu

PROTECTION G1 menu.
[51LR-50S] BLOCK To move about in the [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR

ROTOR submenu, press the ! and " keys.
BLOQUE To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys.
To switch on the "blocked rotor" function: press the #

BLOCKED ROTOR
key: select YES by using the ! and " keys.
FUNCT ? YES
Setting of the blocked rotor time delay tIstall associated

t Istall =
with the Istall current threshold:
0,1 s
from 0.1 to 60 s in steps of 0.1 s
To switch on the "stalled rotor with motor running"

STALLED ROTOR?
function : press the # key, select YES by using the !
YES
and " keys.
Setting of the stalled rotor detection current threshold
Istall DETECTION
Istall:
= 1.0 Iθ
from 1 to 5 Iθ in steps of 0.5 Iθ
To switch on the "locked rotor at start" function: press

LOCKED ROTOR AT
the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys
START ? YES
To confirm the selection, press the # key
Menu of the HMI
7.7 The [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu

PROTECTION G1 menu.
To move about in the [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu,

[37] LOSS OF LOAD press the ! and " keys
To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys
To switch on the "undercurrent" function: press the #

I< FUNCTION ?
key, select YES by using the ! and " keys.
YES
Setting of the undercurrent threshold value I < :

I<=
from 0.1 to 1 In in steps of 0.01 In
0.1 In
Setting of the tI < time delay associated with the

tI<=
threshold I < :
0.2 s
from 0.2 to 100 s in steps of 0.1 s
Setting of the inhibition time of the "undercurrent / loss

T inhib =
of load" function on starting, Tinhib :
50 ms
from 50 ms to 300 s in steps of 0.1 s
Menu of the HMI
7.8 The [49/38] RTD submenu

PROTECTION G1 menu.
To move about in the [49/38] RTD submenu, press the

[49/38] RTD
! and " keys.
SENSORS
To switch on the temperature protection function using

RTD 1 FUNCTION ?
probe RTD1: press the # key, and select YES by using
YES
the ! and " keys.
Setting of the alarm temperature threshold value for
RTD 1 ALARM =
RTD1 ALARM:
0°C
from 0 to 200 °C in steps of 1 °C
Setting of the time delay tRTD1 ALARM associated with

t RTD 1 ALARM =
the RTD1 ALARM threshold :
0.0 s
Setting of the tripping temperature threshold value for

RTD 1 TRIP =
RTD1 TRIP:
0°C
from 0 to 200°C in steps of 1°C
Setting of the time delay tRTD1 TRIP associated with the

t RTD 1 TRIP =
RTD1 TRIP threshold :
0.0 s
from 0 to 100 s in steps of 0,1 s
...and so on for the probes RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5
and RTD6
Menu of the HMI
7.9 The [49] THERMISTOR submenu

PROTECTION G1 menu.
To move about in the [49] THERMISTOR submenu,

[49] THERMISTOR press the ! and " keys. To enter the other
submenus, press the % and $ keys.

Thermistor 1 ?
thermistor 1: press the # key, select YES by using the
YES
! and " keys.
Setting of the resistance threshold value for
Thermist 1 =
Thermistor1:
0.1 kΩ
from 100 to 30000 Ω in steps of 100 Ω

Thermistor 2 ?
thermistor 2: press the # key: select YES by using the
YES
! and " keys.
Setting of the resistance threshold value for
Thermist 2 =
Thermistor2:
0.1 kΩ
from 100 to 30000 Ω in steps of 100 Ω
Menu of the HMI
8. THE AUTOMATIC CTRL MENU

8.1 The [66] Start number submenu
Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL

AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.
To move about in the [66] START NUMBER submenu,

[66] START NUMBER press the ! and " keys.
To switch on the "number of starts limitation" function:

START NB LIMITAT
press the # key, select YES by using the ! and "
FUNCT ? YES
keys.
Setting of the reference time Treference during which
Treference =
the starts are counted:
10 mn
from 10 to 120 min in steps of 5 min
Setting of the threshold of the number of hot starts:

HOT START NB =
from 0 to 5 in steps of de 1
0
Setting of the threshold of the number of cold starts :

COLD START NB =
from 0 to 5 in steps of de 1
0
Setting of the time delay during which starting is

T interdiction =
forbidden Tinterdiction:
1 mn
8.2 The MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu

AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.
To move about in the MIN TIME BETW 2 START

MIN TIME BETW 2
submenu, press the ! and " keys.
START
To switch on the "minimum time between two starts"

TIME BETW START
function: press the # key, select YES by using the !
FUNCT ? YES
and " keys
Setting of the minimum time between two starts Tbetw
T betw 2 start =
2 starts :
1 mn
Menu of the HMI
8.3 The REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu

AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.
To move about in the REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu,

REACCEL AUTHORIZ press the ! and " keys.
To switch on the "re-acceleration authorisation"

REACCEL AUTHORIZ
function: press the # key, and select YES by using the
FUNCT ? YES
! and " keys.
Setting of the re-acceleration time delay Treacc :
VOLT DIP DURAT
from 0.2 s to 10 s in steps of 0.05 s
Treacc = 0.2 s
Menu of the HMI
8.4 The INPUTS submenu

AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.
To move about in the INPUTS submenu, press the !

INPUTS and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the %
and $ keys. .
To programme the inputs numbered 3, 4 and 5, press

INPUT 3 =
the # key, then press the ! and " keys to scroll
NONE
through the possible allocations :
- none (no allocation) : NONE
-emergency start : EMERG ST
INPUT 4 = -change of configuration : SET GROUP
NONE -voltage dip : VOLT. DIP
-triggering of the disturbance recording : DIST TRIG
- external acknowledgement : EXT RESET
- external auxiliary1 : EXT 1
INPUT 5 = - external auxiliary 2 : EXT 2
NONE - external auxiliary 3 : EXT 3
- external auxiliary 4 : EXT 4
To confirm your selection, press the # key.
Setting of the time delay tEXT1 associated with the

t EXT 1 =
input EXT 1 :
0s

t EXT 2 =
input EXT 2 :
0s

t EXT 3 =
input EXT 3 :
0s

t EXT 4 =
input EXT 4 :
0s
Menu of the HMI
8.5 The AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu

AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.
To move about in the AND LOGIC EQUATION

AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu, press the ! and " keys.
To allocate the "thermal tripping information"

THERM OV DCBA
(protection against thermal overloads) to one (or more)
0000
of the equations A, B, C and D :
press the # key, allocate the value 1 under the letter
by pressing the ! and " keys to increase or decrease,
then confirm the selection using the #.
Allocation of the thermal alarm threshold θALARM

θ ALARM DCBA
0000
Allocation of the thermal threshold for prohibiting

θ FORBID DCBA
starting θforbid
START 0000
Allocation of the instantaneous threshold I >> (short-

I >> DCBA
circuit)
0000
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tI >> (short-

t I >> DCBA
circuit)
0000
Allocation of the instantaneous threshold Io> (earth

Io> DCBA
fault)
0000
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo> (earth

t Io> DCBA
fault)
0000
Allocation of the instantaneous threshold Io >> (earth

Io>> DCBA
fault)
0000
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo>> (earth

t Io>> DCBA
fault)
0000
Menu of the HMI
Allocation of the time delayed threshold tIi>

t Ii > DCBA
(unbalance)
0000
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIi>>

t Ii >> DCBA
(unbalance)
0000
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIstart

EXCES LG DCBA
(excessively long starts)
START 0000
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIstall (stalling

t Istall DCBA
of the rotor when the motor is running)
0000
Allocation of the function "rotor locked at start"

LOCKED DCBA
ROTOR 0000
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold I <

tI< DCBA
(undercurrent/loss of load)
0000
Allocation of the function "limitation of the number of

START NB DCBA
starts"
LIMIT 0000
Allocation of the function Tbetw 2 start (function of the

T betw 2 DCBA
minimum time between 2 starts)
Start 0000
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tRTD1 ALARM

t RTD 1 DCBA
ALARM 0000
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tRTD1 TRIP

t RTD 1 DCBA
TRIP 0000
…and so on for the probes RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD 5
and RTD6 (optional)
Allocation of the threshold Thermistor1: (temperature
Thermist1 DCBA
0000
…ditto for thermistor 2 (optional)
Allocation of the input EXT1 (instantaneous or with time

EXT1 DCBA
delay)
0000
Menu of the HMI

EXT2 DCBA
delay)
0000

EXT3 DCBA
delay)
0000

EXT4 DCBA
delay)
0000
Allocation of the information "successful start"

SUCCESS DCBA
START 0000
8.6 The AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu

AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.
To move about in the AND LOGIC EQUATION T

AND LOGIC EQUAT
DELAY submenu, press the ! and " keys.
T DELAY
Setting of the time delay Toperat allocated to the logic

EQU. A T operat =
equation A:
0 mn
from 0 to 60 min in steps of 0.1 s
Setting of the time delay Treset allocated to the logic

EQU. A T reset =
equation A:
0 mn
from 0 to 60 min in steps of 0.1 s
... and so on for the logic equations B, C and D
Menu of the HMI
8.7 The AUX OUPUT RLY submenu

AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.
To move about in the AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu,

AUX OUTPUT RLY press the ! and " keys
To allocate the "thermal tripping" information

THERM OV. 5432
(protection against thermal overloads) to one (or more)
0000
of the outputs Nos. 2 to 5 :
press the # key, allocate the value 1 under the letter
by pressing the ! and " keys to increase or decrease,
then confirm the selection using the # key.
Allocation of the thermal alarm threshold θALARM

θ ALARM 5432
0000
Allocation of the thermal threshold for prohibiting

θ FORBID. 5432
starting θ forbid
START 0000
Allocation of the instantaneous threshold I >> (short-

I >> 5432
circuit)
0000

t I >> 5432
circuit)
0000
Allocation of the instantaneous threshold Io> (earth

Io> 5432
fault)
0000
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo> (earth

t Io> 5432
fault)
0000
Allocation of the instantaneous threshold Io >> (earth

Io>> 5432
fault)
0000
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo>> (earth

t Io>> 5432
fault)
0000
Menu of the HMI
Allocation of the time delayed threshold tIi>

t Ii > 5432
(unbalance)
0000
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIi>>

t Ii >> 5432
(unbalance)
0000

EXCES LG 5432
(excessively long starts)
START 0000
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIstall (stalling

t Istall 5432
of the rotor when the motor is running
0000
Allocation of the function "rotor locked at start

LOCKED 5432
ROTOR 0000
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold I <

tI< 5432
(undercurrent / loss of load)
0000
Allocation of the function "limitation of the number of

START NB 5432
starts"
LIMIT 0000
Allocation of the function Tbetw 2 start (functions of the

T betw 2 5432
minimum time between 2 starts)
start 0000
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tRTD1 ALARM

t RTD 1 5432
ALARM 0000

t RTD 1 5432
TRIP 0000
…and so on for the probes RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5
and RTD6 (optional)
Allocation of the threshold Thermistor 1: (temperature
Thermist1 5432
0000
…ditto for thermistor 2 (optional)

EXT1 5432
delay)
0000
Menu of the HMI

EXT2 5432
delay)
0000

EXT3 5432
delay)
0000

EXT4 5432
delay)
0000
Allocation of the closing command (order given by a

CLOSE 5432
supervisor via the RS485)
ORDER 0000
Allocation of the tripping command (order given by a

TRIP 5432
supervisor via the RS485)
ORDER 0000
Allocation of the command ORDER 1 (any order given

ORDER 1 5432
by a supervisor via the RS485)
0000
Allocation of the command ORDER 2 (any order given

ORDER 2 5432
by a supervisor via the RS485)
0000
Allocation of the "successful start" information

SUCCESS 5432
START 0000
Allocation of the logic equation A

t EQU. A 5432
0000
Allocation of the logic equation B

t EQU. B 5432
0000
Allocation of the logic equation C

t EQU. C 5432
0000
Allocation of the logic equation D

t EQU. D 5432
0000
Menu of the HMI
Allocation of the circuit breaker operating time

SW OPER 5432
threshold
TIME 0000
Allocation of the threshold of the number of operations

SW OPER 5432
performed by the circuit breaker
NB 0000
Allocation of the threshold of the sum of amperes to

SAn 5432
the power of n interrupted by the circuit breaker
0000
Allocation of the active group

ACTIVE GR 5432
0000
8.8 The LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS submenu
Latching configuration of ouput relay n°2.

OUTPUT 2
NO

OUTPUT 3
NO

OUTPUT 4
NO

OUTPUT 5
NO
Menu of the HMI
8.9 The TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu

AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.
To move about in the TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu,

TRIP OUTPUT RLY press the ! and " keys.
To allocate the « thermal tripping information

THERM OVERLOAD ?
(protection against thermal overloads) to the trip output
YES
relay (output relay n° 1), press the # key, select YES
using the ! and " keys, then confirm the selection
using the # key.

t I >> ?
circuit)
YES
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo > (earth

t Io> ?
fault)
YES
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo >> (earth

t Io>> ?
fault)
YES
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIi >

t Ii > ?
(unbalance)
YES
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIi >>

t Ii >> ?
(unbalance)
YES

EXCES LONG
(excessively long start)
START ? YES
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIstall (rotor

t Istall ?
stalled while motor is running)
YES
Allocation of the function "rotor locked at start"

LOCKED ROTOR ?
YES
Menu of the HMI
Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tI <

tI<?
(undercurrent / loss of load)
YES

t RTD1 ?
TRIP YES
… and so on for the probes RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5
and RTD6 (optional)
Allocation of the threshold Thermistor1: (temperature
Thermist 1 ?
YES
… ditto for thermistor 2 (optional)

EXT 1 ?
delay)
YES

EXT 2 ?
delay)
NO
Allocation of the logic equation A

EQUATION A ?
YES
Allocation of the logic equation B

EQUATION B ?
NO
Allocation of the logic equation C

EQUATION C ?
NO
Allocation of the logic equation D

EQUATION D ?
NO
Menu of the HMI
8.10 The LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu

AUTOMAT. CTRL menu
To move about in the LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu,

LATCH TRIP ORDER press the ! and " key.
To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys
Latching of the output relay n°1 (trip output relay) on

LATCH t I>> ?
exceeding the time delayed short-circuit threshold tI> :
YES
press the # key, select YES using the ! and " keys,
then confirm the selection using the # key.
Latching on exceeding the time-delayed threshold tIo
LATCH t Io>> ?
>> (earth fault)
YES
Latching on exceeding the time-delayed threshold tIi

LATCH t Ii >> ?
>> (unbalance)
YES
Latching on validation of equation A

LATCH EQUA A ?
YES
Latching on validation of equation B

LATCH EQUA B ?
NO
Latching on validation of equation C

LATCH EQUA C ?
NO
Latching on validation of equation D

LATCH EQUA D ?
NO
Menu of the HMI
8.11 The SW SUPERVISION submenu

AUTOMAT. CTRL menu
To move about in the SW SUPERVISION submenu,

SW SUPERVISION press the ! and " keys.
To switch on the circuit breaker operating time

SW OPERATING
threshold function: press the # key, and select YES by
TIME ? YES
using the ! and " keys.
To confirm the selection, press the # key again
Setting of the operating time threshold SW OPERATING
SW OPERATING TIME=
TIME :
150 ms
from 50ms to 1s in steps of 50ms
Switching on the threshold of the number of operations

SW OPERATION NB ?
performed by the circuit breaker: select YES
YES
Setting of the threshold of the number of operations :

SW OPERATION NB =
from 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
150
Switching on the threshold of the sum of amperes to

SAn?
the power n interrupted by the circuit breaker: select
YES
YES
Setting of the threshold of the sum of amperes to the

SAn=
power n interrupted :
0 E6
from 106 to 4 000x106 in steps of 106
E6 means 106.
Setting of the exponent n :1 or 2
n=
1
Setting of TRIP T: from 0.2 to 5 s in steps of 0.1 s

TRIP T =
0.1 s
Setting of CLOSE T: from 0.2 to 5 s in steps of 0.1 s

CLOSE T =
0.1 s
Menu of the HMI
9. RECORD MENU
9.1 The FAULT RECORD submenu
Press the ! and " keys to enter the RECORD menu.

RECORD
To move about in the FAULT RECORD submenu, press

FAULT RECORD the ! and " keys.
To enter DISTURB RECORD submenu, press the % and
$ keys.
Displays the fault number. To display the information
FAULT NUMBER
on one of the last 5 faults, press the # key, and select
5
the number (1 to 5) by using the ! and " keys, then
press the # key again to confirm the selection
Displays the time of the fault
OCCUR FAULT HOUR
16 : 39 : 23 : 82
Displays the date of the fault

OCCUR FAULT DATE
01/09/98
Displays the active configuration group (1 or 2) at the

ACTIVE SET GROUP
time of the fault
1
Displays the faulty phase or phases: phase A, phase B

PHASE IN FAULT
or phase C
PHASE A
Displays the origin of the fault: here it is exceeding the

FAULT DETECTED
instantaneous threshold I >>
BY I>>
Displays the amplitude of the fault

MAGNITUDE
1.917 kA
Displays the value of the current of phase A (IA) at the

IA MAGNITUDE
time of the fault (true RMS value)
1.917 kA
Displays the value of the current of phase B (IB) at the

IB MAGNITUDE
1.997 kA
Menu of the HMI
Displays the value of the current of phase C (IC) at the

IC MAGNITUDE
1.931 kA
Displays the value of the earth current IN at the time of

IN MAGNITUDE
the fault (true RMS value)
0.03 A
9.2 The DISTURB RECORD submenu

RECORD
To move about in the DISTURB RECORD submenu,

DISTURB RECORD press the ! and " keys.
To enter FAULT RECORD submenu, press the % and $
keys.
Setting of the "pre-time" time :
PRE-TIME =
from 0,1 to 3 s in steps of 0,1 s
0.1 s
Setting of the "post-time" time delay :

POST-TIME =
from 0,1 to 3 s in steps of 0,1 s
0.1 s
Selection of the criterion for starting the disturbance

DISTUR REC TRIG =
recording :
ON INST.
- on exceeding certain instantaneous thresholds
(I>, Io> et Io>>) : ON INST.
- on tripping of the n°1 relay (trip output relay) :
ON TRIP
Menu of the HMI
9.3 The SW MONITORING submenu

RECORD
To move about in the SW MONITORING submenu,

SW MONITORING press the ! and " keys.
To reset to zero the sum of the amperes to the power

SA
of n interrupted: press the & key
CLR ? = CL
Displays the sum of the square amperes interrupted by

S A IA =
the circuit breaker for the current of phase IA.
0 E00
Displays the sum of the amperes to the power n

S A IB =
interrupted by the circuit breaker for the current of
0 E00
phase IB.
Displays the sum of the amperes to the power n

S A IC =
interrupted by the circuit breaker for the current of
0 E00
phase IC.
Displays the number of operations performed by the

SW OPERATION NB =
circuit breaker. To reset to zero: press the & key
CLR ?=CL 0
Displays the opening time of the circuit breaker.

SW OPERAT TIME =
100 ms
NOTE: If the user has set the exponent n to the value 1 in the SW
MONITORING submenu, the term SA shall replace the term SA2
to indicate the sum of the amperes interrupted in place of the
sum of the square amperes interrupted.
DEFAULT DISPLAY
10.
OP PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION
MiCOM P220
Technical Guide
PASSWORD =
Menu of the HMI
CONFIG. SELECT CT RATIO LED 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 CONFIGURATION INPUT DATE FORMAT

****
Inputs: 54321 Date format =

TYPE = Change GROUP PRIM PH = THERM Thermist 11111 Private
P220-4 Input = EDGE **** OVERLOAD ? Y/N 1, 2 ? Y/N
θ ALARM ? Y/N EXT 1 ? Y/N
MENUS CONTENT
REFERENCE = SEC PH = t I >> ? Y/N EXT 2 ? Y/N

SETTING GROUP
XXXX *
1 t I0 > ? Y/N MOTOR
STOPPED ? Y/N
t I0 >> ? Y/N
SOFTWARE VERSION PRIM E = MOTOR
DEFAULT DISPLAY t Ii > ? Y/N
= 4.C **** RUNNING ? Y/N
IA RMS
t Ii >> ? Y/N
SUCCESSFUL
SEC E = t I< ? Y/N START ? Y/N
FREQUENCY = START DETECTION.
50 Hz 52 A + I * EXCES LONG
START ? Y/N
t Istall? Y/N
Active Group = ANALOG. OUTPUT
1 LOCKED
0 - 20 mA
ROTOR ? Y/N
EMERG
INPUT 54321 DATA TYPE ANALOG RESTART ? Y/N
ST = 00000 IA RMS
FORBIDDEN
START ? Y/N
OUTPUT 54321 RTD Type = t RTD 1, 2, 3

ST = 00000 PT100 ALARM ? Y/N
t RTD 1, 2, 3
TRIP ? Y/N
DATE Thermist 1 Type =
14/09/00 PTC t RTD 4, 5, 6
ALARM ? Y/N
t RTD 4, 5, 6
TIME Thermist 2 Type = TRIP ? Y/N
16 : 35 : 30 NTC
MiCOM P220 - Menu content

Page 41/48
P220/EN HI/B43
DEFAULT DISPLAY
MEASUREMENTS PROCESS TRIP STATISTICS COMMUNICATION

Page 42/48
IA RMS = % I FLC
P220/EN HI/B43
STATISTICS COM. OK =
0.00 A 0% YES
CLR ? = CL
RTD 1 TRIP
IB RMS = THERMAL STATE = TOTAL TRIP NB NB = 0
0.00 A CLR ? = CL 0 % DATA RATE =
0 RTD 2 TRIP
19200 Bd
NB = 0
IC RMS = T before TH TRIP = ..........
OPERATOR TRIP NB
0.00 A 0s 0 RTD 6 TRIP PARITY =
NB = 0 WITHOUT
IN RMS = Temperature THERM TRIP
0.00 A RTD 1 = °C NB = 0
Thermist 1 TRIP
RTD 2 = °C DATA BITS =
NB = 0
I1 POSITIVE = ...... 7
t I >> TRIP
0.00 A RTD 6 = °C NB = 0 Thermist 2 TRIP
NB = 0
I2 NEGATIVE = t I0>, t I0 >> TRIP STOP BITS =
0.00 A PERMIT START NB
NB = 0 1
0 EQUATION A TRIP
NB = 0
Io ZERO = t Ii>, t Ii >> TRIP
0.00 A T before START RELAY ADDRESS =
0s NB = 0
EQUATION B TRIP 1
NB = 0
FREQUENCY = t Istart TRIP
Last Start I =
0.0 Hz NB = 0
0.0 A EQUATION C TRIP
NB = 0
MAX PH CURRENT = t Istall TRIP
Last Start Time
PROCESS 0.00 A NB = 0
0s EQUATION D TRIP
NB = 0
LOCKED ROTOR TP
MOTOR START NB NB = 0
CLR ? = CL 0
I < TRIP
EMERG RESTART NB NB = 0
CLR ? = CL
MOT OPERAT HOURS

CLR ? = CL 0h

Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Menu of the HMI
DEFAULT DISPLAY
PROTECTION
G1/G2
MiCOM P220
[49] THERMAL [50/51] SHORT- [50N/51N] EARTH

Technical Guide
[48] EXCES LONG [51LR/50S] BLOCK

Menu of the HMI
[46] UNBALANCE [37] LOSS OF LOAD

OVERLOAD CIRCUIT FAULT START ROTOR
THERMAL OVERLOAD I>> FUNCTION ? I0> FUNCTION ? Ii> FUNCTION ? EXCES LONG START BLOCKED ROTOR I< FUNCTION ?
FUNCTION ? YES YES YES YES FUNCT ? YES FUNCT ? YES YES
θ INHIBIT ? I>> = I0> = li> = Istart DETECTION t Istall = I< =

YES 1.0 In 0.002 Ion 0.05 In = 1.0 Iθ 0.1 s 0.1 In
Iθ > = t I>> = t I0 > = t li> = t Istart = STALLED ROTOR ? t I< =

0.2 In 10 ms 0 ms 0 ms 14 s YES 0.2 s
Ke = I0>> FUNCTION ? li>> FUNCTION ? Istall DETECTION T inhib =

3 YES YES = 1.0 Iθ 50 ms
Te1 = I0>> = li>> = LOCKED ROTOR AT

1 mn 0.002 Ion 0.2 In START ? YES
Te2 = t I0 >> =
1 mn 10 ms
Tr =
1 mn
RTD INFLUENCE ?
YES
θ ALARM ?
YES
θ ALARM =
20 %
θ FORBID START ?
YES
θ FORBID START = MiCOM 220 - Menu content

20 %
Page 43/48
P220/EN HI/B43
DEFAULT DISPLAY
PROTECTION
AUTOMAT. CTRL
G1/G2
Page 44/48
[49/38] RTD MIN TIME BETW 2 REACCEL AUTORIZ INPUTS

[49] THERMISTOR [66] START NUMBER
P220/EN HI/B43
SENSORS START
RTD 1 FUNCTION ? Thermistor 1 ? START NB LIMITAT TIME BETW START REACCEL AUTHORIZ INPUT 3 =
YES YES FUNCT ? YES FUNCT ? YES FUNCT ? YES NONE
RTD 1 ALARM = Thermist 1 = Treference = T betw 2 start = VOLT DIP DURAT INPUT 4 =
0°C 0.1 kΩ 10 mn 1 mn Treacc = 0.2 s NONE
t RTD 1 ALARM = Thermistor 2 ? HOT START NB = INPUT 5 =

0.0 s YES 0 NONE
RTD 1 TRIP = Thermist 2 = COLD START NB = EXT 1 =

0°C 0.1 kΩ 0 0s
T interdiction = EXT 2 =
t RTD 1 TRIP =
1 mn 0s
0.0 s
t RTD 2 TRIP =
0.0 s EXT 3 =
........ 0s
t RTD 6 TRIP= EXT 4 =

0.0 s 0s
MiCOM 220 - Menu content

Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Menu of the HMI
DEFAULT DISPLAY
AUTOMAT. CTRL
AND LOGIC AND LOGIC EQUAT

MiCOM P220
AUX OUTPUT RLY

EQUATION T DELAY
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
THERM OV. D C B A EQU. A T operat = THERM OV. 5 4 3 2

0000 t li>> DCBA Thermist 1 DCBA 0 mn 0000 t Istall 5432
0000 0000 0000
θ ALARM DCBA EQU. A T reset = θ ALARM 5432
0000 Thermist 2 DCBA 0 mn 0000 LOCKED 5432
EXCES LG DCBA
0000 ROTOR 0000
START 0000
θ FORBID DCBA EQU. B T operat = θ FORBID. 5432
START 0000 0 mn START 0000 tI< 5432
t Istall DCBA EXT 1 DCBA
0000
0000 0000
I >> 5432
I >> DCBA EQU. B T reset =
0000 START NB 5432
0000 LOCKED DCBA EXT 2 DCBA 0 mn
LIMIT 0000
ROTOR 0000 0000
t I >> 5432
t I >> DCBA EQU. C T operat =
0000 T betw 2 5432
0000 tI< DCBA EXT 3 DCBA 0 mn
start 0000
0000 0000
I0 > 5432
I0 > DCBA EQU. C T reset =
0000 t RTD 1 5432
0000 START NB DCBA EXT 4 DCBA 0 mn
ALARM 0000
LIMIT 0000 0000
t I0 > 5432
t0> DCBA EQU. D T operat =
0000
0000 T betw 2 DCBA SUCCESS DCBA 0 mn t RTD 1 5 4 32
Start 0000 START 0000 TRIP 0 0 00
I0 >> 5432 t RTD 2 5 4 32
I0 >> DCBA EQU. D T reset = 0000
0 mn TRIP 0 0 00
0000 t RTD 1 DCBA .......
ALARM 0000 t I0 >> 5432 t RTD 6 5432
t I0 >> DCBA 0000 TRIP 0000
0000
t RTD 1 DCBA
TRIP 0000 t Ii> 5432
t Ii> DCBA 0000 Thermist 1 5432
0000 t RTD 2 DCBA
TRIP 0000 0000
...... t li>> 5432 Thermist 2 5432
0000 0000
t RTD 6 DCBA
EXCES LG 5432
TRIP 0000 EXT 1 5432
START 0000
0000
MiCOM P220 -Menu content

Page 45/48
P220/EN HI/B43
DEFAULT DISPLAY
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Page 46/48
AUX OUTPUT RLY LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS TRIP OUTPUT RLY LATCH TRIP ORDER
P220/EN HI/B43
EXT 2 5432 t EQU. D 5432 Output 2 THERM OVERLOAD ? t RTD 1 LATCH t I >> ?
0000 0000 NO YES YES
TRIP YES
t RTD 2
EXT 3 5432 SW OPER 5432 Output 3 t I >> ? TRIP YES LATCH t I0 >> ?
0000 TIME 0000 NO YES ....... YES
t RTD 6
EXT 4 5432 SW OPER 5432 Output 4 t I0 >? TRIP YES LATCH t Ii >> ?
0000 NB 0000 NO YES YES
Thermist 1 ?
CLOSE 5432 SAn 5432 Output 5 t I0 >> ? LATCH EQUA A ?
YES
ORDER 0000 0000 NO YES YES
Thermist 2 ?
TRIP 5432 Active Group 5 4 3 2 t Ii > ? LATCH EQUA B ?
YES
ORDER 0000 0000 YES YES
ORDER 1 5432 t Ii >> ? EXT 1 ? LATCH EQUA C ?

0000 YES YES YES
ORDER 2 5432 EXCES LONG ? EXT 2 ? LATCH EQUA D ?

0000 START YES YES YES
SUCCESS 5432 t Istall ? EQUATION A ?

START 0000 YES YES
LOCKED ROTOR ? EQUATION B ?

t EQU. A 5432
YES YES
0000
t EQU. B 5432 tI<? EQUATION C ?

0000 YES YES
t EQU. C 5432 EQUATION D ?

0000 YES

Technical Guide
MiCOM P220
Menu of the HMI
DEFAULT DISPLAY
AUTOMAT. CTRL RECORD

MiCOM P220
Technical Guide
Menu of the HMI
SW SUPERVISION FAULT RECORD DISTURB RECORD SW MONITORING
FAULT NUMBER PRE-TIME = SA

SW OPERATING
5 0.1 s CLR ? = CL
TIME ? YES
OCCUR FAULT HOUR POST-TIME = S A IA =

SW OPERATING 16:39:23:82 0.1 s E06
TIME = 150 ms
OCCUR FAULT DATE DISTUR REC TRIG = S A IB =
01/09/98 ON INST. E06
SW OPERATION NB ?
YES
ACTIVE SET GROUP S A IC =
1 E06
SW OPERATION NB
= 150 PHASE IN FAULT SW OPERATION NB =
Phase A CLR ? = CL 0
SAn? FAULT DETECTED SW OPERAT TIME =

YES BY I>> 100 ms
MAGNITUDE
SAn=
14 E6
1.917 kA
IA MAGNITUDE
n= 1.917 kA
1
IB MAGNITUDE
1.997 kA MiCOM P220
TRIP T =
200 ms IC MAGNITUDE
1.931 kA Menu content
CLOSE T =
IN MAGNITUDE
200 ms 0.03 A
Page 47/48
P220/EN HI/B43
Menu of the HMI
BLANK PAGE
Technical Guide P220/EN GC/B43
MiCOM P220
MODBUS COMMUNICATION
Communication
CONTENTS
1. MODBUS PROTOCOL 5
1.1 MODBUS communication characteristics 5
1.1.1 MODBUS network characteristics 5
1.1.2 Parameters of the MODBUS connection 6
1.1.3 Synchronisation of exchanges messages 6
1.1.4 Message validity check 6
1.1.5 Address of the MiCOM relays 7
1.2 MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays 7
1.3 Presentation of the MODBUS protocol 7
1.3.1 Frame size received by the MiCOM P220 relay 7
1.3.2 Format of frames sent by the MiCOM P220 relay 8
1.3.3 Messages validity check 8
1.4 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the disturbance records 9
1.4.1 Request to know the number of available disturbance records in the Saved RAM. 9
1.4.2 Service request 9
1.4.3 Request to retrieve the data of a disturbance record channel 10
1.4.4 Request to retrieve an index frame 10
1.5 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the event records 10
1.5.1 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event 10
1.5.2 Request to retrieve a dedicated event 11
1.6 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records 11
1.6.1 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record 11
1.6.2 Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record 11
1.7 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the start-up current form record 12
1.7.1 Request to know the number of current values stored into the saved memory 12
1.7.2 Request to retrieve the start-up current form record data 12
1.8 MiCOM P220 database organisation 13
1.8.1 Description of the MODBUS application mapping 13
1.8.2 Page 0 : Information of product, remote signalling, remote measurements 14
1.8.3 Page 1 : Remote settings for general parameters 17
1.8.4 Page 2 : Remote settings for protection functions group No1 23
1.8.5 Page 3 : Remote settings for protection functions group No2 26
1.8.6 Page 4 : Remote controls 29
1.8.7 Pages 5 and 6 : reserved 29
P220/EN GC/B43 Technical Guide
Communication
1.8.8 Page 7 : MiCOM P220 relay status word 29

1.8.9 Page 8 : Synchronisation 29
1.8.10 Page 9 to 21h : Disturbance record data (25 pages) 30
1.8.11 Page 22h : Index frame for the disturbance records 31
1.8.12 Page 23 to 33h : Start-up current form record data 31
1.8.13 Page 34h : Index frame for the start-up current form record 31
1.8.14 Page 35h : Event record data 32
1.8.15 Page 36h : Data of the oldest event 33
1.8.16 Page 37h : Fault value record data 33
1.8.17 Pages 38h à 3Ch : Selection of the disturbance record and selection of its channel 33
1.8.18 Page 3Dh : Number of available disturbance records 34
1.8.19 Page 3Eh : Data of the oldest non-acknowledged fault record 34
1.9 Description of the mapping format 34
2. K-BUS PROTOCOL AND COURIER LANGUAGE 49

2.1 K-BUS 49
2.1.1 K-Bus transmission layer 49
2.1.2 K-Bus connection 49
2.1.3 Auxiliary equipment 50
2.2 Relay courier database 50
2.3 Setting changes 50
2.4 Systems integration data 50
2.4.1 Address of the relay 50
2.4.2 Measured values 51
2.4.3 Status word 51
2.4.4 Control status word 51
2.4.5 Logic input status word 51
2.4.6 Output relay status word 51
2.4.7 Control information 52
2.4.8 Protection Indication 52
2.4.9 Measurement control 54
2.4.10 Change of remote measurements 54
2.5 Event extraction 54
2.5.1 Automatic event extraction 54
2.5.2 Event types 55
2.5.3 Event format 55
2.5.4 Manual record extraction 55
2.6 Disturbance record extraction 56
Communication
3. LIST OF EVENTS CREATED BY THE RELAY 57
4. LIST OF FAULTS CREATED BY THE RELAY 60
5. COURIER DATABASES 61
6. IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE 89
6.1 Physical connection and link layer 89
6.2 Initialisation 89
6.3 Time synchronisation 90
6.4 Spontaneous events 90
6.5 General interrogation 90
6.6 Cyclic measurements 90
6.7 Commands 90
6.8 Disturbance records 90
6.9 Blocking of monitor direction 90
7. IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASES 91

Communication
BLANK PAGE
Communication
1. MODBUS PROTOCOL
The MiCOM P220 relay offers MODBUSTM RTU mode communication via a rear
RS485 port.
1.1 MODBUS communication characteristics
1.1.1 MODBUS network characteristics
The MODBUS protocol is based on the master-slave principle with the MiCOM P220
relay as slave.
The MODBUS protocol allows the master to read and to write one or several bits, one
or several words and to remote the event logging data.
The access to the network can be :
• either according to a query/response principle
Master
Response
Query
Equipment Equipment Equipment
Slave Slave Slave
P0211ENa
• or according to a broadcast message sent from the master to all the slaves.
Broadcast Master
message
Equipment Equipment Equipment

Slave Slave Slave
P0212ENa
in that case :
− compulsory, the broadcast message is a writing order,
− the slaves return no response,
− the protocol is RTU mode. Each byte of the data frame is coded according to a
hexadecimal base.
− At the end of each frame, two bytes of CRC16 validity checksum are applied on
the whole of the frame content.
Communication
1.1.2 Parameters of the MODBUS connection

The different parameters of the MODBUS connection are as follows :
− Isolated two-point RS485 connection (2kV 50Hz).
− MODBUS line protocol in RTU mode.
− The baud rate can be configured by operator dialogue in the front panel of the
relay :
Baud rate
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
− Transmission mode of the configurable parameters by operator dialogue :
Transmission mode
1 start / 8 bits / 1 stop : total 10 bits
1 start / 8 bits / even parity / 1 stop : total 11 bits
1 start / 8 bits / odd parity / 1 stop : total 11 bits
1 start / 7 bits / even parity / 1 stop : total 10 bits
1 start / 7 bits / odd parity / 1 stop : total 10 bits
1.1.3 Synchronisation of exchanges messages
Any character received after a silence on the line with more or equal to a
transmission time of 3 bytes is considered as a frame start.
1.1.4 Message validity check
The validation of a trame is performed with a 16-bit cyclical redundancy check (CRC).
The generator polynomial is :
1 + x² + x15 + x16 = 1010 0000 0000 0001 binary = A001h
Communication
1.1.5 Address of the MiCOM relays

The address of the MiCOM relay on a same MODBUS network is situated between 1
and 255. The address 0 is reserved for the broadcast messages.
1.2 MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays
The MODBUS functions implemented on the MiCOM relays are :
Function 1 or 2 : Reading of n bits
Function 3 or 4 : Reading of n words
Function 5 : Writing of 1 bit
Function 6 : Writing of 1 word
Function 7 : Fast reading of 8 bits
Function 8 : Reading of the diagnosis counters
Function 11 : Reading of the Event counter
Function 15: Writing of n bits
Function 16 : Writing of n words
1.3 Presentation of the MODBUS protocol
MODBUS is a master-slave protocol whereby every exchange involves a master query
and a slave response.
1.3.1 Frame size received by the MiCOM P220 relay
Frame transmitted by the master (query) :
Slave number Function code Information CRC16

1 byte 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes
0 to FFh 1 to 10h
Slave number :
The slave number is situated between 1 and 255.
Function code :
Requested MODBUS function (1 to 16).
Information :
Contains the parameters of the selected function.
CRC16 :
Value of the CRC16 calculated by the master.
NOTA: the MiCOM relay does not respond to globally broadcast frames
sent out by the master.
Communication
1.3.2 Format of frames sent by the MiCOM P220 relay

Frame sent by the MiCOM relay (response) :
Slave number Function code Data CRC16

1 byte 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes
1 to FFh 1 to 10h
Slave number :
Function code :
Processed MODBUS function (1 to 16).
Data :
Contains the response data to master query.
CRC16 :
Value of the CRC16 calculated by the MiCOM relay.
1.3.3 Messages validity check
When the MiCOM relay receives a master query, it validates the frame :
• If the CRC is false, the frame is invalid. The MiCOM relay does not reply to the
query. The master must retransmit its query. Excepting a broadcast message, this
is the only case of non-reply by the MiCOM relay to a master query.
• If the CRC is correct but the MiCOM relay can not process the query, it sents to
the master a exception response.
Exception frame sent by the MiCOM relay (response) :
Slave number Function code Error code CRC16

1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes
1 to 20h 81h or 83h or 8Ah or 8Bh LSB ... MSB
Slave number :
Function code :
The function code returned by the MiCOM relay in the exception frame is the code in
which the most significant bit (bit7) is forced to 1.
Communication
Error code :
Among the 8 exception codes of the MODBUS protocol, the MiCOM relay manages
two of them :
• code 01 : Function code unauthorised or unknown.
• code 03 : A value of the data field is unauthorised (incorrect code).
− Control of pages being read.
− Control of pages being written.
− Control of address in pages.
− Length of request messages.
CRC16:
The CRC16 value is calculated by the slave.
1.4 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the disturbance records
To retrieve a disturbance record, the following requests must be done in the exact
given order :
1. (optional) : Send a request to know the number of disturbance records
available in the saved RAM.
2. To retrieve the data of one channel:
2a – (compulsory) : Send a service request specifying the record number and
the channel number which have to be retrieved.
2b – (compulsory) : Send requests to retrieve the data of a disturbance record
channel as many time as needed.
2c – (compulsory) : send a request to retrieve the index frame.
3. Process the same operation (as described in the item 2) for each channel.
1.4.1 Request to know the number of available disturbance records in the Saved RAM.
Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h 3Dh 00 00 24h xx............xx
This request may be answered an error message with the error code :
EVT_NOK (0F) : No record available.
NOTA: If there is less than 5 records available, the answer will contain
zero value in the non-used words.
1.4.2 Service request
This request shall be send before to retrieve the sample data of a disturbance record
channel. It allows to specify the record number and the channel number which have
to be retrieved. It allows also to know the number of samples in the channel.

xx 03h Refer to 00 0Bh xx............xx
mapping
Communication
This request may be answered an error message. Two error codes are possible :
CODE_DEF_RAM (02) : Saved RAM failure.
CODE_EVT_NOK (03) : No disturbance record available in the saved
RAM.
1.4.3 Request to retrieve the data of a disturbance record channel

xx 03h Refer to 1 to 7Dh xx............xx
mapping
This request may be answered an error message. Two error codes are possible :
CODE_DEP_DATA (04) : The requested sample number is superior
than the number of samples in the specified
channel.
CODE_SERV_NOK (05) : The record number and the channel number
have not been specified by a service request.
NOTA: This type of request can retrieve up to125 words. A sample is
coded on 1 word (16 bits).
1.4.4 Request to retrieve an index frame

xx 03h 22h 00 00 07h xx............xx
This event request may be answered an error message with the error code :
CODE_SERV_NOK (05) : The record number and the channel number
have not been specified by a service request.
1.5 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the event records
Two ways can be followed to retrieve an event record :
− Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event.
− Send a request to retrieve a dedicated event.
1.5.1 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event

xx 03h 36h 00 00 09h xx............xx
EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5) : An event is being written into the saved RAM.
NOTA: On event retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the event
record acknowledgement :
- a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval.
- b) Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event
retrieval.
a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval :
The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h) shall be
set to 0. On event retrieval, this event record is acknowledged.
Communication
b) Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval :

set to 1. On event retrieval, this event record is not acknowledged.
To acknowledge this event, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit
13 of this frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1.
1.5.2 Request to retrieve a dedicated event

xx 03h Refer to 00 09h xx............xx
mapping
EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5) : An event is being written into the saved RAM.
NOTA: This event retrieval does not acknowledge this event.
1.6 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records
Two ways can be followed to retrieve a fault record :
− Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record.
− Send a request to retrieve a dedicated fault record.
1.6.1 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record

xx 03h 3Eh 00 00 0Fh xx............xx
NOTA: On fault retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the fault

record acknowledgement:
- a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on event retrieval.
- b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on event
retrieval.
a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval :
set to 0. On fault retrieval, this fault record is acknowledged.
b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval :
set to 1. On fault retrieval, this fault record is not acknowledged.
To acknowledge this fault, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit 14
of this frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1.
1.6.2 Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record

xx 03h Refer to 00 0Fh xx............xx
mapping
NOTA: This fault value retrieval does not acknowledge this fault record.
Communication
1.7 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the start-up current form record
To retrieve the start-up current form record, process as described below :
1. Send a request to know the number of current values stored into the saved
RAM.
2. Send a request to retrieve the start-up current from record data.
1.7.1 Request to know the number of current values stored into the saved memory

xx 03h 34H 00 00 03h xx............xx
1.7.2 Request to retrieve the start-up current form record data

Refer to
xx 03h 04 to 7Ch xx............xx
mapping
NOTA: The number of requested words shall be a 2 multiple number as

the value of a start-up current from record sample is coded on 4
bytes. One page of the mapping can stored up to 248 words.
Communication
1.8 MiCOM P220 database organisation

1.8.1 Description of the MODBUS application mapping
The MODBUS mapping contains 60 pages.
Pages 0 to 8 : Contain the MiCOM P220 parameters.
Pages 9 to 3Dh : Contain the data of the event records, data of the fault value
records, data of the disturbance records and data of the start-up current form record.
These pages are explained in the following way :
Page No Page content Access
Page 0 Information of product, remote signalling, remote Reading

measurements
Page 1 Remote settings for general parameters Reading & writing
Page 2 Remote settings for protection group number 1 Reading & writing
Page 3 Remote settings for protection group number 2 Reading & writing
Page 4 Remote controls Writing
Page 5 Reserved page Not accessible
Page 6 Reserved page Not accessible
Page 7 MiCOM P220 relay status word Quick reading
Page 8 Synchronisation Writing
Pages 9h to Disturbance record data Reading
21h
Page 22h Index frame for the disturbance records Reading
Pages 23h to Start-up current form record data Reading
33h
Page 34h Index frame for the start-up current form record Reading
Page 35h Event record data Reading
Page 36h Data of the oldest event Reading
Page 37h Fault value record data Reading
Pages 38h to Selection of the disturbance record and selection of its Reading
3Ch channel
Page 3Dh Number of available disturbance records Reading
Page 3Eh Data of the oldest fault value record Reading
Communication
1.8.2 Page 0 : Information of product, remote signalling, remote measurements

Access only for reading
Values Default
Address Group Description Step Unit Format
range value
0000 Product Description of the relay 32 -127 1 - F10

informations characters 1 and 2
0001 Description of the relay 32-127 1 - F10 P2
characters 3 and 4
0002 Description of the relay 32-127 1 - F10 20
characters 5 and 6
0003 Factory reference 32-127 1 - F10 AL
characters 1 and 2
0004 Factory reference 32-127 1 - F10 ST
characters 3 and 4
0005 Software version 10 - xx 1 - F21
0006 to 000C Reserved
000D Active group 1 to 2 1 F1
000E Reserved
000F Status of the MiCOM F46
relay self-test
0010 Remote- Logic inputs 0 to 31 1 - F12
signaling
0011 Logic datas 0 to FFFF 1 - F20
0012 Internal logics 0 to FFFF 1 - F22
0013 Output relays 0 to 63 1 - F13
0014 Output information: 0 to FFFF 1 - F17
threshold I>>
threshold I0>
threshold I0>>
I2 >
I2 >>
0019 Output information : I< 0 to FFFF 1 - F17
001A Thermal image 0 to FFFF 1 - F33
Information :
001B Informations : EXT1, EXT2 0 to FFFF 1 - F36
timers and « AND »
logical gates
001C Informations : Excessive 0 to FFFF 1 - F34
long start/stalled rotor
001D Informations : RTDs 0 to FFFF 1 - F4
001E Number of available 0 to 5 1 F55
disturbance records
001F and Reserved
0020
0021 Circuit breaker F43
monitoring flag
Communication
Values Default
range value
0022 Display alarm message : F17

tI>> PHASE
0023 Display alarm message: F17
tI< PHASE (Mini I)
0024 Display alarm messages F41
0025 Display alarm messages F41’
0026 Display alarm messages F41 ‘’
0027 to 002F Reserved
0030 Remote- Phase A current IA RMS 1 A/100 F3
measurement
0032 Phase B current IB RMS 1 A/100 F3
0034 Phase Current IC RMS 1 A/100 F3
0036 Neutral current IN RMS 1 A/100 F3
0038 Negative sequence I2 1 A/100 F3
current (fundamental)
003A Positive sequence I1 1 A/100 F3
current (fundamental)
003C Zero sequence current 1 A/100 F3
(fundamental)
I0 (1/3 IN)
003E Frequency 4500 to 1 1/100 Hz F1
6500
003F and Phase current maximeter F1
0040
0050 Process Load current as % Iθ> % F1
0051 Thermal status value % F1
0052 Reserved
0053 Time before thermal trip Seconds F1
0054 RTD1 temperature value -400 to 1/10 °C F2
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
005A Thermistor 1 value 0 to 30000 1 Ohm F1
005B Thermistor 2 value 0 to 30000 1 Ohm F1
005C Number of authorised - F1
start-ups
005D Time before an seconds F1
authorised start-up
005E Last start current value A/100 F1
Communication
Values Default
range value
005F Reserved
0060 Last start time value seconds F1
0061 Total motor start number - F1
0062 Total emergency start - F1
number
0063 Total motor running hours F1
hours
0064 RTDs status F45
0070 Trip Cause Reserved
Statistics
0071 Total trip number (based - F1
on output relay No1)
0072 Operator trip number - F1
(logic inputs, pushbuttons
or remote
communication)
0073 Thermal trip number - F1
0074 Earth fault trip number - F1
0075 Short-circuit trip number - F1
0076 Excessive long start trip - F1

number
0077 Stalled rotor trip number - F1
(whilst running)
0078 Locked rotor trip number - F1
(at start)
0079 Loss of load trip number - F1
007A Unbalance trip number - F1
007B EQUATION A trip F1
number
007C EQUATION B trip F1
number
007D EQUATION C trip F1
number
007E EQUATION D trip F1
number
007F RTD1 trip number - F1
0080 RTD2 trip number - F1
0085 Thermistor 1 trip number - F1
0086 Thermistor 2 trip number - F1
0087 to 008F Reserved -
Communication
Values Default
range value
0090 Fourier IA magnitude - F1

Magnitude
0091 IB magnitude - F1
0092 IC magnitude - F1
0093 3.I0 magnitude - F1
0094 Fourier Angle IA angle - F1
0095 IB angle - F1
0096 IC angle - F1
0097 3.I0 angle - F1
0098 Fourier I1 magnitude F1
Magnitude
0099 I2 magnitude F1
009A to 009F Reserved
1.8.3 Page 1 : Remote settings for general parameters

Access for reading and writing
Values Default
range value
0100 Remote-settings Address 1 to 255 1 - F1 1

0101 Reserved
0102 Password : 0x41–0x5a 1 - F10 AA
characters 1 and 2
0103 Password : 0x41–0x5a 1 - F10 AA
characters 3 and 4
0104 Frequency 50-60 10 Hz F1 50
0105 Default displayed value 1-6 1 - F26 1
0106 Motor start-up detection 0-1 1 F5 0
criterion
0107 Analogue output type 0 to 1 1 - F18 0
0108 Data transmitted on the 0 to 15 1 F7 0
analogue output
0109 Active setting group 1-2 1 F1 1
010A User reference : 0x30–0x5a 1 - F10 MO
characters 1 and 2
010B User reference : 0x30–0x5a 1 - F10 T1
characters 3 and 4
10C Displayed fault record 1–5 1 F39 5
number
010D Thermistor 1 type 0-1 1 - F32 0
010E Thermistor 2 type 0-1 1 - F32 0
010F RTDs type 0-3 1 - F42 0
0110 to 0113 Reserved
0114 EDGE validation 0-31 1 - F12 0
configuration for logic
input
Communication
Values Default
range value
0115 Latching Output Relays 0-31 1 - F12 0

0118 Configuration of Change 0-1 1 - F47 1
of active group
0120 CT Ratio Phases CT primary 1 to 3000 1 - F1 1
0121 Phase CT secondary 1 to 5 4 - F1 1
0122 Earth CT primary 1 to 3000 1 - F1 1
0123 Earth CT secondary 1 to 5 4 - F1 1
0130 Rear RS485 Data rate 0 to 7 1 - F28 6=
Communication 19200
bauds
0131 Parity 0 to 2 1 - F29 0=
without
0132 Data bits 0 to 1 1 - F30 1=8
bits
0133 Stop bit 0 to 1 1 - F31 0 =1 bit
0134 Communication available 0 to 1 1 - F24 1=
Commu-
nication
available
0135 to 013C Reserved
013D CB supervision CB operation number 1 - F1
013E CB operating time 1 sec/100 F1
013F S An IA (phase A) 1 An F3
0141 S An IB (phase B) 1 An F3
n n
0143 S A IC (phase C) 1 A F3
0145 Date Format 0 to 1 1 - F48 0=Private
0150 LED allocation Led 5 2n - F19 0
n
0152 Led 6 2 - F19 0
n
0154 Led 7 2 - F19 0
0156 Led 8 2n F19 0
0160 Logic inputs Logic input L3 0 to 2n - F15 0
allocation
0161 Logic input L4 0 to 2n - F15 0
n
0162 Logic input L5 0 to 2 - F15 0
0163 to 16E Reserved
016F Active Group: If Group 2 0-15 1 - F14 0
then Output =1
0170 Auxiliary output Thermal overload : 0 to 15 1 F14 0
relays allocation THERM OV.
0171 Thermal alarm : 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
θ ALARM
Communication
Values Default
range value
0172 Thermal start inhibition 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

θ FORBID. START
0173 I0> (instantaneous) 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
0174 tI0> (time delayed) 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
0175 I0>> (instantaneous) 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
0176 tI0>> (time delayed) 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
0177 I>> (instantaneous) 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
0178 tI>> (time delayed) 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
0179 tI2> (time delayed) 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
017A tI2>> (time delayed) 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
017B Excessive long start : 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

EXCES LG START
017C Stalled rotor (whilst 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
running):
t Istall
017D Locked rotor (at start): 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
LOCKED ROTOR
017E Loss of load : 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
t I<
017F Start number limitation 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
START NB LIMIT
0180 Time between 2 start: T 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
betw 2 start
0181 t RTD1 ALARM 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
0182 t RTD1 TRIP 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
0183 t RTD2 ALARM 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
0184 t RTD2 TRIP 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
0185 t RTD3 ALARM 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
0186 t RTD3 TRIP 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
0187 t RTD4 ALARM 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
0188 t RTD4 TRIP 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
0189 t RTD5 ALARM 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
018A t RTD5 TRIP 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
018B t RTD6 ALARM 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
018C t RTD6 TRIP 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
018D Thermist 1 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
018E Thermist 2 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
018F EXT 1 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
0190 EXT 2 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
0191 CLOSE ORDER 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
0192 TRIP ORDER 0 to 15 1 F14 0
0193 ORDER 1 0 to 15 1 F14 0
0194 ORDER 2 0 to 15 1 F14 0
0195 SUCCESS START 0 to 15 1 F14 0
Communication
Values Default
range value
0196 « AND » logical gate A: 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

t EQU. A
0197 « AND » logical gate B: 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
t EQU. B
0198 « AND » logical gate C 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
t EQU. C
0199 « AND » logical gate D 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
t EQU. D
019A CB opening time : 0 to 15 1 F14 0
SW OPER TIME
019B CB operation number : 0 to 15 1 F14 0
SW OPER NB
019C Σ Ampsn cut by CB : 0 to 15 1 F14 0

S An
019D EXT 3 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
019E EXT 4 0 to 15 1 - F14 0
019F Reserved
01A0 « AND » logical Thermal overload : 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
gates allocation THERM OV.
01A1 Thermal alarm : 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
θ ALARM
01A2 Thermal start inhibition 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
θ FORBID. START
01A3 I0> (instantaneous) 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01A4 tI0> (time delayed) 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01A5 I0>> ( instantaneous) 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01A6 tI0>> (time delayed) 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01A7 I>> (instantaneous) 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01A8 tI>> (time delayed) 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01A9 tI2> (time delayed) 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01AA tI2>> (time delayed) 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01AB Excessive long start : 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
EXCES LG START
01AC Stalled rotor (running): 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
t Istall
01AD Locked rotor (at start): 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
LOCKED ROTOR
01AE Loss of load : t I< 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01AF Start number limitation 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
START NB LIMIT
01B0 Time between 2 starts : 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
T betw 2 start
01B1 t RTD1 ALARM 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01B2 t RTD1 TRIP 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01B3 t RTD2 ALARM 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01B4 t RTD2 TRIP 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
Communication
Values Default
range value
01B5 t RTD3 ALARM 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0

01B6 t RTD3 TRIP 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01B7 t RTD4 ALARM 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01B8 t RTD4 TRIP 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01B9 t RTD5 ALARM 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01BA t RTD5 TRIP 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01BB t RTD6 ALARM 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01BC t RTD6 TRIP 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01BD Thermist 1 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01BE Thermist 2 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01BF EXT 1 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01C0 EXT 2 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01C1 SUCESS START 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01C2 EXT 3 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01C3 EXT 4 0 to 15 1 F14’ 0
01C4 to 01CF Reserved -
n
01D0 Automation Trip output relay 0 to 32767 2 F6 0
Control functions assignment (relay 1)
01D1 Trip output relay 0 to 127 2n F6’ 0
assignment (relay 1)
01D2 Latching of the trip output 0 to 127 2n - F8 0
relay (relay 1)
01D3 Function : 0–1 1 - F24 0
Start number limitation
01D4 Reference time : 10 –120 5 minute F1 10
Treference
01D5 Hot start number 0 –5 1 - F1 0
01D6 Cold start number 0-5 1 - F1 0
01D7 Start interdiction time : 1-120 1 minute F1 1
Tinterdiction
01D8 Function : 0 to 1 1 - F24 0
Time between 2 starts
01D9 T betw 2 start 1 to 120 1 minute F1 1
01DA Function : 0-1 1 - F24 0
Reacceleration
authorization
01DB Voltage dip duration : 2-100 1 1/10 sec F1 2
Treacc
01DC Function : 0-1 1 - F24 0
CB Opening time
01DD SW OPERATING TIME 5 to 100 1 1/100 sec F1 5
threshold
01DE Function : 0-1 1 - F24 0
CB Operation number
01DF SW OPERATION NB 0-50000 1 - F1 0
threshold
Communication
Values Default
range value
01E0 Σ Ampsn cut by CB : 0-1 1 - F24 0

S An
01E1 SAn threshold 0 to 4000 10e6 A^n F3 0
01E2 « n » exponent value 1 to 2 1 1 F1 1
01E3 TRIP T duration value 20 to 500 5 1/100 sec F1 20
(remote order)
01E4 CLOSE T duration value 20 to 500 5 1/100 sec F1 20
(remote order)
01E5 Logic inputs EXT1 time delay 0 to 20000 1 1/100 sec F1 0
01E6 EXT2 time delay 0 to 20000 1 1/100 sec F1 0
01E7 Disturbance Pre-time 1 to 30 1 1/10 sec F1 1
record
01E8 Post-time 1 to 30 1 1/10 sec F1 1
01E9 Disturbance record 0–1 1 F40 0
trigging criterion :
DISTUR REC TRIG
01EA EXT3 time delay 0 to 20000 1 1/100 sec F1 0
01EB EXT4 time delay 0 to 20000 1 1/100 sec F1 0
01EC to 01EF Reserved -
01F0 « AND » logical gate A 0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec F1 0
operation time delay :
EQU. A Toperat
01F1 « AND » logical gate A 0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec 0
reset time delay :
EQU. A Treset
01F2 « AND » logical gate B 0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec F1 0
EQU. B Toperat
01F3 « AND » logical gate B 0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec F1 0
reset time delay :
EQU. B Treset
01F4 « AND » logical gate C 0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec F1 0
EQU. C Toperat
01F5 « AND » logical gate C 0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec F1 0
reset time delay :
EQU. C Treset
01F6 « AND » logical gate D 0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec F1 0
EQU. D Toperat
01F7 « AND » logical gate D 0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec F1 0
reset time delay :
EQU. D Treset
01F8 to 01FF Reserved
Communication
1.8.4 Page 2 : Remote settings for protection functions group No1

Values Default
range value
0200 Protection group Thermal overload 0-1 1 - F24 0

1 function
0201 Thermal inhibition at 0-1 1 - F24 0
start : θ INHIBIT
0202 Thermal current 20 to 150 1/100 - F1 20
threshold : Iθ> In
0203 Ke factor 0 to 10 1 - F1 3
0204 Thermal constant time 1 to 180 1 Minute F1 1
Te1
Te2
0206 Cooling constant time Tr 1 to 999 1 Minute F1 1
0207 RTD1 influence : 0-1 1 - F24 0
RTD1 INFLUENCE
0208 Thermal alarm function 0-1 1 - F24 0
0209 θ ALARM threshold 20 to 100 1 % F1 20
020A Thermal start inhibition 0-1 1 - F24 0
function
020B θ FORBID START 20 to 100 1 % F1 20
020C to 020F Reserved -
0210 I>> function 0-1 1 - F24 0
0211 I>> threshold 10 to 120 1 In/10 F1 10
0212 tI>> time delay 0 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 0
0220 I0> function 0-1 1 - F24 0
0221 I0> threshold 2 to 1000 1 1/1000 I0n F1 2
0222 tI0> time delay 0 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 0
0223 I0>> function 0-1 1 - F24 0
0224 I0>> threshold 2 to 1000 1 1/1000 I0n F1 2
0225 tI0>> time delay 0 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 0
0230 I2> function 0-1 1 - F24 0
0231 I2> threshold 50 to 800 25 1/1000 In F1 50
0233 I2>> function 0-1 1 - F24 0
0234 I2>> threshold 200 to 800 50 1/1000 In F1 200
0235 to 023F Reserved - 0
0240 Excessive long start 0-1 1 - F24 0
function
0241 Istart detection threshold 10 to 50 5 1/10 Iθ F1 10
0242 t Istart time delay 1 to 200 1 Second F1 1
0243 Reserved - -
Communication
Values Default
range value
0244 Blocked rotor function 0 –1 1 - F24 0

0245 t Istall time delay 1 – 600 1 1/10 sec F1 1
0246 Stalled rotor function 0 –1 1 - F24 0
0247 Istall detection threshold 10 to 50 5 1/10 Iθ F1 10
0248 Locked rotor at start 0-1 1 - F24 0
function
0250 I< function 0-1 1 - F24 0
0251 I< threshold 10 to 100 1 1/100 In F1 10
0252 t I< time delay 2 to 1000 1 1/10 sec F24 2
0253 Tinhib inhibition time 5 to 30000 5 1/100 sec F1 5
0260 RTD1 function 0-1 1 - F24 0
0261 RTD1 ALARM threshold 0-200 1 °C F1 0
0262 t RTD1 ALARM time delay 0 to 1000 1 1/10 sec F1 0
0263 RTD1 TRIP threshold 0-200 1 °C F1 0
0264 t RTD1 TRIP time delay 0 to 1000 1 1/10 sec F1 0
0265 RTD2 function 0 –1 1 - F24 0
026A RTD3 function 0-1 1 - F24 0
026B RTD3 ALARM threshold 0-200 1 °C F1 0
026C t RTD3 ALARM time delay 0 to 1000 1 1/10 sec F1 0
026D RTD3 TRIP threshold 0-200 1 °C F1 0
026E t RTD3 TRIP time delay 0 to 1000 1 1/10 sec F1 0
026F RTD4 function 0-1 1 - F24 0
0274 RTD5 function 0-1 1 - F24 0
0279 RTD6 function 0-1 1 - F24 0
027A RTD6 ALARM threshold 0-200 1 °C F1 0
027B t RTD6 ALARM time delay 0 à 1000 1 1/10 sec F1 0
027C RTD6 TRIP threshold 0-200 1 °C F1 0
027D t RTD6 TRIP time delay 0 to 1000 1 1/10 sec F1 0
Communication
Values Default
range value
027E Thermistor 1 function 0-1 1 - F24 0

027F Thermistor 1 threshold 1-300 1 1/10 kΩ F1 1
0280 Thermistor 2 function 0-1 1 - F24 0
0281 Thermistor 2 threshold 1-300 1 1/10 kΩ F1 1
Communication
1.8.5 Page 3 : Remote settings for protection functions group No2

Values Default
range value
0300 Protection group Thermal overload 0-1 1 - F24 0

2 function
0301 Thermal inhibition at 0-1 1 - F24 0
start : θ INHIBIT
0302 Thermal current 20 to 150 1/10 - F1 20
threshold : Iθ> 0 In
0303 Ke factor 0 to 10 1 - F1 3
Te1
Te2
0306 Cooling constant time Tr 1 to 999 1 Minute F1 1
0307 RTD1 influence : 0-1 1 - F24 0
RTD1 INFLUENCE
0308 Thermal alarm function 0-1 1 - F24 0
0309 θ ALARM threshold 20 to 100 1 % F1 20
030A Thermal start inhibition 0-1 1 - F24 0
function
030B θ FORBID START 20 to 100 1 % F1 20
030C to 030F Reserved -
0310 I>> function 0-1 1 - F24 0
0311 I>> threshold 10 to 120 1 In/10 F1 10
0312 tI>> time delay 0 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 0
0320 I0> function 0-1 1 - F24 0
0321 I0> threshold 2 to 1000 1 1/1000 I0n F1 2
0323 I0>> function 0-1 1 - F24 0
0324 I0>> threshold 2 to 1000 1 1/1000 I0n F1 2
0325 tI0>> time delay 0 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 0
0330 I2> function 0-1 1 - F24 0
0331 I2> threshold 50 to 800 25 1/1000 In F1 50
0333 I2>> function 0-1 1 - F24 0
0334 I2>> threshold 200 to 800 50 1/1000 In F1 200
0335 to 033F Reserved - 0
0340 Excessive long start 0-1 1 - F24 0
function
0341 Istart detection threshold 10 to 50 5 1/10 Iθ F1 10
0342 t Istart time delay 1 to 200 1 Second F1 1
0343 Reserved - -
Communication
Values Default
range value
0344 Blocked rotor function 0 –1 1 - F24 0

0345 t Istall time delay 1 – 600 1 1/10 sec F1 1
0346 Stalled rotor function 0 –1 1 - F24 0
0347 Istall detection threshold 10 to 50 5 1/10 Iθ F1 10
0348 Locked rotor at start 0-1 1 - F24 0
function
0350 I< function 0-1 1 - F24 0
0351 I< threshold 10 to 100 1 1/100 In F1 10
0352 t I< time delay 2 to 1000 1 1/10 sec F24 2
0353 Tinhib inhibition time 5 to 30000 5 1/100 sec F1 5
0360 RTD1 function 0-1 1 - F24 0
0365 RTD2 function 0 –1 1 - F24 0
036A RTD3 function 0-1 1 - F24 0
036B RTD3 ALARM threshold 0-200 1 °C F1 0
036C t RTD3 ALARM time delay 0 to 1000 1 1/10 sec F1 0
036D RTD3 TRIP threshold 0-200 1 °C F1 0
036E t RTD3 TRIP time delay 0 to 1000 1 1/10 sec F1 0
036F RTD4 function 0-1 1 - F24 0
0374 RTD5 function 0-1 1 - F24 0
0379 RTD6 function 0-1 1 - F24 0
037A RTD6 ALARM threshold 0-200 1 °C F1 0
037B t RTD6 ALARM time delay 0 à 1000 1 1/10 sec F1 0
037C RTD6 TRIP threshold 0-200 1 °C F1 0
037D t RTD6 TRIP time delay 0 to 1000 1 1/10 sec F1 0
Communication
Values Default
range value
037E Thermistor 1 function 0-1 1 - F24 0

037F Thermistor 1 threshold 1-300 1 1/10 kΩ F1 1
0380 Thermistor 2 function 0-1 1 - F24 0
0381 Thermistor 2 threshold 1-300 1 1/10 kΩ F1 1
Communication
1.8.6 Page 4 : Remote controls

Access in writing
Values Default
range value
0400 Remote control Remote control word 1 0 to 31 1 - F9 0
1.8.7 Pages 5 and 6 : reserved

1.8.8 Page 7 : MiCOM P220 relay status word
Access for quick reading
Values Default
range value
0700 Quick reading Quick reading byte 1 - F23 0
byte
1.8.9 Page 8 : Synchronisation

Access in writing. The format of the clock synchronisation is coded on 8 bytes (4
words).
Clock @page byte number Value range Unit

Year LSB + MSB 8 2 Year
Months 8 1 1 - 12 Month
Days 8 1 1 - 31 Day
Hours 8 1 0 - 23 Hour
Minutes 8 1 0 - 59 Minute
ms LSB + MSB 8 2 0 - 59999 ms
Communication
1.8.10 Page 9 to 21h : Disturbance record data (25 pages)

Access in reading. Each page of the mapping contains 250 words.
Address Contents Format
0900 to 09FAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58

0A00 to 0AFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58
0B00 to 0BFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58
0C00 to 0CFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58
0D00 to 0DFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58
0E00 to 0EFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58
0F00 to 0FFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58
1A00 to 1AFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58
1B00 to 1BFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58
1C00 to 1CFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58
1D00 to 1DFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58
1E00 to 1EFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58
1F00 to 1FFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58
NOTA: The above disturbance record data pages of the mapping

contains the data for only one record channel.
Communication
1.8.11 Page 22h : Index frame for the disturbance records

Access in reading.
2200h Index frame for the disturbance records F50
1.8.12 Page 23 to 33h : Start-up current form record data

Access in reading.
2300 to 23F8h 124 values

2A00 to 2AF8h 124 values
2B00 to 2BF8h 124 values
2C00 to 2CF8h 124 values
2D00 to 2DF8h 124 values
2E00 to 2EF8h 124 values
2F00 to 2FF8h 124 values
3300 to 3320h 16 values
1.8.13 Page 34h : Index frame for the start-up current form record
Access in reading.
3400h Number of available values of the start-up current F51

form record
Communication
1.8.14 Page 35h : Event record data

Access in reading.
Address Contents Format Address Contents Format Address Contents Format
3500h EVENT n°1 F52 3519h EVENT n°26 F52 3532h EVENT n°51 F52
3501h EVENT n°2 F52 351Ah EVENT n°27 F52 3533h EVENT n°52 F52
3502h EVENT n°3 F52 351Bh EVENT n°28 F52 3534h EVENT n°53 F52
3503h EVENT n°4 F52 351Ch EVENT n°29 F52 3535h EVENT n°54 F52
3504h EVENT n°5 F52 351Dh EVENT n°30 F52 3536h EVENT n°55 F52
3505h EVENT n°6 F52 351Eh EVENT n°31 F52 3537h EVENT n°56 F52
3506h EVENT n°7 F52 351Fh EVENT n°32 F52 3538h EVENT n°57 F52
3508h EVENT n°9 F52 3521h EVENT n°34 F52 353Ah EVENT n°59 F52
3509h EVENT n°10 F52 3522h EVENT n°35 F52 353Bh EVENT n°60 F52
350Ah EVENT n°11 F52 3523h EVENT n°36 F52 353Ch EVENT n°61 F52
350Bh EVENT n°12 F52 3524h EVENT n°37 F52 353Dh EVENT n°62 F52
350Ch EVENT n°13 F52 3525h EVENT n°38 F52 353Eh EVENT n°63 F52
350Dh EVENT n°14 F52 3526h EVENT n°39 F52 353Fh EVENT n°64 F52
350Eh EVENT n°15 F52 3527h EVENT n°40 F52 3540h EVENT n°65 F52
350Fh EVENT n°16 F52 3528h EVENT n°41 F52 3541h EVENT n°66 F52
3511h EVENT n°18 F52 352Ah EVENT n°43 F52 3543h EVENT n°68 F52
3512h EVENT n°19 F52 352Bh EVENT n°44 F52 3544h EVENT n°69 F52
3513h EVENT n°20 F52 352Ch EVENT n°45 F52 3545h EVENT n°70 F52
3514h EVENT n°21 F52 352Dh EVENT n°46 F52 3546h EVENT n°71 F52
3515h EVENT n°22 F52 352Eh EVENT n°47 F52 3547h EVENT n°72 F52
3516h EVENT n°23 F52 352Fh EVENT n°48 F52 3548h EVENT n°73 F52
3518h EVENT n°25 F52 3531h EVENT n°50 F52 354Ah EVENT n°75 F52
Communication
1.8.15 Page 36h : Data of the oldest event

Access in reading.
3600h Data of the oldest event F52
1.8.16 Page 37h : Fault value record data

Access in reading.
3700h Data of the fault value record n°1 F53

1.8.17 Pages 38h à 3Ch : Selection of the disturbance record and selection of its channel
Access in reading.
Address Disturbance record number Channel Format
3800h 1 I A (phase A current) F54

3801h 1 I B (phase B current) F54
3802h 1 I C (phase C current) F54
3803h 1 I N (neutral current) F54
3804h 1 Frequency F54
3805h 1 Logic inputs and logic outputs F54
3900h 2 I A (phase A current) F54
3901h 2 I B (phase B current) F54
3902h 2 I C (phase C current) F54
3903h 2 I N (neutral current) F54
3904h 2 Frequency F54
3905h 2 Logic inputs and logic outputs F54
3A00h 3 I A (phase A current) F54
3A01h 3 I B (phase B current) F54
3A02h 3 I C (phase C current) F54
3A03h 3 I N (neutral current) F54
3A04h 3 Frequency F54
3A05h 3 Logic inputs and logic outputs F54
3B00h 4 I A (phase A current) F54
3B01h 4 I B (phase B current) F54
3B02h 4 I C (phase C current) F54
3B03h 4 I N (neutral current) F54
3B04h 4 Frequency F54
3B05h 4 Logic inputs and logic outputs F54
Communication
Address Disturbance record number Channel Format
3C00h 5 I A (phase A current) F54

3C01h 5 I B (phase B current) F54
3C02h 5 I C (phase C current) F54
3C03h 5 I N (neutral current) F54
3C04h 5 Frequency F54
3C05h 5 Logic inputs and logic outputs F54
1.8.18 Page 3Dh : Number of available disturbance records

Access in reading.
3D00h Number of available disturbance records F55
1.8.19 Page 3Eh : Data of the oldest non-acknowledged fault record

Access in reading.
3E00h Data of the oldest fault value record F53
1.9 Description of the mapping format
CODE DESCRIPTION
F1 unsigned integer – numerical data 1 –65535

F2 signed integer – numerical data –32768 to +32767
F3 unsigned Long integer – numerical data 0 to 4294967925
F4 Unsigned integer – RTD/thermistor monitoring function status
Bit 0 : t RTD1 ALARM signal or Thermist1 signal
Bit 1 : t RTD1 TRIP signal or Thermist2 signal
Bit 2 : t RTD2 ALARM signal
Bit 3 : t RTD2 TRIP signal
Bits 13 to 15 : reserved
F5 Unsigned integer : Motor start-up detection criterion
Bit 0 : Closing of the CB (52A)
Bit 1 : Closing of the CB and overshoot of the Istart current threshold (52A + Istart)
Communication
CODE DESCRIPTION
F6 Unsigned long : Trip output relay assignment (relay n°1)

bit 0 : tI>>
bit 1 : tI0>
Bit 2 : tI0>>
Bit 3 : tI2>
Bit 4 : tI< (loss of load)
Bit 5 : THERM OVERLOAD (Thermal overload)
Bit 6 : EXCES LONG START (Excessive long start)
Bit 7 : t Istall (Stalled rotor whilst running)
Bit 8 : LOCKED ROTOR (locked rotor at start)
Bit 9 : t RTD1 TRIP or Thermist1
Bit 10 : t RTD2 TRIP or Thermist2
Bit 11 : t RTD3 TRIP
F6’ Bit 0 : t I2>>
Bit 1 : EXT 1>
Bit 2 : EXT 2>
Bit 3 : Equation A (« AND » logical gate A)
Bit 4 : Equation B (« AND » logical gate B)
Bit 5 : Equation C (« AND » logical gate C)
Bit 6 : Equation D (« AND » logical gate D)
F7 Unsigned integer : Data transmitted on the analogue output
0 : IA RMS
1 : IB RMS
2 : IC RMS
3 : IN RMS
4 : THERM ST (thermal state)
5 : % I LOAD (load in % of full load current)
6 : Tbef Start (time before a permitted start)
7 : Tbef Trip (time before a thermal trip)
8 : T°C RTD1
9 : T°C RTD2
10 : T°C RTD3
11 : T°C RTD4
12 : T°C RTD5
13 : T°C RTD6
F8 Unsigned integer : Latching of the trip output relay (relay n°1)
Bit 0 : tI>>
Bit 1 : tI0>>
Bit 2 : tI2>>
Bit 3 : Equation A
Bit 4 : Equation B
Bit 5 : Equation C
Bit 6 : Equation D
F9 Unsigned integer : Remote order
Bit 0 : Remote delocking of the trip output relay (relay n°1)
Bit 1 : Remote alarm acknowledgement
Bit 2 : Remote TRIP ORDER
Bit 3 : Remote CLOSE ORDER
Bit 4 : Remote EMERGENCY START
Bit 5 : Remote order to change of active setting group
Bit 6 : Remote ORDER 1
Bit 7 : Remote ORDER 2
Bit 8 : Remote trigging of disturbance record
Bit 9 : Remote maintenance mode enabling order
Bit 10 : Remote maintenance mode disabling order
Bit 11 : Reserved
Bit 12 : Non automatic event/fault record acknowledgement on record retrieval
Bit 13 : Remote acknowledgement of the oldest non-acknowledged event record
Bit 14 : Remote acknowledgement of the oldest non-acknowledged fault record
Bit 15 : Remote acknowledgement of the « RAM memory error » alarm
Communication
CODE DESCRIPTION
F10 ASCII characters

32 –127 = ASCII character1
32 – 127 = ASCII character 2
F11 Unsigned integer : reserved
F12 Unsigned integer : Logic inputs status
Bit 0 : Logic input 1 (CB/contactor status : 52a)
Bit 1 : Logic input 2 (speed switch input)
Bit 2 : Logic input 3
F13 Unsigned integer : Output relays status
Bit 0 : Output relay 1 (trip output relay)
Bit 1 : Output relay 2
Bit 5 : Watchdog relay
F14 Unsigned integer : Auxiliary output relays allocation
Bit 0 : Allocation to relay 2
F14’ Unsigned integer : « AND » logical gates allocation
Bit 0 : Allocation to equation A
Bit 1 : Allocation to equation B
Bit 2 : Allocation to equation C
Bit 3 : Allocation to equation D
F15 Unsigned integer :Logic inputs allocation.
Bit 0 : EMERG ST (emergency start)
Bit 1 : SET GROUP (change from one protection setting group to another)
Bit 2 : VOLT. DIP (voltage dip – re acceleration authorisation)
Bit 3 : DIST TRIG (trigging of a disturbance recording)
Bit 4 : EXT RESET (external reset)
Bit 5 : EXT 1 (auxiliary 1 timer)
F16 Unsigned integer : Earth fault and unbalance protection information
Bits 0 to 4: reserved
Bit 5 : Instantaneous signal (I0> or I0>>)
bit 6 : Time delayed signal (tI0> or tI0>> or tI2> or tI2>>)
F17 Unsigned integer : Short-circuit and loss of load protection information
Bit 0 : reserved
Bit 1 : Phase A signal , overshoot of the I>> threshold
Bit 2 : Phase B signal, overshoot of the I>> threshold
Bit 3 : Phase C signal, overshoot of the I>> threshold
Bit 4 : reserved
Bit 5 : Instantaneous signal I>>
Bit 6 : Time delayed signal tI>> or tI<
Bits 7 à 15 : reserved
F18 Unsigned integer : Analogue output type
0 : 4-20 mA
1 : 0-20 mA
Communication
CODE DESCRIPTION
F19 Unsigned long : LED allocation

Bit 0 : θ ALARM (thermal alarm)
Bit 1 : THERM OVERLOAD (thermal overload)
Bit 2 : tI0>
Bit 3 : tI0>>
Bit 4 : t I >>
Bit 5 : tI2>
Bit 6 : tI2>>
Bit 7 : tI<
Bit 8 : EXCES LONG START
Bit 9 : t Istall (stalled rotor whilst running)
Bit 10 : LOCKED ROTOR (at start)
Bit 11 : EMERG RESTART (emergency restart)
Bit 12 : FORBIDDEN START
Bit 13 : t RTD1,2,3 ALARM
Bit 14 : t RTD1,2,3 TRIP
Bit 15 : t RTD4 ,5 ,6 ALARM
Bit 16 : t RTD4 ,5 ,6 TRIP
Bit 17 : Thermist1, 2
Bit 18 : EXT 1
Bit 19 : EXT 2
Bit 20 : MOTOR STOPPED
Bit 21 : MOTOR RUNNING
Bit 22 : SUCCESSFUL START
Bit 23 to 31 : reserved
F20 Unsigned integer : Status of the information assigned to the logic inputs
Bit 0 : Emergency start
Bit 1 : Change from one protection setting group to another
Bit 2 : Voltage dip
Bit 3 : CB/Contactor status (52a interlock) : open = 0 close = 1
Bit 4 : Trigging of a disturbance recording
Bit 5 : Speed switch signal
Bit 6 : External reset
Bit 7 : Auxiliary timer EXT 1
F21 Unsigned integer : Software version
most significant digit : software version number
lost significant digit : software version letter
10 : 1.A version
11 : 1.B version
20 : 2.A version
32 : 3.C version
41 : 4.B version
F22 Unsigned integer : Internal logics
Bit 0 : Trip output relay latched (relay n°1)
Bit 1 : reserved
F23 Unsigned integer : Quick reading byte
Bit 0 : General MiCOM relay status
Bit 1 : Minor relay failure
Bit 2 : Presence of a non-acknowledged event record
Bit 3 : Clock synchronisation status
Bit 4 : Presence of a non-acknowledged disturbance record
Bit 5 : Presence of a non-acknowledged fault record
F24 0 : Function in service
1 : Function out of service
F25 2 : ASCII characters
Communication
CODE DESCRIPTION
F26 Default displayed value

1 : IA RMS
2 : IB RMS
3 : IC RMS
4 : I0 RMS
5 : THERM ST (Thermal state)
6 : % I LOAD (load in % of full load current)
F27 Reserved
F28 Unsigned integer : Baudrate
0 : 300
1 : 600
2 : 1200
3 : 2400
4 : 4800
5 : 9600
6 : 19200
7 : 38400
F29 Unsigned integer : parity
0 : Without
1 : Even
2 : Odd
F30 Unsigned integer : Data bits
0 : 7 data bits
1 : 8 data bits
F31 Unsigned integer : Stop bit
0 : 1 stop bit
1 : 2 stop bits
F32 Unsigned integer : Thermistor type
0 : PTC
1 : NTC
F33 Unsigned integer : Thermal image information
Bit 0 : θ ALARM signal (thermal alarm)
Bit 1 : THERM OV. signal (thermal overload)
Bit 2: θ FORBID START signal (prohibited start due to thermal criteria)
F34 Unsigned integer : Start sequence and stalled/locked rotor information
Bit 0 : Start sequence in progress signal
Bit 1 : Successful start signal
Bit 2 : Excessive long start signal
Bit 3 : Stalled rotor whilst running signal
Bit 4 : Locked rotor at start signal
Bit 5 : Overshoot of the permitted cold starts number signal
Bit 6 : Overshoot of the permitted hot starts number signal
Bit 7 : Limitation of the starts number signal
Bit 8 : Minimum time between two starts signal
Bit 9 : Prohibiting start signal
Bit 10 : Reserved
Bit 11 : Re-acceleration phase in progress signal
Bit 12 : Reserved
Bit 13 : Overshoot of the Istall threshold signal
Bit 14 : Motor running signal
Bit 15 : Reserved
F35 Reserved
F36 Unsigned integer : EXT1…EXT4 timers and « AND » logical gates information
Bit 0 : EXT1 timer signal
Bit 2 : Equation A signal
Bit 3 : Equation B signal
Bit 4 : Equation C signal
Bit 5 : Equation D signal
Bit 6 : reserved
Communication
CODE DESCRIPTION
F37 Reserved
F38 Reserved
F39 Unsigned integer : Displayed fault record number
0 : reserved
1 : Fault record n°1
F40 Disturbance record trigging criterion
0 : ON INST : Overshoot of a current threshold (I>>, I0> or I0>>)
1 : ON TRIP : Relay n°1 operation (trip output relay operation)
F41 Display alarm message
Bit 0 a : TH OVERLOAD (thermal overload)
Bit 1 a : tIo>
Bit 2 a : tIo>>
Bit 3 a : tIi>
Bit 4 a : tIi>>
Bit 5 a : LONG START tIstart
Bit 6 a : MECHAN JAM tIstall (whilst running)
Bit 7 a : LOCKED ROTOR (at start)
Bit 8 a : t RTD 1 TRIP
Bit 14 a : Thermist 1
Bit 15 a : Thermist 2
F41’ Bit 0 b : EXT 1
Bit 1 b : EXT 2
Bit 2 b : EQUATION A
Bit 3 b : EQUATION B
Bit 4 b : EQUATION C
Bit 5 b : EQUATION D
Bit 6 b : θ ALARM (thermal alarm)
Bit 7 b : t RTD 1 ALARM or START
Bit 13 b : θ FORBIDDEN START
Bit 14 b : START NB LIMIT
Bit 15 b : T between 2 start
F41’’ Bit 0 c : RE-ACCELER AUTHOR
Bit 1 c : OPERATING TIME SW (CB operating time)
Bit 2 c : OPERTION NB SW (CB operating time)
Bit 3 c : SA2n (Σ Ampsn cut by CB)
F42 RTD type
0 : Pt100 type
1 : Ni 120 type
2 : Ni 100 type
3 : Cu 10 type
F43 Circuit breaker monitoring flag
Bit 0 : CB operating time signal
Bit 1 : CB operation number signal
Bit 2 : Σ Ampsn cut by CB signal
F44 Reserved
Communication
CODE DESCRIPTION
F45 RDT status

Bit 0 : RTD1 failure or thermistance 1 failure
Bit 1 : RTD2 failure or thermistance 2 failure
Bit 2 : RTD3 failure
Bit 6 : RTD board error
F46 Unsigned integer : Status of the MiCOM relay selftest
Bit 0 : Analogue output error
Bit 1 : Communication error
Bit 2 : EEPROM memory error
Bit 3 : Analogue signals acquisition error
Bit 4 : Internal clock error
Bit 5 : EEPROM calibration error
Bit 6 : RAM memory error
Bit 7 : RTD or thermistor in failure (short-wiring or open circuit)
F47 Reserved
F48 Reserved
F49 Reserved
F50 1st word : Disturbance record number
2nd word : Disturbance recording end time (sec)…..lsb (low significant bit)
3rd word : Disturbance recording end time (sec)…..msb (most significant bit)
4th word : Disturbance recording end time (ms)…..lsb (low significant bit)
5th word : Disturbance recording end time (ms)…..msb (most significant bit)
6th word :Cause of the disturbance record trigging
1 : Relay n°1 operation
2 : Overshoot of a current threshold (I>>, Io> or Io>>)
3 : Remote trig
4 : Trig order received through a logic input
7th word : Frequency
F51 1st word : Number of available current values of the start-up current form record
2nd word : Address of the last page containing significant record data
3rd word : Word number contained in the last page (containing significant record data)
F52 1st word : event type : Refer to format F56
2nd word : associated value type : Refer to format F56
3rd word : mapping address of the associated value
4th word : reserved
5th word : event occurrence date (second) : number of seconds since the
01/01/1994…lsb
6th word : event occurrence date (second) : number of seconds since the
01/01/1994..msb
7th word : event occurrence date (ms) …..lsb (low significant bit)
8th word : event occurrence date (ms) …..msb (most significant bit)
9th word: acknowledgement : (0 = non acknowledged event ; 1 = acknowledged event)
F53 1st word : Fault record number
2nd word : Fault date (sec) : second number since 01/01/1994.lsb (low significant bit)
3rd word : Fault date (sec) : second number since 01/01/1994.msb (most significant bit)
4th word : Fault date (ms) …..lsb (low significant bit)
5th word : Fault date (ms) …..msb (most significant bit)
6th word : Fault date (season) : (0 = winter,1 = summer, 2 = non defined)
7th word : Active setting group while the fault occurrence : (1 or 2)
8th word :Faulty phase : ( 0 =none, 1 = phase A, 2 = phase B, 3 = phase C, 4 =
phases A-B, 5 = phases AC, 6 = phases B-C, 7 = phases A-B-C, 8 = earth)
9th word : Cause of the fault record : refer to format F57
10th word : Fault value magnitude (fundamental value) : refer to format F59
11th word : Phase A current magnitude (True RMS value) : refer to format F59
12th word : Phase B current magnitude (True RMS value) : refer to format F59
13th word : Phase C current magnitude (True RMS value) : refer to format F59
14th word : Earth current magnitude (True RMS value) : refer to format F59
15th word : Acknowledgement : (0 = non acknowledged fault record; 1 = acknowledged
fault record)
Communication
CODE DESCRIPTION
F54 1st word : Samples number containing in the mapping

2nd word : Pre-time sample number
3rd word : Post-time sample number
4th word : Primary phase CT value
5th word : Secondary phase CT value
6th word : Primary earth CT value
7th word : Secondary earth CT value
8th word : Ratio of the internal phase CT
9th word : Ratio of the internal earth CT
10th word : Address of the last page containing samples
11th word : Word number contained in the last page (containing samples)
F55 1st word : Number of disturbance record available
2nd word : Oldest disturbance record number
3rd word : Oldest disturbance record date (sec) …..lsb (low significant bit)
4th word : Oldest disturbance record date (sec) …..msb (most significant bit)
5th word : Oldest disturbance record date (ms) …..lsb (low significant bit)
6th word : Oldest disturbance record date (ms) …..msb (most significant bit)
7th word : Cause of the oldest disturbance record :
3 : Remote trig
8th word : Acknowledgement
9th word : Previous disturbance record number
10th word : Previous disturbance record date (sec) …..lsb (low significant bit)
11th word : Previous disturbance record date (sec) …..msb (most significant bit)
12th word : Previous disturbance record date (ms) …..lsb (low significant bit)
13th word : Previous disturbance record date (ms) …..msb (most significant bit)
14th word : Cause of the previous disturbance record :
3 : Remote trig
15th word : Acknowledgement and so on regarding the other disturbance records.
Communication
Code Event type Associated value type
F56 00 "No EVENT" -

01 "REMOTE CLOSING" F9
02 "REMOTE TRIPPING" F9
03 «DISTURBANCE RECORD TRIGGING» F9
04 «SETTING CHANGE» MODBUS address of
the modified value
05 "I >>" (instantaneous signal) F17 ↑↓
06 "I0 >" (instantaneous signal) F16 ↑↓
07 "I0 >>" (instantaneous signal) F16 ↑↓
08 "I2 >" (instantaneous signal) F16 ↑↓
09 "I2 >>" (instantaneous signal) F16 ↑↓
10 "I <" (instantaneous signal) F17 ↑↓
11 "THERMAL ALARM" F33 ↑↓
12 "t RTD1 ALARM" F4 ↑↓
18 "THERMAL OVERLOAD" F33 ↑↓
19 "FORBIDDEN START" F33 ↑↓
20 "t I >>" (time delayed signal) F17 ↑↓
21 "t I0 >" (time delayed signal) F16 ↑↓
22 "t I0 >>" (time delayed signal) F16 ↑↓
23 "t I2 >" (time delayed signal) F16 ↑↓
24 "t I2 >>" (time delayed signal) F16 ↑↓
25 "t I <" (time delayed signal) F17 ↑↓
26 "REACCELERATION IN PROGRESS"
F34 ↑↓
27 "EMERGENCY START" F34
28 "START-UP DETECTION" F34
29 "MOTOR HALTED" F34
30 "EXCESSIVE START TIME" F34 ↑↓
31 "STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING" F34 ↑↓
32 "LOCKED ROTOR AT START" F34 ↑↓
33 "START NUMBER LIMITATION" F34 ↑↓
34 "MINIMUM TIME BETWEEN 2 STARTS" F34 ↑↓
35 "EXT 1" F36 ↑↓
36 "EXT 2" F36 ↑↓
37 "EQUATION A" F36 ↑↓
38 "EQUATION B" F36 ↑↓
39 "EQUATION C" F36 ↑↓
40 "EQUATION D" F36 ↑↓
Communication
F56 41 "t RTD1 TRIP" F4 ↑↓

42 "t RTD2 TRIP" F4 ↑↓
47 "THERMISTOR 1" F4 ↑↓
48 "THERMISTOR 2" F4 ↑↓
49 "CB OPERATING TIME ALARM" F43 ↑↓
50 "CB OPERATION NUMBER ALARM" F43 ↑↓
51 "CB SAn ALARM" F43 ↑↓
52 "TRIPPING : THERMAL OVERLOAD" F33
53 "TRIPPING : t I >>" (time delayed signal) F17
54 "TRIPPING : t I0 >" (time delayed signal) F16
55 "TRIPPING : t I0 >>" (time delayed signal) F16
56 "TRIPPING : t I2 >" (time delayed signal) F16
57 "TRIPPING : t I2 >>" (time delayed signal) F16
58 "TRIPPING : t I <" (time delayed signal) F17
59 "TRIPPING : EXCESSIVE START TIME" F34
60 " TRIPPING : STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING" F34
61 "TRIPPING : LOCKED ROTOR AT START" F34
62 "TRIPPING : EXT 1" F36
63 "TRIPPING : EXT 2" F36
64 "TRIPPING : EQUATION A" F36
65 "TRIPPING : EQUATION B" F36
66 "TRIPPING : EQUATION C" F36
67 "TRIPPING : EQUATION D" F36
68 "TRIPPING : t RTD1 TRIP" F4
74 "TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 1" F4
75 "TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 2" F4
76 "ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ONE ALARM USING KEYPAD" -
77 "ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ALL ALARMS USING KEYPAD" -
78 "REMOTE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ONE ALARM" -
79 "REMOTE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ALL ALARMS" -
80 "CHANGE OF THE LOGIC INPUTS STATUS" F12 ↑↓
81 "MAJOR RELAY FAILURE» F46 ↑↓
82 "MINOR RELAY FAILURE" F46 ↑↓
Communication
F56 83 "CHANGE OF THE LOGIC OUTPUTS STATUS" F13 ↑↓

84 "EXT 3" F36 ↑↓
85 "EXT 4" F36 ↑↓
NOTE: - The double arrow ↑↓ means the event is generated on event

occurrence and another is generated on event
disappearance.
- On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated
format is set to « 1 ».
- On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the
associated format is set to « 0 ».
Code Fault origin
F57 00 " NO FAULT

01 " REMOTE TRIPPING"
02 " TRIPPING : t I >>" (time delayed signal)
03 " TRIPPING :t I0 >" (time delayed signal)
04 " TRIPPING :t I0 >>" (time delayed signal)
05 " TRIPPING :t I2 >" (time delayed signal)
06 " TRIPPING :t I2 >>" (time delayed signal)
07 " TRIPPING :t I <" (time delayed signal)
08 " TRIPPING : EXCESSIVE LONG START "
09 " TRIPPING :STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING "
10 " TRIPPING :LOCKED ROTOR AT START "
11 " TRIPPING : THERMAL OVERLOAD "
12 " TRIPPING : EXT 1"
13 " TRIPPING : EXT 2"
14 " TRIPPING : EQUATION A"
15 " TRIPPING : EQUATION B"
16 " TRIPPING : EQUATION C"
17 " TRIPPING : EQUATION D"
18 " TRIPPING : t RTD1 TRIP "
24 " TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 1"
25 " TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 2"
Communication
Conversion rules for the current values of the disturbance record
F58 * In order to obtain the phase current value at phase CT primary, apply the following formula :
«Primary phase current value (in Amps)» = «Remote value» x «Primary phase CT value» x √2 / 800
* In order to obtain the earth current value at the earth CT primary, apply the following formula :
«Primary earth current value (in Amps)» = «Remote value» x «Primary earth CT value» x √2 / 32700
Conversion rules for the current values of the fault data record
F59 * In order to obtain the phase current value at phase CT primary, apply the following formula :
« Primary phase current value (in Amps) » = « Remote value » x « Primary phase CT value » / 800
* In order to obtain the negative sequence component value of the current at phase CT primary, apply
the following formula :
« Primary negative current value (in Amps) » = « Remote value » x « Primary phase CT value » / 800
* In order to obtain the earth current value at the earth CT primary, apply the following formula :
« Primary earth current value (in Amps) » = « Remote value » x « Primary earth CT value » / 32700
Origin of Triggering of the perturbographic recorder
F60 Value1 : Trigger on Trip output relay RL1 information

Value 2 : Trigger on instantaneous thresholds
Value 3 : Trigger o n (TC) via communication
Value 4 : Trigger via a Logic Input
Value 5 : No active perturbo.
Communication
BLANK PAGE
Communication
COURIER DATABASE
V4.D
Communication
BLANK PAGE
Communication
2. K-BUS PROTOCOL AND COURIER LANGUAGE

The serial communications are transmitted on K-Bus, a multi-drop network proposing
an instantaneous interface with IEC 870 - 5 - FT1.2 standards. The language and the
communication protocol used are Courier. This concept permits especially to the
generic programmes of the principal units to access to a high number of different
relay types without need to change permanently the principal unit program for each
relay type. The relays forms a distributed database in which the principal workstation
proceeds to a selective call of the slave relays in order to know all necessary
information.
Courier has a concept for the functions with a selective call system which allows not a
slave periphery to communicate directly with the central unit when one shall informs
another about a particular event. The slave workstation has to wait that the principal
workstation asks for the information. With Courier each information is given into a
box with a code of the length and the database type. In knowing the database format
the reception periphery can read them.
2.1 K-BUS
K-Bus is a communication system developed for connecting the slave peripheries in
remoting on the central unit, permitting them to execute all remote monitoring and
remote control functions using the appropriated communication language. K-Bus is
not able to permit a direct communication between the slave peripheries. Only a
communication between the central unit and the slave peripheries can be established.
The principal characteristics of the K-Bus are his profitability, his high security level,
his installation facility and his user friendliness.
2.1.1 K-Bus transmission layer
The communication port is supported on the reception levels and the voltage
transmission RS485 with galvanic isolation assured by a transformer. A selective call
protocol is used. No relay unit is allowed to transmit before having received a
validation message without any error detection. The transmission is synchronous on a
pair of isolated waves. The data are coded FM0 with a clock signal for eliminate all
CC-component, allows the signal to cross the transformers.
With the exception of the central units, each network node is passive. No defective
unit from the system can interfere with the communications established with the other
units. The message format is HDLC. The data transmission speed is 64 kbits/s.
2.1.2 K-Bus connection
The connection on the K-Bus port is realised by screwed terminals of 4 mm of MIDOS
standards or by FASTON-connectors. A cabled pair is sufficient to realise the
connection, knowing that the polarity is not important. It is recommended to use an
external screen earth linked at the end of the principal workstation only. The screen
has to be fixed with a M4 screw following the wiring scheme. The functioning of the
K-BUS network is guaranteed for 32 units connected on 1000 meters of cables.
Thanks to the data code method, the polarity of the Bus cable connection is not
important.
N.B. : The K-Bus network has to finish with a 150 ohms resistance on
each end of the Bus. The principal workstation can be placed
anywhere on the network. This command point has to be
unique.
Communication
2.1.3 Auxiliary equipment

For communication with the relay it is necessary to have at least one converter case
K-Bus/IEC870-5 of the type KITZ and a computer suitable software, an
interconnection cable RS232 for connecting the KITZ to the computer and a software
conform to the specification of the Courier protocol.
2.2 Relay courier database
The Courier database is two dimensional structure with each cell in the database
being referenced by a row and column address. Both the column and the row can
take a range from 0 to 255. Addresses in the database are specified as hexadecimal
values, eg 0A02 is column 0A (10 decimal) row 02. Associated settings/data will be
part of the same column, row zero of the column contains a text string to identify the
contents of the column.
This data base is given in the APPENDIX 1.
2.3 Setting changes
This uses a combination of three commands to perform a settings change:
Enter Setting Mode - checks that the cell is settable and returns the limits
Pre load Setting - Places a new value to the cell, this value is echoed to ensure that
setting corruption has not taken place, the validity of the setting is not checked by this
action.
Execute Setting - Confirms the setting change, if the change is valid then a positive
response will be returned, if the setting change fails then an error response will be
returned.
Abort Setting - This command can be used to abandon the setting change.
This is the most secure method and is ideally suited to on-line editors as the setting
limits are taken from the relay before the setting change is made. However this
method can be slow if many settings are being changed as three commands are
required for each change.
2.4 Systems integration data
2.4.1 Address of the relay
The relays can have any address between 1 and 254 included. The address 255
corresponds to the global address to which all relays and all the other slave
peripheries are responding. The Courier protocol specifies that no response can be
resent from a slave periphery to a global message. This permits to avoid that all
peripheries respond at the same time creating by this way user conflict on the Bus.
Each relay possess an address settled on 255 in order to guarantee that in case of his
connection to the operating network, his address cannot create any conflict with the
address of another periphery already in exploitation. In order to permit to a new
periphery to get entirely operational, his address has to be settled. The address can
be modified manually in capturing the password, than in following the method of the
setting change through the user interface on the front plate of the relay.
The same, if the network functioning on a computer takes in charge the auto-
addressing, the relay address can be settled on 0 to active the characteristic of auto-
addressing of the computer software. The relay receives then the next valid address
on the Bus.
Communication
If the address is 255 or not known, she can be modified in sending a new address,
with a global message, to a periphery possessing a particular serial number. This
method is used for those peripheries which are not having any user interface for
reading or changing the address in process.
2.4.2 Measured values
Each measured value can be periodically extracted by a selective call of the MiCOM
relay.
2.4.3 Status word
Each response of a slave periphery contains an octet of status. This octet is resent by
the relay at the beginning of each message for signalling important data. The
principal workstation can be design for responding automatically to these important
data.
The contained indications are the following :
Bit 0 - 1 = recording of disturbance available for retrieval
Bit 1 - 1 = reserved
Bit 3 - 1 = relay busy, no response possible in time
Bit 5 - 1 = recording of events available for retrieval
2.4.4 Control status word
The Control status word is located in the cell of the menu 000D.
It is used for transmitting the control information of the slave periphery to the central
unit. Nevertheless, the relays described in this manual are protection relays, which
are not using this control characteristic.
2.4.5 Logic input status word
The logic control input status can be observed in proceeding to a selective call from
the cell of menu 0020. The 2 bits inferior of the returned value indicating the status of
each of the 2 logic inputs. This cell is accessible only in reading.
Bit 0 : logic input 1: CB/Contactor status (52a interlock)
Bit 1 : logic input 2 : speed switch
Bit 2 : logic input 3
2.4.6 Output relay status word
The output relay status can be observed in proceeding to a selective call from the cell
of menu 0021. The 8 bits inferior of the returned value indicating the status of each
of the 5 output relays. This cell is accessible only in reading.
Bit 0 : relay RL1 (TRIP)
Bit 1 : programmable relay RL2
Bit 4 : watchdog relay
Communication
2.4.7 Control information

The status of internal controls triggered by the auto-control program of the relays can
be observed in proceeding to a selective call of the cell of menu 0022.
The bits 0 to 6 indicate the material controls of the product.
Bit 0 analogue output error
Bit 1 communication error
Bit 2 EEPROM memory error
Bit 3 analogue signals acquisition error
Bit 4 internal clock error
Bit 5 EEPROM calibration error
Bit 6 RAM memory error
Bit 7 RTD or thermistor in failure (short-wiring or open circuit)
2.4.8 Protection Indication
The protection indications gives the status of different protection elements in the relay.
The fault indications are generated with these indications. They are transmitted in the
events recordings, in case of a fault recording. This is the only way to access to these
indications.
The status of internal protection indication of the relays can be observed in
proceeding to a selective call of the cell of menu 0023, 0024 and 0025.
The following table presents the list of the protection indications of the cell 0023:
Bit position Function protection
0 I>> (instantaneous signal)

1 Io> (instantaneous signal)
2 Io>> (instantaneous signal)
3 Ii> (instantaneous signal)
4 Ii>> (instantaneous signal)
5 I< (instantaneous signal)
6 tI>> (time delayed signal)
7 tIo> (time delayed signal)
8 tIo>> (time delayed signal)
9 tIi> (time delayed signal)
10 tIi>> (time delayed signal)
11 tI< (time delayed signal)
12 Thermal alarm
13 Thermal overload
14 Thermal base start-up inhibition (θ forbidden start)
15 Reserved
Communication
The following table presents the list of the protection indications of the cell 0024:

0 Re-acceleration phase in progress
1 Start-up detection
2 Motor halted
3 Excessive long start
4 Stalled rotor whilst running
5 Locked rotor at start
6 Limitation of the start number (START NB LIMITATION)
7 Minimum time between two starts
8 EXT 1 timer
9 EXT 2 timer
10 Equation A
11 Equation B
12 Equation C
13 Equation D
14 EXT 3 timer
15 EXT 4 timer
The following table presents the list of the protection indications of the cell 0025 :

0 CB operating time alarm
1 CB operation number alarm
2 CB SA2n alarm
3 t RTD1 Alarm or thermist 1
4 t RTD2 Alarm or thermist 2
5 t RTD3 Alarm
6 t RTD4 Alarm
7 t RTD5 Alarm
8 t RTD6 Alarm
9 t RTD1 Trip
10 t RTD2 Trip
11 t RTD3 Trip
12 t RTD4 Trip
13 t RTD5 Trip
14 t RTD6 Trip
15 Reserved
Communication
2.4.9 Measurement control

The control functions through a MiCOM P220 relay can be executed on a serial link.
These functions are supported in particular on the changes of the individual relay
settings, on the changes of the setting groups, on the remote control of the circuit
breaker, as well as on the functions and the locking of the selected output relays.
The remote control is limited in the control functions selected in the table of the relays
menu. The CRC and the controls of the message length are used on each received
message. No response is given for messages received with an error detection. The
principal unit can be re-initialised in order to resent an order as often as wanted if he
is not receiving any response or if he receives a response with an error detection.
N.B. : The control commands are generally materialised by the change
of the cell value. They dispose the same inherent security. No
response is allowed for the global orders to avoid any user
conflict of the Bus. For this type of order, a double start is used
for the verification of the message by the relay. The relay
transmits then a confirmation indicating that the control order or
the change of setting has been accepted. If this is not the case,
the relay is sending an error message.
2.4.10 Change of remote measurements
The relay is only responding to the orders of a setting change through the serial port
if the SD0 link = 1 is selected. The selection of the SD0 link = 1 is blocking all the
changes of remote setting with the exception of the SC logical links and the password
capture. When the SD0 link = 0 is selected, the remote setting are protected by the
password.
For changing the remote links, the password has to be first remote captured .
and the SD and SD0 function links have to be settled on 1.
2.5 Event extraction
Events can be extracted either automatically or manually . For automatic extraction all
events are extracted in sequential order using the standard Courier mechanism, this
includes fault. The manual approach allows the user to select events, faults at
random from the stored records.
2.5.1 Automatic event extraction
This method is intended for continuous extraction of event and fault information as it
is produced via the rear port.
When new event information is created the Event bit is set within the Status byte, this
indicates to the Master device that event information is available. The oldest,
unextracted event can be extracted from the relay using the Send Event command.
The relay will respond with the event data, which will be either a Courier Type 0 or
Type 3 event. The Type 3 event is used for fault records.
Once an event has been extracted from the relay the Accept Event can be used to
confirm that the event has been successfully extracted. If all events have been
extracted then the event bit will reset, if there are more events still to be extracted the
next event can be accessed using the Send Event command as below.
Communication
2.5.2 Event types

Events will be created by the relay under the following circumstances:
• Change of state of output contact
• Change of state of opto input
• Protection element operation
• Alarm condition
• Setting Change
• Fault Record (Type 3 Courier Event)
2.5.3 Event format
The Send Event command results in the following fields being returned by the relay:
• Cell Reference
• Timestamp
• Cell Text
• Cell Value
APPENDIX 1 contains a table of the events created by the relay and indicates how the
contents of the above fields are interpreted. Fault records will return a Courier Type 3
event which contains the above fields together with two additional fields:
• Event extraction column
• Event number
These events contain additional information which is extracted from the relay using
the referenced extraction column. Row 01 of the extraction column contains a setting
which allows the fault record to be selected. This setting should be set to the event
number value returned within the record, the extended data can be extracted from
the relay by uploading the text and data from the column.
2.5.4 Manual record extraction
Column 02 of the database can be used for manual viewing fault records. The
contents of this column will depend of the nature of the record selected. It is possible
to select directly a fault record.
Fault Record Selection (Row 01) - This cell can be used to directly select a fault record
using a value between 0 and 4 to select one of up to five stored fault records (0 will
be the most recent fault and 4 will be the oldest). The column will then contain the
details of the fault record selected (row 02 to 0A)
It should be noted that if this column is used to extract event information from the
relay the number associated with a particular record will change when a new fault
occurs.
Communication
2.6 Disturbance record extraction

The stored disturbance records within the relay are accessible via the Courier
interface.
Select Record Number (Row 01) - This cell can be used to select the record to be
extracted. Record 0 will be the oldest un-extracted record, older records will be
assigned positive values, and negative values will be used for more recent records. To
facilitate automatic extraction via the rear port the Disturbance bit of the Status byte is
set by the relay whenever there are unextracted disturbance records.
Once a record has been selected, using the above cell, the time and date of the
record can be read from cell 02. The disturbance record itself can be extracted using
the block transfer mechanism from cell B00B.
As has been stated the rear Courier port can be used to automatically extract
disturbance records as they occur. This operates using the standard Courier
mechanism defined in Chapter 8 of the Courier User Guide.
Communication
3. LIST OF EVENTS CREATED BY THE RELAY
Code Event type Cell Reference

00 "No EVENT" -
01 "REMOTE CLOSING" 0
02 "REMOTE TRIPPING" 0
03 «DISTURBANCE RECORD TRIGGING» 0
04 «SETTING CHANGE» 0
05 "I >>" (instantaneous signal) 0023
06 "I0 >" (instantaneous signal) 0023
07 "I0 >>" (instantaneous signal) 0023
08 "I2 >" (instantaneous signal) 0023
09 "I2 >>" (instantaneous signal) 0023
10 "I <" (instantaneous signal) 0023
11 "THERMAL ALARM" 0023
12 "t RTD1 ALARM" 0025
18 " THERMAL OVERLOAD" 0023
19 "FORBIDDEN START" 0023
20 "t I >>" (time delayed signal) 0023
21 "t I0 >" (time delayed signal) 0023
22 "t I0 >>" (time delayed signal) 0023
23 "t I2 >" (time delayed signal) 0023
24 "t I2 >>" (time delayed signal) 0023
25 "t I <" (time delayed signal) 0023
26 "REACCELERATION IN PROGRESS" 0024
27 "EMERGENCY START" 0024
28 "START-UP DETECTION" 0024
29 " MOTOR HALTED" 0024
30 "EXCESSIVE START TIME" 0024
31 "STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING" 0024
32 "LOCKED ROTOR AT START" 0024
33 "START NUMBER LIMITATION" 0024
Communication

34 "MINIMUM TIME BETWEEN 2 STARTS" 0024
35 "EXT 1" 0024
36 "EXT 2" 0024
37 "EQUATION A" 0024
38 "EQUATION B" 0024
39 "EQUATION C" 0024
40 "EQUATION D" 0024
41 "t RTD1 TRIP" 0025
42 "t RTD2 TRIP" 0025
43 "t RTD3 TRIP" 0025
44 "t RTD4 TRIP" 0025
45 "t RTD5 TRIP" 0025
46 "t RTD6 TRIP" 0025
47 "THERMISTOR 1" 0025
48 "THERMISTOR 2" 0025
49 "CB OPERATING TIME ALARM" 0025
50 "CB OPERATION NUMBER ALARM" 0025
51 "CB SAn ALARM" 0025
52 "TRIPPING : THERMAL OVERLOAD" 0
53 "TRIPPING : t I >>" (time delayed signal) 0
54 "TRIPPING : t I0 >" (time delayed signal) 0
55 "TRIPPING : t I0 >>" (time delayed signal) 0
56 "TRIPPING : t I2 >" (time delayed signal) 0
57 "TRIPPING : t I2 >>" (time delayed signal) 0
58 "TRIPPING : t I <" (time delayed signal) 0
59 "TRIPPING : EXCESSIVE START TIME" 0
60 "TRIPPING : STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING" 0
61 "TRIPPING : LOCKED ROTOR AT START" 0
62 "TRIPPING : EXT 1" 0
63 "TRIPPING : EXT 2" 0
64 "TRIPPING : EQUATION A" 0
65 "TRIPPING : EQUATION B" 0
66 "TRIPPING : EQUATION C" 0
67 "TRIPPING : EQUATION D" 0
68 "TRIPPING : t RTD1 TRIP" 0
Communication

74 "TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 1" 0
75 "TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 2" 0
76 "ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ONE ALARM USING KEYPAD" 0
77 "ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ALL ALARMS USING KEYPAD" 0
78 "REMOTE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ONE ALARM" 0
79 "REMOTE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ALL ALARMS" 0
80 "CHANGE OF THE LOGIC INPUTS STATUS" 0020
81 "MAJOR RELAY FAILURE" 0022
82 "MINOR RELAY FAILURE" 0022
83 "CHANGE OF THE LOGIC OUTPUTS STATUS" 0021
84 "EXT 3" 0024
85 "EXT 4" 0024
86 "OUTPUT RELAY LATCH" 0021
87 "CHANGE OF CONFIGURATION GROUP" 0
N.B. : - When the cell reference is different of zero this means that the
event is generated on event occurrence and another is
generated on event disappearance.
- When the cell reference is equal to zero, only the event on
edging edge is generated.
- Sixteen bits are available in the string of characters to
describe the contain of the Courier cell:
- On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated
format is set to « 1 ».
- On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the
associated format is set to « 0 ».
Communication
4. LIST OF FAULTS CREATED BY THE RELAY
Code Event type

00 "No FAULT"
01 "REMOTE TRIPPING"
02 "t I >>" (time delayed signal)
03 "t I0 >" (time delayed signal)
04 "t I0 >>" (time delayed signal)
05 "t I2 >" (time delayed signal)
06 "t I2 >>" (time delayed signal)
07 "t I <" (time delayed signal)
08 "EXCESSIVE START TIME"
09 "STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING"
10 "LOCKED ROTOR AT START"
11 “THERMAL OVERLOAD"
12 "EXT 1"
13 "EXT 2"
14 "EQUATION A"
15 "EQUATION B"
16 "EQUATION C"
17 "EQUATION D"
18 "t RTD1 TRIP"
19 "t RTD2 TRIP"
20 "t RTD3 TRIP"
21 "t RTD4 TRIP"
22 "t RTD5 TRIP"
23 "t RTD6 TRIP"
24 "THERMISTOR 1"
25 "THERMISTOR 2"
Communication
5. COURIER DATABASES
Values Passw
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(* : default) Level
00 00 SYSTEM DATA 0
01 Language NON IMPLEMENTE
02 SYS Password ASCII Password(4 bytes) AAAA Setting 65/90/1 0
03 Fnlinks: NON IMPLEMENTE
04 SYS Description ASCII Text (16 bytes) “ Smmp ” Setting 32/127/1 1
05 SYS Plant Ref. ASCII Text (4 bytes) “ ALST ” Setting 65/90/1 1
06 SYS Model No. ASCII Text (6 bytes) “ P220 ” Data
07 SYS Firmware No. NON IMPLEMENTE
08 SYS Serial No. ASCII Text (7 bytes) “ 000000 ” Data
09 SYS Frequency Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) XXXX Hz Setting 50/60/10 1
0A SYS Comms Level Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1 Data
0B SYS Rly Address Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 255 * Setting 0/255/1 1
0C Plant Status Word: NON IMPLEMENTE
0D Control Status Word: NON IMPLEMENTE
0E SYS Setting Grp Unsigned Integer 1* Data 1
0F Load shed Stage: NON IMPLEMENTE
11 SYS Software Ref ASCII Text (16 characters) V X.A Data 1
12-1F Unused, reserved
20 SYS Logic Stat Binary flag (5 bits) 0: log input 1 = O/O Data 1
1: log input 2 = speed
2: log input 3
3: log input 4
4: log input 5
21 SYS Relay Stat Binary flag (5 bits) relay 1 (trip) Data 1
1: relay 2
2: relay 3
3: relay 4
4: relay watch-dog
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
22 SYS Alarms Binary flag (8 bits) 0: Ana output err Data 1
1: Comm err
2: Eeprom err data
3: Ct error
4: Clock error
5: Eeprom err calib
6: Ram error
7: RTD/therm err
23 SYS Pseudo-TS group 1 Stat Binary flag (15 bits) I>> Data 1
1: Ie>
2: Ie>>
3: Ii>
4: Ii>>
5 : I<
6: tI>>
7: tIe>
8: tIe>>
9: tIi>
10: tIi>>
11 : tI<
12 : Thermal Alarm
13 : Thermal Overload
14 : Thermal forbid Start
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
24 SYS Pseudo-TS group 2 Stat Binary flag (16 bits) 0: Reacceleration Data 1
1: Start Detect
2: Motor Stopped
3: Start too long
4: Stalled Rotor
5: Locked Rotor
6: Start nb limit
7: Time between 2 Starts
8: Ext. 1
9: Ext. 2
10: Equation 1
11: Equation 2
12: Equation 3
13: Equation 4
14: Ext. 3
15: Ext. 4
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
25 SYS Pseudo-TS group 3 Stat Binary flag (3 or 15 bits) 0: SW operating Time Data 1
1: SW operating nb
2: SA 2n
3: RTD1 Alarm (if option
RTD)
3: Thermistor 1 (if
option Thermistors )
4: RTD2 Alarm (if option
RTD)
4: Thermistor 2 (if
option Thermistors )
5: RTD3 Alarm (option
RTD or Thermistors)
RTD or Thermistors)
RTD or Thermistors)
RTD or Thermistors)
9: RTD1 Trip (option
RTD)
RTD)
RTD or Thermistors)
RTD or Thermistors)
RTD or Thermistors)
RTD or Thermistors)
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
01 00 USER CONTROL
01 USR Remote Control Binary flag (11 bits) 0: Unlck Trip Cont. Setting 0/2047/1 1
1: Ack all alarms
2: Trip
3: Close
4: Emergency start
5: Config change
6: Order 1
7: Order 2
8: Dist. trig
9: Start maintenance
10: End maintenance
02 00 FAULT RECORDS
01 Record number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 5* Setting 1/5/1 1
02 Occur fault date IEC DATE Data 1
03 Active set group Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1 Data 1
04 Phase in fault ASCII Text (14 bytes) “ PHASE A ” Data 1
05 Phase detected by ASCII Text (14 bytes) “ I >> ” Data 1
06 Magnitude Courier floating point 12.34 A Data 1
number
07 Ia Magnitude Courier floating point 12.34 A Data 1
number
08 Ib Magnitude Courier floating point 12.34 A Data 1
number
09 Ic Magnitude Courier floating point 12.34 A Data 1
number
0A In Magnitude Courier floating point 12.34 A Data 1
number
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
03 00 MEASUREMENTS
01 Ia RMS Courier floating point 12.34 A Data 1
number
02 Ib RMS Courier floating point 12.34 A Data 1
number
03 Ic RMS Courier floating point 12.34 A Data 1
number
04 IN RMS Courier floating point 12.34 A Data 1
number
05 I1 positive Courier floating point 12.34 A Data 1
number
06 I2 negative Courier floating point 12.34 A Data 1
number
07 I0 zero Courier floating point 12.34 A Data 1
number
08 Frequency Courier floating point 12.34 Hz Data 1
number
09 Max Ph current Courier floating point 12.34 A Data 1
number
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
04 00 STATISTICS
01 Total trip number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxxx Data 1
02 Operator trip number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxxx Data 1
03 Therm trip Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxxx Data 1
04 tI>> trip Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxxx Data 1
05 tI0>; tI0>> trip Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxxx Data 1
06 tIi>; tIi>> trip Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxxx Data 1
07 tIstart trip Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxxx Data 1
08 tIstall trip Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxxx Data 1
09 Locked rotor trip Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxxx Data 1
0A I< trip Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxxx Data 1
0B RTD1 trip (if option RTD) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxxx Data 1
0C RTD2 trip (if option RTD) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxxx Data 1
0D RTD3 trip (if option RTD or Thermistor) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxxx Data 1
0E RTD4 trip (if option RTD or Thermistor) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxxx Data 1
0F RTD5 trip (if option RTD or Thermistor) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxxx Data 1
10 RTD6 trip (if option RTD or Thermistor) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxxx Data 1
11 Thermistor 1 trip (if option Thermistor) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxxx Data 1
12 Thermistor 2 trip (if option Thermistor) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxxx Data 1
13 Equation A trip Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxxx Data 1
14 Equation B trip Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxxx Data 1
15 Equation C trip Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxxx Data 1
16 Equation D trip Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxxx Data 1
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
05 00 PROCESS
01 I FLC Per Cent Courier floating point xxx % Data 1
number
02 Thermal state Courier floating point xxx % Data 1
number
03 Time before TH trip Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxx s Data 1
04 Temperature RTD1 (if option RTD) Courier floating point xxx °C Data 1
number
05 Temperature RTD2 (if option RTD) Courier floating point xxx °C Data 1
number
06 Temperature RTD3 (if option RTD or Courier floating point xxx °C Data 1
Thermistor) number
Thermistor)) number
Thermistor) number
Thermistor) number
0A Temperature R1 (if option Thermistor) Courier floating point xx k Ohm Data 1
number
0B Temperature R2 (if option Thermistor) Courier floating point xx k Ohm Data 1
number
0C Permit start number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxx Data 1
0D Time before start Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxx s Data 1
0E Last start I Courier floating point xxx A Data 1
number
0F Last start time Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxx s Data 1
10 Motor start number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxx Data 1
11 Emergency start number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxx Data 1
12 Motor operat hours Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxx h Data 1
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
06 00 SW MONITORING
01 SA2 IA Courier floating point Data 1
number
02 SA2 IB Courier floating point Data 1
number
03 SA2 IC Courier floating point Data 1
number
04 SW operation nb Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Data 1
05 SW operation time Courier floating point 0.0 s Data 1
number
08 00 TIME:
01 Date/Time IEC870 Time & Date Data 1
0D 00 CONFIG. SELECT
01 Start detection Indexed string 0 O/O * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 O/O + I
02 Thermistor 1 type (if option Thermistor) Indexed string 0 PTC * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 NTC
03 Thermistor 2 type (if option Thermistor) Indexed string 0 PTC * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 NTC
04 RTD type (if option RTD or Indexed string 0 PT100 Setting 0/3/1 1
Thermistor) 1 Ni 120
2 Ni 100
3 Cu 10
05 Analog output type Indexed string 0 4 - 20 mA Setting 0/1 1
(if option RTD, or Thermistor, or Analog 1 0 - 20 mA
output)
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
06 Transmitted signal on Analog output Indexed string 0 Ia Setting 0/6 1
(if option RTD, or Thermistor, or Analog 1 Ib
output) 2 Ic
3 I0
4 Th State
5 % load
6 Time before Authorized
Start
7 Time before Thermal
Trip
0E 00 CT RATIO
01 CFG Prim Ph CT Ratio Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1000 * Setting 1/3000/1 1
02 CFG Sec Ph CT Ratio Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1* Setting 1/5/4 1
03 CFG Prim E CT Ratio Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1000 * Setting 1/3000/1 1
04 CFG Sec E CT Ratio Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1* Setting 1/5/4 1
0F 00 SETTING GROUPS
01 Select setting group Unsigned Integer 1* Setting 1/2/1 1
02 Group 1 visible Indexed string 0 YES Setting 0/1/1 1
1 NO
03 Group 2 visible Indexed string 0 YES Setting 0/1/1 1
1 NO
Protection group n° 1: visible if
0F02=1
20 00 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD 0F01=1
01 Thermal overload function? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
02 Thermal Inhibition? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
03 I θ> Courier floating point 0.2 In Setting 0.2/1.5/0.01 1
number
04 Ke Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 3* Setting 0/10/1 1
05 Te1 Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1* min Setting 1/64/1 1
06 Te2 Courier floating point 0.5* Te1 Setting 0.5/2.0/0.1 1
number
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
07 Tr Courier floating point 1.0 *Te1 Setting 1.0/20.0/0.5 1
number
08 RTD1 Influence? (if option RTD) Binary (1 bit) 0 No / Yes Setting 0/1/1 1
RTD3 Influence? (if option Thermistor)
09 θ Alarm? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
0A θ Alarm Courier floating point 20* % 2009=1 Setting 20/100/1 1
number
0B θ Forbid start? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
0C θ Forbid start Courier floating point 20* % 200B=1 Setting 20/100/1 1
number
21 00 [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT 0F01=1

01 I>> function? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
02 I>> Courier floating point 0.10 In * Setting 1.0/12/0.01 1
number
03 t I>> Courier floating point 0.00* s Setting 0.0/100/0.01 1
number
22 00 [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT 0F01=1

01 Ie> function? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
02 Ie> Courier floating point 0.002 Ien* Setting 0.002/1.0/0.001 1
number
03 t Ie> Courier floating point 0.00* s Setting 0.0/100/0.01 1
number
04 Ie>> function? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
05 Ie>> Courier floating point 0.002 Ien* Setting 0.002/1.0/0.001 1
number
06 t Ie>> Courier floating point 0.00* s Setting 0.0/100/0.01 1
number
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
23 00 [46] UNBALANCE 0F01=1
01 Ii> function? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
02 Ii> Courier floating point 0.05 In* Setting 0.05/0.8/0.025 1
number
03 t Ii> Courier floating point 0.04* s Setting 0.04/200.0/0.01 1
number
04 Ii>> function? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
05 Ii>> Courier floating point 0.25 In* Setting 0.2/0.8/0.05 1
number
24 00 [48] EXCES LONG START 0F01=1

01 Exces long start function? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
02 Istart detection Courier floating point 1.0 Iθ Setting 1.0/5.0/0.5 1
number
03 t Istart Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1 s* Setting 1/200/1 1
25 00 [51LR-50S] BLOCKED ROTOR 0F01=1

01 Blocked rotor function? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
02 t Istall Courier floating point 0.1 s* Setting 0.1/60.0/0.1 1
number
03 Stalled rotor? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
04 Istall detection Courier floating point 1.0 Iθ∗ Setting 1.0/5.0/0.5 1
number
05 Locked rotor at start? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
26 00 [37] LOSS OF LOAD 0F01=1

01 I< function? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
02 I< Courier floating point 0.10 In * Setting 0.1/1.0/0.01 1
number
03 t I< Courier floating point 0.2* s Setting 0.2/100.0/0.1 1
number
04 t Inhib Courier floating point 0.05* s Setting 0.05/300.0/0.05 1
number
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
27 00 [49/38] RTD SENSORS (if option RTD 0F01=1
or Thermistor)
01 RTD1 function? (if option RTD) Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
02 RTD1 Alarm Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0* °C Setting 0/200/1 1
03 t RTD1 Alarm Courier floating point 0.0* s Setting 0.0/100.0/0.1 1
number
04 RTD1 Trip Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0* °C Setting 0/200/1 1
05 t RTD1 Trip Courier floating point 0.0* s Setting 0.0/100.0/0.1 1
number
06 RTD2 function? (if option RTD) Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
number
0A t RTD2 Trip Courier floating point 0.0* s Setting 0.0/100.0/0.1 1
number
0B RTD3 function? (if option RTD or Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
Thermistor)
0C RTD3 Alarm Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0* °C Setting 0/200/1 1
0D t RTD3 Alarm Courier floating point 0.0* s Setting 0.0/100.0/0.1 1
number
0E RTD3 Trip Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0* °C Setting 0/200/1 1
0F t RTD3 Trip Courier floating point 0.0* s Setting 0.0/100.0/0.1 1
number
10 RTD4 function? (if option RTD or Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
Thermistor)
number
number
15 RTD5 function? (if option RTD or Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
Thermistor)
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
number
number
1A RTD6 function? (if option RTD or Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
Thermistor)
1B RTD6 Alarm Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0* °C Setting 0/200/1 1
1C t RTD6 Alarm Courier floating point 0.0* s Setting 0.0/100.0/0.1 1
number
1D RTD6 Trip Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0* °C Setting 0/200/1 1
1E t RTD6 Trip Courier floating point 0.0* s Setting 0.0/100.0/0.1 1
number
28 00 [49] THERMISTOR (if option 0F01=1

thermistor)
01 Thermistor 1? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
02 Thermistor 1 Courier floating point 0.1 kOhm Setting 0.1/30.0/0.1 1
number
03 Thermistor 2? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
04 Thermistor 2 Courier floating point 0.1 kOhm Setting 0.1/30.0/0.1 1
number
40 00 Protection group n° 2
Same characteristics than Group n°1:
visible if 0F03=1
60 00 [66] START NUMBER

01 Start number limitation function? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
02 Treference Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 10 min* Setting 10/120/5 1
03 Cold start number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0* Setting 0/5/1 1
04 Hot start number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0* Setting 0/5/1 1
05 T interdiction Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1min* Setting 1/120/1 1
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
61 00 MIN TIME BETW 2 START
01 Time betw start function? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
02 T betw 2 start Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1min * Setting 1/120/1 1
62 00 REACCEL AUTHORIZ
01 Reaccel authoriz function? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
02 Volt dip durat Treacc Courier floating point 0.2 s * Setting 0.2/10.0/0.1 1
number
63 00 INPUTS
01 INPUT 3 Indexed String 0 0: NONE * Setting 0/7/1 1
1 1: EMERG ST.
2 2: SET GROUP
3 3: VOLT. DIP
4 4: DIST TRIG
5 5: EXT RESET
6 6: EXT 1
7 7: EXT 2
02 INPUT 4 Indexed String = INPUT 3 Setting 0/7/1 1
03 INPUT 5 Indexed String = INPUT 3 Setting 0/7/1 1
04 EXT 1 Courier floating point 0.0s Setting 0.0/200.0/0.01 1
number
number
number
number
08 Input edge type Binary (1 bit) 0 0: Up / 1: Down Setting 0/1/1 1
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
64 00 AND LOGIC EQUATIONS1
01 Therm Overload Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
02 θ Alarm Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
03 θ Forbid Start Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
04 I >> Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
05 tI >> Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
06 Io > Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
07 tIo > Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
08 Io >> Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
09 tIo >> Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
0A tIi > Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
0B tIi >> Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
0C Excess long start Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
0D t Istall Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
0E Locked rotor Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
0F tI < Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
10 Start Number limit Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
11 T betw 2 start Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
12 t RTD1 Alarm (if option RTD) Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
13 t RTD1 Trip (if option RTD) Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
16 t RTD3 Alarm (if option RTD or Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
Thermistor)
17 t RTD3 Trip (if option RTD or Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
Thermistor)
Thermistor)
1
AND LOGIC EQUATIONS - 4 bits:
bit 0: equation A
bit 1: equation B
bit 2: equation C
bit 3: equation D
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
Thermistor)
1A t RTD5 Alarm (if option RTD or Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
Thermistor)
1B t RTD5 Trip (if option RTD or Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
Thermistor)
1C t RTD6 Alarm (if option RTD or Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
Thermistor)
1D t RTD6 Trip (if option RTD or Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
Thermistor)
1E Therm. 1 (if option thermistor) Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
1F Therm. 2 (if option thermistor) Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
20 EXT1 Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
24 Success start Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
65 00 AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY

01 EQU. A Toperat Courier floating point 0.0 s* Setting 0.0/3600.0/0.1 1
number
02 EQU. A Treset Courier floating point 0.0 s* Setting 0.0/3600.0/0.1 1
number
03 EQU. B Toperat Courier floating point 0.0 s* Setting 0.0/3600.0/0.1 1
number
04 EQU. B Treset Courier floating point 0.0 s* Setting 0.0/3600.0/0.1 1
number
05 EQU. C Toperat Courier floating point 0.0 s* Setting 0.0/3600.0/0.1 1
number
06 EQU. C Treset Courier floating point 0.0 s* Setting 0.0/3600.0/0.1 1
number
07 EQU. D Toperat Courier floating point 0.0 s* Setting 0.0/3600.0/0.1 1
number
08 EQU. D Treset Courier floating point 0.0 s* Setting 0.0/3600.0/0.1 1
number
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
66 00 AUX OUTPUT RLY2
01 Therm Overload Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
02 θ Alarm Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
03 θ Forbid Start Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
04 I >> Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
05 tI >> Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
06 Io > Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
07 tIo > Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
08 Io >> Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
09 tIo >> Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
0A tIi > Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
0B tIi >> Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
0C Excess long start Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
0D t Istall Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
0E Locked rotor Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
0F tI < Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
10 Start Number limit Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
11 T betw 2 start Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
Thermistor)
Thermistor)
Thermistor)
2
AUX OUTPUT RLY - 4 bits:
bit 0: Output 2
bit 1: Output 3
bit 2: Output 4
bit 3: Output 5
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
Thermistor)
1A t RTD5 Alarm (if option RTD or Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
Thermistor)
1B t RTD5 Trip (if option RTD or Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
Thermistor)
1C t RTD6 Alarm (if option RTD or Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
Thermistor)
1D t RTD6 Trip (if option RTD or Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
Thermistor)
1E Therm. 1 (if option thermistor) Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
1F Therm. 2 (if option thermistor) Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
24 Close order Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
25 Trip order Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
26 Order 1 Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
27 Order 2 Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
28 Succes start Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
29 t EQUA Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
2A t EQUB Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
2B t EQUC Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
2C t EQUD Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
2D SW oper time Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
2E SW oper nb Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
2F SA2 Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
30 Active group Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * (0: group 1/ 1: Setting 0/15/1 1
group 2)
31 Latched relays Binary (4 bits) 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
67 00 TRIP OUPUT RLY
01 Therm overload ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
02 tI >> ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
03 tIo > ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
04 tIo >> ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
05 tIi > ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
06 tIi >> ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
07 Exces long start ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
08 tIbloq ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
09 Locked rotor ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
0A tI < ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
0B t RTD1 trip ? (if option RTD) Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
0C t RTD2 trip ? (if option RTD) Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
0D t RTD3 trip ? (if option RTD or Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
Thermistor) 1 1: YES
0E t RTD4 trip ? (if option RTD or Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
0F t RTD5 trip ? (if option RTD or Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
10 t RTD6 trip ? (if option RTD or Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
11 Thermistor 1 ? (if option thermistor) Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
12 Thermistor 2 ? (if option thermistor) Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
13 EXT1 ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
14 EXT2 ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
15 Equation A ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
16 Equation B ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
17 Equation C ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
18 Equation D ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
68 00 LATCH TRIP ORDER

01 Latching Order Binary (7 bits) 0: Latch tI>> Setting 0/63/1 1
1: Latch tIo>>
2: Latch tIi>>
3: Latch EQUA A
4: Latch EQUA B
5: Latch EQUA C
6: Latch EQUA D
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
69 00 SW SUPERVISION
01 SW Operating time? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
02 SW Operating time Courier floating point 0.05 s* Setting 0.05/1.0/0.01 1
number
03 SW Operating number? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
04 SW Operating number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0* Setting 0/50000/1 1
05 SA2n? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 1
06 Sa2n Courier floating point 0 exp+06 A² * Setting 0/4000/1 1
number (*exp+06)
07 n Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1* Setting 1/2/1 1
08 TRIP t Courier floating point 0.2 s* Setting 0.2/5.0/0.05 1
number
09 CLOSE t Courier floating point 0.2 s* Setting 0.2/5.0/0.05 1
number
6A 00 LED 5
01 Therm overload ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
02 Therm alarm ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
03 tI >> ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
04 tIo > ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
05 tIo >> ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
06 tIi > ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
07 tIi >> ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
08 tI < ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
09 Exces long start ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
0A tIstall ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
0B Locked rotor ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
0C Emerg. restart ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
0D Forbidden start ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
0E t RTD1,2,3 alarm ? (if option RTD or Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
0F t RTD1,2,3 trip ? (if option RTD or Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
10 t RTD4,5,6 alarm ? (if option RTD or Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
11 t RTD4,5,6 trip ? (if option RTD or Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
12 Thermistor 1,2 ? (if option thermistor) Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
13 EXT 1 ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
14 EXT 2 ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
15 Motor stopped ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
16 Motor running ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
17 Successful start ? Indexed string 0 0: NO * Setting 0/1/1 1
1 1: YES
6B 00 LED 6 (= LED 5)
6C 00 LED 7 (= LED 5)
6D 00 LED 8 (= LED 5)
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
70 00 RECORDER CONTROL (VERSION A2 and >)
01 Start/Trigger recorder Indexed String 0 Stopped Setting 1/2/1 1
1 Triggered
2 Running *
02 Recorder Source Indexed String 0 Samples * Data
20 Pre time Courier Number 0.1 second Setting 0.1/3.0/0.1 1
21 Post time Courier Number 0.1 second Setting 0.1/3.0/0.1 1
22 Dist. Recorder Trig Indexed String 0 ON INST Setting 0/1/1 1
1 ON TRIG
80 00 DISTURBANCE REC
01 Record Number Unsigned integer (1 byte) 0* Setting 0/5/1 (according 1
to context)
02 Trigger Time IEC870 Time & Date dd/mm/yy hh:mm Data
03 Available Channel Bit Mask Binary Flag 11111 Data
Indexed String 0 “ Ia ”
1 “ Ib ”
2 “ Ic ”
3 “ I0 ”
4 “ Inputs/Outputs ”
04 Channel Types Binary Flag 0: digital, 1: 01111 Data
analogue
05 Channel Offsets Repeated group of Upload Offsets Data
Courier numbers
06 Scaling Factors Repeated group of Upload Scal. Factors Data
Courier numbers
07-0F NON IMPLEMENTED - reserved
10 Record Length Integer (2 bytes) Data
11 Trigger position Integer (2 bytes) Data
12 Time Base Courier Number Data
13 NON IMPLEMENTED - reserved
14 Upload Timer Repeated group of Data
Integers
15-1F NON IMPLEMENTED - reserved
Communication
Values Passw
(* : default) Level
20 Upload Channel 0 Repeated group of Data
Integer/Bin. flags
Integer/Bin. flags
Integer/Bin. flags
Integer/Bin. flags
24 Upload Channel Inputs/Outputs Repeated group of Data
Integer/Bin. flags
90 00 AUTOMAT. FLT
01 Record number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 5* Setting 1/5/1 1
02 Occur fault date IEC DATE Data 1
03 Active set group Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1 Data 1
04 Phase in fault ASCII Text (14 bytes) “ PHASE A ” Data 1
05 Phase detected by ASCII Text (14 bytes) “ I >> ” Data 1
06 Magnitude Courier floating point 12.34 A Data 1
number
07 Ia Magnitude Courier floating point 12.34 A Data 1
number
08 Ib Magnitude Courier floating point 12.34 A Data 1
number
09 Ic Magnitude Courier floating point 12.34 A Data 1
number
0A In Magnitude Courier floating point 12.34 A Data 1
number
BF 00 COMM SYSTEM DATA

01 Dist Record Cntrl Ref Menu Cell (2) 0x7000 Data
02 Dist Record Extract Ref Menu Cell (2) 0x8000 Data
03 Setting Transfert ?
04 Reset Demand Timers NON IMPLEMENTE
05 Reset Event Report NON IMPLEMENTE
Communication
BLANK PAGE
Communication
IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL

Communication
BLANK PAGE
Communication
6. IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE
The IEC60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave
device. This protocol is based on the VDEW communication protocol. The relay
conforms to compatibility level 2, compatibility level 3 is not supported.
The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:
• Initialisation (Reset)
• Time Synchronisation
• Event Record Extraction
• General Interrogation
• Cyclic Measurements
• General Commands
6.1 Physical connection and link layer
Connection is available for IEC60870-5-103 through the rear RS485 port. It is
possible to select both the relay address and baud rate using the front panel
interface. Following a change, a reset command is required to re-establish
communications.
The parameters of the communication are the following :
• Even Parity
• 8 Data bits
• 1 stop bit
• Data rate 9600 or 19200 bauds
6.2 Initialisation
Whenever the relay has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have
been changed a reset command is required to initialise the communications. The
relay will respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the
difference being that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the relay’s
transmit buffer.
The relay will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5,
the Cause Of Transmission COT of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB
depending on the nature of the reset command. The following information will be
contained in the data section of this ASDU:
Manufacturer Name : Schneider Electric
The Software Identification Section will contain the first four characters of the relay
model number to identify the type of relay, eg P220.
In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered up it
will also produce a power up event.
Communication
6.3 Time synchronisation

The relay time and date can be set using the time synchronisation feature of the
IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The relay will correct for the transmission delay as
specified in IEC60870-5-103. If the time synchronisation message is sent as a
send/confirm message then the relay will respond with a confirm. Whether the time
synchronisation message is sent as a send confirm or a broadcast (send/no reply)
message, a time synchronisation message will be returned as Class 1 data.
6.4 Spontaneous events
The events created by the relay will be passed using the standard function
type/information numbers to the IEC60870-5-103 master station. Private codes are
not used, thus any events that cannot be passed using the standardised messages will
not be sent.
Events are categorised using the following information:
• Common Address
• Function Type
• Information number
Paragraph 2 contains a complete listing of all events produced by the relay. The
common address is used to differentiate in circumstances where the relay produces
more events of a certain type than can be passed using the standardised messages.
For example the relay provides 5 binary inputs however only 4 binary inputs can be
passed using the standardised messages. Using a different common address for the
5th binary allows each binary input to be indicated. The table in Paragraph 2 shows
the common address as an offset value. The common address offset will be added to
the station address in order to pass these events.
6.5 General interrogation
The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers,
information numbers and common address offsets that will be returned during the GI
cycle are indicated in Paragraph 2.
6.6 Cyclic measurements
The relay will produce measured values using ASDU 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be
read from the relay using a Class 2 poll (note ADSU 3 is not used).
It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as a
proportion of 2.4 times the rated value of the analogue value.
6.7 Commands
A list of the supported commands is contained in Paragraph 2. The relay will respond
to other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative
acknowledgement of a command.
6.8 Disturbance records
The disturbance records stored by the relay cannot be extracted using the mechanism
defined in the IEC60870-5-103 standard. The relay maintains compatibility with the
VDEW control system by transmitting an ASDU 23 with no disturbance records at the
start of every GI cycle.
6.9 Blocking of monitor direction
The relay does not support a facility to block messages in the Monitor direction.
Communication
7. IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASES

List of events produced by the relay
Two kinds of ASDU can be generated for the events : ASDU 1 (time-tagged message)
or ASDU2 (Time-tagged message with relative time)
The list of events is the following with the associated values : INFORMATION
NUMBER, TYPE OF ASDU ,CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION and COMMON ADDRESS OF
ASDU
Status indication in monitor direction :
− LED reset : INF <19>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− Local Mode: INF <22>;TYP <1>; COT<1>, < ADDRESS> ↑↓
− Setting group 1 : INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↑↓
− Setting group 2 : INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↑↓
− Aux input 1 : INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↑↓
− Logic input 1 : INF <161>; TYP <1>; COT <1>, < ADDRESS> ↑↓
− Output relay 1: INF <176>; TYP <1>; COT <1>, < ADDRESS> ↑↓
Fault indications in monitor direction :
− Instantaneous I>> : INF <65>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> ↑↓
− Instantaneous Ie > : INF <96>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> ↑↓
− Instantaneous Ie >> : INF <97>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> ↑↓
− Instantaneous Ie> or Ie>> : INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> ↑↓
(general earth)
− Instantaneous I< : INF <100>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> ↑↓
− Instantaneous Iinv > : INF <104>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> ↑↓
Communication
− Instantaneous Iinv >> : INF <106>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> ↑↓

− General TRIP : INF <68>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS>
− TRIP L1 : INF <69>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS>
− TRIP L2 : INF <70>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− TRIP L3 : INF <71>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− General start : INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↑↓
(“OR” of the instantaneous signals)
− TRIP I>> : INF <91>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− TRIP Ie> : INF <92>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− TRIP Ie>>: INF <93>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− TRIP I< : INF <101>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− TRIP Iinv > : INF <105>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− TRIP Iinv >> : INF <107>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− Thermal ALARM : INF <110>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↑↓
− Thermal Overload : INF <111>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− Blocked Rotor : INF <109>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− Blocked Rotor at Starting : INF <113>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− Excess Long Start : INF <120>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− RTD ALARM : INF <122>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↑↓
− RTD TRIP : INF <123>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− Thermistor TRIP : INF <125>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− TRIP Logic equation 1 : INF <86>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
Auto reclosure indications :
− “Closed” Position : INF <140>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> ↑↓
− “Open” Position : INF <141>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> ↑↓
− TRIPPING contact : INF <142>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> ↑↓
− Closing contact : INF <143>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> ↑↓
N.B. : The double arrow ↑ ↓ means the event is generated on event
occurrence and another is generated on event disappearance.
Communication
List of data contained in General Interrogation

Status indication in monitor direction :
− Local Mode : INF <22>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, <ADDRESS>
− Setting group 1 : INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>
− Setting group 2 : INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>
− Aux input 1 : INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>
− Logic input 1 : INF <161>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, < ADDRESS>
− Output relay 1: INF <176>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, < ADDRESS>
Fault indications in monitor direction :
− Instantaneous Ie> or Ie>>: INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT <9>,<ADDRESS>
(General earth)
− General start : INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>
(“OR” of the instantaneous signals)
Auto reclosure indications :
− “Closed” Position : INF <140>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDRESS>
− “Open” Position : INF <141>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDRESS>
Cyclic measurements
First measurement : ASDU 9 (INF <148>):
Only the RMS phase currents and the measured frequency are transmitted in
standard format.
The scaling factor is 2.4 for all the measurement ( e.g. 2.4* nominal values = 4096)
The other measurements in ASDU 9 are indicated as “NON Significant”.
Communication
Second measurement ASDU 77 (INF<149>):

5 measurements: In, I inverse, I direct, Thermal state (%), and the Full load current
(%).
These values are conforms to the floating Format of the IEEE 32 bits. They are not
standardised.
Third measurement ASDU 77 (INF <150>):
RTD1 to RTD6 measurements if RTD option is present.
Thermistor1 and 2 measurements plus RTD3, RTD4, RTD5, RTD6 if option is present.
These values are conforms to the floating Format of the IEEE 32 bits. They are not
standardised.
List of the supported commands
− LED reset . This command corresponds to the acknowledgement of all alarms
by the front plate on MiCOM P220 products : INF<19>, TYP<20>, COT
<20>
− Setting group 1 : INF<23>; TYP<20>; COT <20>
− Setting group 2 : INF<23>; TYP<20>; COT <20>
− TRIPPING Contact : INF <142>; TYP<20>; COT <20>
− Closing Contact : INF <143>; TYP<20>; COT <20>
These commands make object of an acknowledgement by ASDU 1, positive if
COT= <20> or negative if COT = <21>.
Technical Guide P220/EN SV/B43
MiCOM P220
Default Setting Value

Default Setting Values
CONTENTS
1. DEFAULT SETTING VALUES 3

1.1 OP PARAMETERS menu 3
1.2 CONFIGURATION menu 3
1.2.1 CONFIG. SELECT submenu 3
1.2.2 CT RATIO submenu 3
1.2.3 LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus 4
1.1.4 Configuration Inputs submenu 4
1.1.5 Date Format submenu 4
1.3 COMMUNICATION Menu 5
1.3.1 Courier 5
1.3.2 MODBUSTM menu 5
1.4 PROTECTION G1 and G2 Menus 5
1.4.1 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu. 5
1.1.2 [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu 5
1.4.3 [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu 6
1.4.4 [46] UNBALANCE submenu 6
1.4.5 [48] EXCES LONG START submenu 6
1.4.6 [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu 6
1.4.7 [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu 6
1.4.8 [49/38] RTD submenu (optional) 7
1.4.9 [49] THERMISTOR submenu (optional) 8
1.5 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu 8
1.5.1 [66] START NUMBER submenu 8
1.5.2 MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu 8
1.5.3 REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu 8
1.5.4 INPUTS submenu 8
1.5.5 AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu 9
1.5.6 AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu 10
1.5.7 AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu 10
1.5.8 LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS submenu 11
1.5.9 TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu 12
1.5.10 LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu 12
1.5.11 SW SUPERVISION submenu 13
1.6 CONSIGNATION Menu 13
1.6.1 DISTURB RECORD submenu 13
P220/EN SV/B43 Technical Guide
BLANK PAGE
1. DEFAULT SETTING VALUES

The MiCOM P220 relay leaves the factory with the following default setting values :
1.1 OP PARAMETERS menu
Password AAAA
Reference ALST
Frequency 50 Hz
Date 29/01/94
Time 00:00:00
1.2 CONFIGURATION menu

1.2.1 CONFIG. SELECT submenu
Change Group Input EDGE

Setting Group 1
Default display IA RMS (phase A current)
Start detection criterion 52A (closing of the CB)
Analogue output type (optional) 4 - 20 mA
Value transmitted by the analogue output IA RMS (phase A current)
(optional)
RTD type (optional) PT100
Thermistor 1 type (optional) PTC
Thermistor 2 type (optional) PTC
1.2.2 CT RATIO submenu
Primary rating of the phase CT 1

Secondary rating of the phase CT 1
Primary rating of the earth CT 1
Secondary rating of the earth CT 1
1.2.3 LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus
LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8

Allocation : Thermal overload No No No No
Allocation : Thermal alarm θ ALARM No No No No
Allocation : tI>> No No No No
Allocation : tIo> No No No No
Allocation : tIo>> No No No No
Allocation : tIi> No No No No
Allocation : tIi>> No No No No
Allocation : tI< No No No No
Allocation : Excessive long start No No No No
Allocation : tIstall (stalled rotor while No No No No
running)
Allocation : Locked rotor (at start) No No No No
Allocation : Emergency restart No No No No
Allocation : Forbidden start No No No No
Allocation : tALARM RTD1, tALARM RTD2, tALARM RTD3 No No No No
(optional)
Allocation : tDECL RTD1, tDECL RTD2, tDECL RTD3 No No No No
(optional)
Allocation : tALARM RTD4, tALARM RTD5, tALARM RTD6 No No No No
(optional)
Allocation : tDECL RTD4, tDECL RTD5, tDECL RTD6 No No No No
(optional)
Allocation : Thermist 1 and Thermist 2 No No No No
(optional)
Allocation : EXT 1 No No No No
Allocation : EXT 2 No No No No
Allocation : Motor Stopped No No No No
Allocation : Motor running No No No No
Allocation : Successful start No No No No
1.2.4 Configuration Inputs submenu
Inputs : 54321 11111
1.2.5 Date Format submenu
Date Format PRIVATE
Only if Courier Protocol, otherwise, this submenu will be implemented in

COMMUNICATION Menu.
1.3 COMMUNICATION Menu

1.3.1 Courier

Relay address 255
1.3.2 MODBUSTM menu

Data rate 19 200 Bauds
Parity Without
Numbe of data bits 8
Number of stop bits 1
Relay address 1
Format date Private
1.4 PROTECTION G1 and G2 Menus

1.4.1 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu.
PROTECTION G1 PROTECTION G2
Thermal overload function enabled ? No No
« Thermal inhibition on starting » function No No
enabled ?
Threshold Iθ> 0,2 In 0,2 In
Ke 3 3
Te1 1 minute 1 minute
Te2 1 minute 1 minute
Tr 1 minute 1 minute
Influence RTD (optional) No No
Thermal alarm enabled ? No No
Thermal alrm θALARM threshold 20 % 20 %
Thermal inhibition of start enabled ? No No
θ FORDID START threshold 20 % 20 %
1.4.2 [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu
Short-circuit function enabled ? No No
Threshold I>> 1 In 1 In
tI>> 0 second 0 second
1.4.3 [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu
Io> element of the earth fault function No No
enabled ?
Threshold Io> 0,002 In 0,002 In
tIo> 0 second 0 second
Io>> element of the earth fault function No No
enabled ?
Threshold Io>> 0,002 In 0,002 In
tIo>> 0 second 0 second
1.4.4 [46] UNBALANCE submenu
Ii> element of the unbalance function No No
enabled ?
Threshold Ii> 0,05 In 0,05 In
tIi> 0,04 second 0,04 second
Ii>> element of the unbalance function No No
enabled ?
Threshold Ii>> 0,2 In 0,2 In
1.4.5 [48] EXCES LONG START submenu
Excessive long start function enabled ? No No
Threshold Istart 1 Iθ 1 Iθ
TIstart 1 second 1 second
1.4.6 [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu
Block rotor function enabled ? No No
tIstall 0,1 second 0,1 second
Stalled rotor function enabled ? No No
Threshold Istall 1 Iθ 1 Iθ
Locked rotor at start function enabled ? No No
1.4.7 [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu
Loss of load function enabled ? No No
Threshold I< 0,1 In 0,1 In
tI< 0,2 second 0,2 second
Tinhib 0,05 second 0,05 second
1.4.8 [49/38] RTD submenu (optional)
RTD1 enabled ? No No
ALARM RTD1 0 °C 0 °C
tALARM RTD1 0 second 0 second
DECL RTD1 0 °C 0 °C
tDECL RTD1 0 second 0 second
1.4.9 [49] THERMISTOR submenu (optional)
Thermistor 1 enabled No No
Thermist 1 0,1 kΩ 0,1 kΩ
Thermistor 2 enabled No No
Thermist 2 0,1 kΩ 0,1 kΩ
1.5 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu

1.5.1 [66] START NUMBER submenu
Start Number Limitation function No

eneabled ?
Treference 10 minutes
Cold start number 0
Hot start number 0
Tinterdiction 1 minute
1.5.2 MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu
Time Between Start function enabled ? No

Tentre 2 dem 1 minute
1.5.3 REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu
Reacceleration authorization function No

enabled ?
Treacc 0,2 second
1.5.4 INPUTS submenu
Allocation : input n°3 NONE

Time delay EXT 1 0 second
1.5.5 AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu
D C B A
Allocation : Thermal overload 0 0 0 0
Allocation : Thermal alarm θ ALARM 0 0 0 0
Allocation : θ FORBID START 0 0 0 0
Allocation : I>> 0 0 0 0
Allocation : tI>> 0 0 0 0
Allocation : Io> 0 0 0 0
Allocation : tIo> 0 0 0 0
Allocation : Io>> 0 0 0 0
Allocation : tIo>> 0 0 0 0
Allocation : tIi> 0 0 0 0
Allocation : tIi>> 0 0 0 0
Allocation : Excessive long start 0 0 0 0
Allocation : tIstall (stalled rotor while 0 0 0 0
running)
Allocation : Locked rotor (at start) 0 0 0 0
Allocation : tI< 0 0 0 0
Allocation : Start Nb Limitation 0 0 0 0
Allocation : Tbetw 2 Start 0 0 0 0
Allocation : t ALARM RTD1 (optional) 0 0 0 0
Allocation : tDECL RTD1 (optional) 0 0 0 0
Allocation : tALARM RTD2 (optional) 0 0 0 0
Allocation : Thermist 1 (optional) 0 0 0 0
Allocation : EXT 1 0 0 0 0
Allocation : Successful start 0 0 0 0
1.5.6 AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu
EQU. A Toperat 0 second

EQU. A Treset 0 second
EQU. B Toperat 0 second
EQU. B Treset 0 second
EQU. C Toperat 0 second
EQU. C Treset 0 second
EQU. D Toperat 0 second
EQU. D Treset 0 second
1.5.7 AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu
5 4 3 2
Allocation : Thermal overload 0 0 0 0
Allocation : Thermal alarm θ ALARM 0 0 0 0
Allocation : θ FORBID START 0 0 0 0
Allocation : I>> 0 0 0 0
Allocation : tI>> 0 0 0 0
Allocation : Io> 0 0 0 0
Allocation : tIo> 0 0 0 0
Allocation : Io>> 0 0 0 0
Allocation : tIo>> 0 0 0 0
Allocation : tIi> 0 0 0 0
Allocation : tIi>> 0 0 0 0
Allocation : Excessive long start 0 0 0 0
Allocation : tIstall (stalled rotor while 0 0 0 0
running)
Allocation : Locked rotor (at start) 0 0 0 0
Allocation : tI< 0 0 0 0
Allocation : Start Nb Limitation 0 0 0 0
Allocation : Tbetw 2 Start 0 0 0 0
Allocation : t ALARM RTD1 (optional) 0 0 0 0
5 4 3 2
Allocation : Close order (com RS485) 0 0 0 0
Allocation : Trip order (com RS485) 0 0 0 0
Allocation : order 1 (com RS485) 0 0 0 0
Allocation : order 2 (com RS485) 0 0 0 0
Allocation : Successful start 0 0 0 0
Allocation : t EQU. A 0 0 0 0
Allocation : t EQU. B 0 0 0 0
Allocation : t EQU. C 0 0 0 0
Allocation : t EQU. D 0 0 0 0
Allocation : SW Operating Time 0 0 0 0
Allocation : SW Operation Nb 0 0 0 0
Allocation : S A n 0 0 0 0
Active Group 0 0 0 0
1.5.8 LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS submenu
OUTPUT 2 No
OUTPUT 3 No
OUTPUT 4 No
OUTPUT 5 No
1.5.9 TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu
Allocation output relay n°1 : Thermal overload No

Allocation output relay n°1 : tI>> No
Allocation output relay n°1 : tIo> No
Allocation output relay n°1 : tIo>> No
Allocation output relay n°1 : tIi> No
Allocation output relay n°1 : tIi>> No
Allocation output relay n°1 : Excessive long start No
Allocation output relay n°1 : tIbloq (stalled rotor while running) No
Allocation output relay n°1 : Locked rotor (at start) No
Allocation output relay n°1 : tI< No
Allocation output relay n°1 : tDECL RTD1 (optional) No
Allocation output relay n°1 : Thermist 1 (optional) No
Allocation output relay n°1 : Thermist 2 (optional) No
Allocation output relay n°1 : EXT 1 No
Allocation output relay n°1 : EXT 2 No
Allocation output relay n°1 : Equation A No
Allocation output relay n°1 : Equation B No
Allocation output relay n°1 : Equation C No
Allocation output relay n°1 : Equation D No
1.5.10 LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu
Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH tI>> No

Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH tIo>> No
Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH tIi>> No
Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH equa A No
Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH equa B No
Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH equa C No
Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH equa D No
1.5.11 SW SUPERVISION submenu
SW Operating Time function enabled ? No

SW Operating Time 0 ,05 second
SW Operation Number function No
enabled ?
SW Operation Number 0
S A n function enabled ? No
SAn 0
Exponent n value 1
Trip T 0,2 second
Close T 0,2 second
1.6 CONSIGNATION Menu

1.6.1 DISTURB RECORD submenu
Pre-Time 0,1 second

Post-Time 0,1 second
Disturbance Rocord Trig ON INST
BLANK PAGE
Technical Guide P220/EN IN/B43
MiCOM P220
Installation Guide
Installation Guide
MiCOM P220 Page 1/8
CONTENT
1. RECEPTION OF THE RELAYS 3
2. HANDLING ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT 3
3. STORAGE 4
4. UNPACKING 4
5. INSTALLING THE RELAYS 4
6. DIMENSIONS 5
6.1 Connection of power terminals, and Signals terminals 5
6.2 Communication port RS485 6
6.3 Earthing 6
7. CASE DIMENSIONS 7
P220/EN IN/B43 Technical Guide
Installation Guide
Page 2/8 MiCOM P220
BLANK PAGE
Installation Guide
MiCOM P220 Page 3/8
1. RECEPTION OF THE RELAYS

Protection relays are generally robust. However it is appropriate to treat them with
care before installing them on site. As soon as they arrive, the relays should be
examined immediately, looking for any deterioration which could have occurred
during transport. If there is any deterioration, make a claim against the forwarding
company and inform Schneider Electric as soon as possible.
Relays not intended for immediate installation must be stored in their protective
polyethylene packaging.
2. HANDLING ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

The usual movements of a person easily generate electrostatic energy which may
reach several thousand volts. The discharging of this voltage into devices comprising
semiconductors, when handling electronic circuits, can cause severe deterioration.
Such damage is not necessarily visible immediately. Nevertheless, it reduces the
reliability of the circuit.
Electronic circuits are completely protected against any electrostatic discharge when
inside their housing. Do not expose them to any risk by needlessly taking the
modules out of their housings.
Each module has the best possible protection for its devices consisting of
semiconductors. However, should it be necessary to withdraw the module from its
housing, please take the following precautions to preserve the great reliability and
long service life for which the equipment was designed and manufactured.
1. Before taking the module out of its housing, touch the housing to balance your
electrostatic potential.
2. When handling the module, hold it by its front plate, or by its frame or by the
edges of the printed circuit board. Do not touch the electronic components, the
printed circuit conductors and the connectors.
3. Before passing the module to another person, shake hands with him or her for
example to balance your electrostatic potential.
4. Place the module on an antistatic surface or an electrically conductive surface
with the same potential as yourself.
5. To store or transport the module, place it in conductive packaging.
If you carry out any measurements on the internal electronic circuits of a device in
service, earth yourself to exposed conductive parts by linking yourself to the housing
by a conductive strap attached to your wrist. The resistance to earth of the conductive
strap which you attach to your wrist and to the housing must be between 500 kΩ and
10 MΩ. If you do not have a device of this type, you must remain permanently in
contact with the housing to prevent any static energy accumulating. The instruments
used to take the measurements must be earthed to the housing insofar as this is
possible.
For further information on the procedures for safe working with all the electronic
equipment, please consult standards BS5783 and IEC 147-OF. In a special handling
area we strongly advise you to undertake a detailed analysis of the electronic circuits
and working conditions according to the BS and IEC standards mentioned above.
Installation Guide
Page 4/8 MiCOM P220
3. STORAGE
If the relays do not have to be installed immediately on reception, they must be stored
protected against dust and humidity in their original carton. If dehumidifying crystals
are placed in the relay packaging, it is advisable not to remove them. The effect of
the dehumidifying crystals is reduced if the packaging is exposed to ambient
conditions. To restore their original effectiveness, you need only to heat the crystals
slightly for around an hour, before replacing them in their delivery carton.
As soon as the packaging is opened, the dust which has accumulated on the carton
risks settling on the relays. In the presence of moisture, the carton and the packaging
can become humidified to the point where the effectiveness of the dehumidifying
crystals is reduced.
The temperature for storage should remain between - 25 °C and + 70 °C.
4. UNPACKING
When unpacking and installing relays, take great care to avoid damaging the parts
and changing the settings. Relays must be handled only by people who are experts
in this field. As far as possible, the installation must remain clean, dry, free from dust
and free from excessive vibration. The site must be well lit to facilitate inspection.
Relays removed from their housings must not be exposed to dust or humidity. To this
end, it is necessary to take great care when installing relays whilst construction work is
taking place on the same site.
5. INSTALLING THE RELAYS

The relays are supplied either individually or mounted in a cubicle. If separate relays
have to be installed according to a particular drawing, please follow the mounting
details indicated in publication R7012. If a MMLG test unit has to be incorporated,
position it to the right of the set of relays (looking at them from the front). The
modules must still be protected in their metal housings during installation on a
cubicle. The design of the relays makes it possible to reach the mounting holes easily
without taking off the cover. For individually mounted relays, a positioning diagram
is normally supplied to indicate the centre of the holes and the layout of the cubicle.
The corresponding dimensions are also indicated in publication N 1509.
Installation Guide
MiCOM P220 Page 5/8
6. DIMENSIONS
6.1 Connection of power terminals, and Signals terminals
The individual equipment are delivered with sufficient M4 screws to connect the relay
via annular terminals, with a maximum recommended of two annular terminals per
contact.
If necessary, Schneider Electric can provide annular terminals to crimp. 5 references
exist according to the section of the wire (see below). Each reference corresponds to a
sachet of 100 terminals.
Push-on connector 4.8 x 0.8 (wire size 0.75 - 1.5mm²)

Schneider Electric reference: ZB9128 015
Push-on connector 4.8 x 0.8mm (wire size 1.5 - 2.5mm²)

Schneider Electric reference: ZB9128 016
P0166ENc
M4 90˚ Ring Tongue terminal (wire size 0.25 - 1.65mm²)

Schneider Electric reference, Stafford part number ZB9124 901
M4 90˚ Ring Tongue terminal (wire size 1.5 - 2.5mm²)

Schneider Electric reference, Stafford part number ZB9124 900
P0167ENc
M4 90° Ring Tongue Terminal (wire size 2.53-6.64 mm²)/12-10AWG.

Reference Schneider Electric, Stafford part number ZB9124 904 – Not isolated.
Installation Guide
Page 6/8 MiCOM P220
To insure the insulation of the terminals and to respect the security and safety
instructions, an isolated sleeve can be used.
We recommend the following cable cross-sections:
− Auxiliary sources Vaux : 1.5 mm²
− Communication Port see paragraph 6.2
− Other circuits 1.0 mm²
Because of the limitations of the annular terminals, the maximum wire cross-section
which can be used for the connector blocks (for current inputs and signals) is of
6mm² by using non -insulated annular terminals. When only pre- insulated terminals
can be used, the maximum wire cross-section is reduced to 2, 63 mm² per annular
terminal. If a more significant wire cross-section is necessary, two wires can be put in
parallel, each one finished by a separate annular terminal.
All the terminal blocks used for connections, except of the port RS485, must be able
to withstand a nominal voltage of minimum 300V peak value.
We recommend to protect the auxiliary source connection by using a fuse of type NIT
or TIA with a breaking capacity of 16A. For security reasons, do never install fuses in
current transformers circuits. The other circuits must be protected by fuses.
6.2 Communication port RS485
Connections to RS485 is made using annular terminals. It is recommended that a two
core screened cable, is used with a maximum total length of 1000 m or a200nF total
cable capacitance.
− Each core : 16/0.2 mm copper conductor, PVC insulated.
− Nominal conductor area : 0.5 mm² per core
− Screen : Overall braid, PVC sheathed
− Linear capacitance between conductor and earth : 100pF/m
Refer to chapter 2 paragraph 2.7.5 of this technical guide to get the RS232/RS485
converter references.
6.3 Earthing
Each equipment must be connected to a local earth terminal by the intermediary of a
M4 earth terminals. We recommend a wire of minimal section of 2,5 mm², with
annular terminals on the side of the equipment. Because of the limitations of the
annular terminals, the possible maximum section is of 6mm² by wire. If a larger
section is necessary, one can use cables connected in parallel, each one ending with
an annular terminal separated on the side of the equipment. One can also use a
metal bar.
NOTE: To prevent any electrolytic risk between copper conductor or
brass conductor and the back plate of the equipment, it is
necessary to take precautions to isolate them one from the other.
This can be done in several ways, for example by inserting
between the conductor and the case a plated nickel or insulated
ring washer or by using a tin terminals.
Installation Guide
MiCOM P220 Page 7/8
7. CASE DIMENSIONS
MiCOM P220 relays are available in a 4U metal case for panel or flush mounting.
Weight : about 2.5 Kg
External size : Height Case 152.2 mm
Front panel 177 mm
Width Case 148,1 mm
Front panel 155 mm
Depth Case (flush part) 140,8 mm
Case + Front panel 166 mm
NOTE : For flush mounting, use the screws supplied by Schneider Electric
or others with head diameter smaller than the hole of the front
face.
In contrary, the active part will not be able to be plugged
properly (do not add washers).
Installation Guide
Page 8/8 MiCOM P220
BLANK PAGE
Technical Guide P220/EN CM/B43
MiCOM P220
Commissioning and Maintenance

of the MiCOM P220 Relay
Commissioning & Maintenance
CONTENT
1. REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING 3
2. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR TESTING 3

2.1 Important notes 3
2.1.1 Warning concerning the test methodology 3
2.1.2 Injection test boxes 3
2.1.3 Additional test equipments 3
2.1.4 Communication 3
2.2 Commissioning test records 4
3. PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS 4

3.1 Allocation of terminals 4
3.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 4
3.3 Visual inspection 4
3.4 Earthing 4
3.5 Current transformers (CTs) 5
3.5.1 Use of a Core Balance CT for earth faults. 5
3.5.2 Cable shields and core balance CT 5
3.5.3 Phase CTs orientation 6
3.6 Auxiliary supply 6
4. COMMISSIONING 7
4.1 Settings 7
4.2 Measurements 7
4.3 Thermal replica 7
4.3.1 Test wiring diagram 8
4.3.2 Alarm threshold θALARM test, trip threshold test, and thermal constant time Te1 test. 9
4.3.3 Alarm threshold θALARM test, trip threshold test, and thermal constant time Te2 test. 10
4.3.4 Cooling down constant time Tr test. 10
4.3.5 θ FORBID START threshold test. 11
4.3.6 Numerical example 12
4.4 Phase overcurrent: I>> 13
4.4.2 I>> threshold 13
4.5 Earth overcurrent : Io>, Io>> 14
P220/EN CM/B43 Technical Guide

4.5.2 Io> threshold 15
4.5.3 Io>> threshold 15
4.6 Negative phase sequence threshold(46) 16
4.6.2 I2> threshold 17
4.6.3 I2>> threshold 17
4.7 Automation functions 18
4.7.1 Latching of relay outputs 18
4.7.2 Wiring diagram 19
4.8 Commissioning parameters data base 20
4.8.1 PROTECTION Menu 20
4.8.2 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu 21
5. INTRODUCTION 22
6. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE 22
7. MAINTENANCE CHECKS 23
7.1 Alarms 23
7.2 Opto-isolators 23
7.3 Output Relays 23
8. METHOD OF REPAIR 24
9. CHANGING THE BATTERY 25
10. TYPES OF FAULTS 26

10.1 Equipment failure 26
10.1.1 Minor faults 26
10.1.2 Major faults 26
10.2 Problem solving 27
10.2.1 Password lost or not accepted 27
10.2.2 Communication 27
11. LIST OF THE RELAY ALARM MESSAGES 28
12. LIST OF THE MOTOR ALARM MESSAGES 29

1. REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING

BEFORE COMMISSIONING THE RELAY, THE SAFETY SECTION OF THE MANUAL MUST BE
READ.
When commissioning the MiCOM relay for the first time, 1/4 hour should be allowed
to become familiar with the menu (“MENU OF THE HMI” section).
With a laptop computer and Schneider Electric setting software MiCOM S1, the user
can configure the MiCOM P220 relay and save this setting on to a floppy disk. This
file can subsequently be downloaded via the RS232 front port or via the RS 485 link
on the rear of the MiCOM relays.
2. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR TESTING

2.1 Important notes
2.1.1 Warning concerning the test methodology
The test methodology described in this document tries as much as possible not to
modify the settings of the MiCOM P220 relay once these have been set so as to help
the tests and avoid errors.
A reference commissioning configuration file (MiCOM P220) is provided in
Chapter 8-3.
All the tests of the MiCOM P220 relays are carried out by injecting currents to the
secondary of the earth and/or phase CTs using appropriate injection test sets
provided for this purpose.
2.1.2 Injection test boxes
For reasons of convenience (weight, spatial requirement, transportation), a single-
phase injection test set is more suitable for the tests and is able to perform all the tests
relating to the MiCOM P220 relay.
Thus, the following descriptions indicate how to conduct the tests with a single-phase
injection test set.
However, for certain tests, the three-phase wiring diagrams are easier to understand
and, in this case, the description is also given in three-phase format.
Single-phase injection test set
1 current (0 to 50 A), timer (precision 1 ms).
Three-phase injection test set
3 currents (0 to 50 A), timer (precision 1 ms).
2.1.3 Additional test equipments
⇒ 2 multimeters (precision 1%),
⇒ 1 clip-on ammeter to measure the currents exceeding 10 A (precision 2%),
⇒ Test plugs and wires to carry out injections to the CTs secondary
(dimensions according to the currents injected).
2.1.4 Communication
For all tests, the records can be made by using either the RS 485 rear port or the
RS232 front port of the relay.
2.2 Commissioning test records

Commissioning test records are available in the Chapter 8-3.
The presentation of the Commissioning test records follows the sequence of the tests
of this chapter.
The contents of these Commissioning test records enable you to log:
• The name of the relay, station and circuit/plant
• The characteristics of the MiCOM P220 relay
• The various settings
• The results of the tests
3. PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS

3.1 Allocation of terminals
It is necessary to consult the appropriate wiring diagram of the MiCOM P220 whilst
observing the various polarities and ground/earth connection.
3.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
Before any handling of the module (active part of the relay), please refer to the
recommendations in the “SAFETY” section.
3.3 Visual inspection
Carefully examine the relay to see if there has been any possible deterioration
following installation.
Check the serial number under the upper flap of the front panel. Also inspect the
stated nominal values and the model number.
Check if the external wiring corresponds to the appropriate relay diagram or the
assembly diagram.
When the relay is withdrawn from its case, use a continuity tester to check if the
current short-circuits (phases and earth CTs) between the terminals indicated on the
wiring diagram are closed.
3.4 Earthing
Check if the earth connection of the case situated above the rear terminal block is
used to connect the relay to a local earth bar. With several relays present, make sure
that the copper earth bar is properly installed for solidly connecting the earthing
terminals of each case.
3.5 Current transformers (CTs)

DANGER : NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT
TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL
AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION.
3.5.1 Use of a Core Balance CT for earth faults.
If a core balance CT is used to detect earth faults, prior to any test, the user must
check the following points:
1. MV cable screens and core balance CT,
2. No current flow through the MV cables.
3.5.2 Cable shields and core balance CT
When mounting a core balance CT around electric cables, check the connection to
the earth of the cable shields. It is vital that the earth cable of the shield moves in the
opposite direction through the core balance CT. This cancels the currents carried by
the cable shields through the core balance CT.
Electrical cables directed

to the busbar Screen shields
P1 S1
P2 S2
Other ends
of electrical cables
P0041ENa
FIGURE 1 - SCREEN SHIELDS AND CORE BALANCE CT

3.5.3 Phase CTs orientation

It is necessary to check the orientation of the phase CTs by using the following
method for instance:
Have available a centre point analogue ammeter. Temporarily short-circuit the
battery by checking the diagram polarities (+ on P1 and – on P2). A positive current
pulse traverses the milliammeter and the needle shall turn in a positive direction .
Proceed this test for each phase CT.
P1 S1 _
+ mA
+
_
P2 S2
P0043ENa
FIGURE 2 - PHASE CT ORIENTATION TEST

NOTE : De-magnetise the CT after the test. Inject a current starting from
zero and slowly cross the CT nominal value and then decrease
slowly to zero.
3.6 Auxiliary supply
Check the value of the auxiliary supply voltage (terminals 33 and 34). The value
measured shall be between 0.8 and 1.2 times the auxiliary supply nominal voltage
indicated on the MiCOM P220 front panel (under the upper flap).
Relay auxiliary voltage range * Auxiliary voltage range for the

Cortec code
(Volts) logic inputs * (Volts)
A 24 – 60 Vdc 19 – 60 Vdc
F 48 – 150 Vdc 32 – 150 Vdc
M 130-250 Vdc 48 – 250 Vdc
100-250 Vca
* The tolerance on the auxiliary voltage variations is –20/+20%.

4. COMMISSIONING
The various operations described in this section are not exhaustive, but combine
functions of MiCOM P220 relay which are able to confirm that the relay is
operational. The use of appropriate Schneider Electric setting software connected to
either the RS485 rear port or the RS232 front is not obligatory. The various
indications associated with each commissioning module are described for the
MiCOM P220 front panel display (LCD and LEDs).
Commissioning covers the following points:
1. Input of settings,
2. Validation of measurements,
3. Validation of the thermal replica : Iθ>, θALARM, θFORBID START, Te1, Te2, Tr (49)
4. Validation of phase protection thresholds and time delays : I>>, tI>> (50/51)
5. Validation of earth protection thresholds and time delays : Io>, tIo>, Io>>, t
Io>> (50N/51N)
6. Validation of the Negative Sequence thresholds I2> and I2>> (46)
7. Validation of the automation function: latching of the relay outputs.
4.1 Settings
Input into the Commissioning Test Report file all of the settings of the MiCOM P220
relay.
4.2 Measurements
The MiCOM P220 relay measures phase and earth currents as a True RMS value up
to the 10th harmonic. The value(s) indicated take account of the phase and/or earth
CT ratio.
WARNING: MiCOM P220 RELAY HAS 1 AND 5 AMP CURRENT INPUTS.
CHECK THAT THE INJECTED CURRENT IS COMPATIBLE WITH THE
SELECTED RANGE
• Bring forward to the Setting report the values of phase and earth CTs.
• Energise the MiCOM P220 relay.
• Apply to each current input (as per wiring diagram) a current and check the
values on the LCD display.
• Carry forward the results to the Commissioning test report (Applied values and
relay values displayed)
4.3 Thermal replica
Assign the thermal overload protective function to the trip output contact (relay RL1)
and assign the θALARM protective function to an auxiliary output contact, RL2 for
example. Set Ke equal to 3. In order to save time during testing, it is advisible to set
all the thermal time constants to 5 minutes.
The thermal operating time is given by the following:

t = T ln [((Ieq / Iθ>)2 – θi) / [((Ieq / Iθ>)2 – θthresh] = T ln [(K2 – θi) /(K2 – θthresh)]
where : t = operating time in seconds
T = thermal time constant value in seconds
Ieq = equivalent thermal current value
Iθ> = thermal overload current threshold
K = Ieq / Iθ> ratio
θi = initial thermal state value ; in our case θi equal to 0.
θthresh = alarm threshold (settable) or tripping threshold (fixed value equal
to 1)
This test is done by a single-phase injection, it results in that the relay sees equal
current magnitudes for both positive and negative phase sequence quantities. Upon
injection of a single phase current value equal to Iinject, the relay will see current
magnitudes of Iinject/3 for both positive and negative phase sequences quantities. The
equivalent thermal current value Ieq calculated by the relay will be given by the
following:
Ieq = (Ipositive2 + Ke . Inegative2 )0.5 = [(Iinject/3)2 + 3 . (Iinject/3)2]0,5 = 2/3 . Iinject
Therefore, for an inject current value (Iinject ) equal to 3/2 . K . Iθ> , the thermal
equivalent current seen by the relay will be equal to K . Iθ>.
NOTE: When the Ke factor is not set to 3, in order for the relay to see a
current equal to K. Iθ>, the injected current value Iinject, ,will
need to be equal to :
[3/(1+Ke)0,5] . K . Iθ>
4.3.1 Test wiring diagram
The following diagram should be followed to tests the thermal replica.
This diagram describes current injection on the 5 Amp phase current inputs (terminals
41-42, 43-44, 45-46). To carry out injection on the 1 Amp phase inputs, perform the
same test on the 1 Amp inputs (terminals 49-50, 51-52, 53-54).
INJECTION
TEST SET
33
AUXILIARY + Vaux
SUPPLY - Vaux 34
22
SWITCH 24
L1 Binary input 1
49
A
1A
50
51
1A
CURRENT
MiCOM
52
53
1A 1A
N
P220
54
41
A
5A
42
43
CURRENT 5A
5A 44
45
5A
N 46
37
35
36 WD Watchdog powered on
6
TIMERS Stop 4
2 RL1 Trip output Case earth
12 29
-
Stop 10
RL2
Programmable output * 30
8
31 RS 485
18 +
16 Programmable output Communication port
RL3
14 32 -
P0213ENa
FIGURE 3 - THERMAL REPLICA TESTS WIRING

4.3.2 Alarm threshold θALARM test, trip threshold test, and thermal constant time Te1 test.
1. The binary input No 1 (terminals 22-24) should be kept energise during this
test.
2. Within the PROCESS menu, reset the thermal status value θ to 0.
3. Inject a single-phase current equal to 2.7 times the Iθ> threshold value into the
phase A relay current input, this corresponds to an overload ratio of K = 1.8
4. Record the operating times of both alarm and trip threshold.
Checks:
1. « θ ALARM» alarm message on the LCD display.
2. Alarm LED flashes.
3. θALARM LED flashes (if programmed).
4. Operation of the RL2 output contact (if θALARM is assigned to RL2).
5. Check RL2 operates at a time equal to «Te1. ln [1,82/(1,82 - θALARM)] ».
6. Then occurrence of « TH OVERLOAD » alarm message on the LCD display.
7. Trip LED flashes.
8. « THERM OVERLOAD » LED flashes (if programmed).
9. Operation of the trip output contact (relay RL1).
10. Check RL1 operates at a time equal to « 0.369 .Te1 ».
4.3.3 Alarm threshold θALARM test, trip threshold test, and thermal constant time Te2 test.
1. The binary input No 1 (terminals 22-24) should be kept energise during this
test.
phase A relay current input, this corresponds to an overload ratio of K = 2.6.
4. Record the operating times of both alarm threshold and trip threshold.
Checks :
1. « θ ALARM» alarm message on the LCD display.
3. θALARM LED flashes (if programmed).
4. Operation of the RL2 output contact (if θALARM is assigned to RL2).
5. Check RL2 operates at a time equal to « Te2 . ln [2.62/(2.62 - θALARM)] ».
6. Then occurrence of « TH OVERLOAD » alarm message on the LCD display.
8. « THERM OVERLOAD » LED flashes (if programmed).
9. Operation of the trip output contact (relay RL1).
10. Check RL1 operates at a time equal to « 0.160 . Te2 ».
4.3.4 Cooling down constant time Tr test.
1. The binary input No 1 (terminals 22-24) should be kept unenergise during this
test.
2. If required, inject a single phase current into the relay in order that the thermal
status θ value reaches 90%.
3. When the injected current is removed, record the θ value. Note this value θi.
4. Wait several minutes in order to give time for the thermal status to reduce to
30% (e.g. θf<60%). Record the θ value. Note this value θf. Note also the time
from when the injected current was removed.
Checks :
1. Check the time from when the injected current was removed is approximately
equal to « Tr . ln (θi / θf ) ».
CAUTION : A TIME DIFFERENCE MAY EXIST BETWEEN THE THEORETICAL TIME VALUE
AND THE TEST TIME VALUE. CONSIDERING A TR VALUE EQUAL TO 5 MN,
THE TIME DIFFERENCE IS TYPICALLY 17 SECONDS. THIS TIME DIFFERENCE
CAN EASILY REACH100 SECONDS FOR A TR VALUE EQUAL TO 60 MN.
SINCE COOLING OF THE THERMAL REPLICA FOLLOWS A LOGARITHMIC
RULE AND THE θ VALUE IS DISPLAYED IN 2 DIGITS, A CHANGE IN 1%
STEPS OF θ TAKES TIME. THIS TIME DIFFERENCE IS DUE TO THE
RESOLUTION OF THE STEP DISPLAY, NOT THE A DRIFT IN THE RELAY
ACCURACY.
4.3.5 θ FORBID START threshold test.

1. Set the θFORBID START order to an auxiliary output contact (RL3 for instance), not the
same than the one for which θALARM has been already assigned to.
2. The binary input No 1 (terminals 22-24) shall be kept not energise during this
test.
phase A relay current input, which corresponds to a K = 2.6 overload ratio. Let
the current injection during a time longer than à « Tr. ln [2.62/(2.62 – θFORBID
START)] », the θ value is greater than the θFORBID START threshold.
Checks :
1. « θ FORBIDDEN START » alarm message on the LCD display.
3. « FORBIDDEN START » LED flashes (if programmed).
4. Operation of the RL3 output contact (if θFORBIDDEN START is assigned to RL3) after a
time equal to « Tr. ln [2.62/(2.62 – θFORBID START)] ».
CAUTION : THE THERMAL BASE START INHIBITION IS SELF-RESET WHEN THE θ VALUE
FALLS UNDER THE θFORBID START THRESHOLD, SO THE CHECKING OF THE
ABOVE ITEMS SHALL BE DONE QUICKLY AFTER THE CURRENT INJECTION
STOPPAGE.
4.3.6 Numerical example

For each thermal replica test, the hereafter table mentions the operating time values
relevant to the following relay setting values :
Iθ = 1 In
Ke = 3
Te1 = Te2 = Tr = 5 mn
θALARM = 90%
θFORBID START = 60%.
Injected
current value – Theoretical Measured time
single phase time value value
current (in seconds) (in seconds)
(in Ampère)
Iθ> threshold value
θ threshold
test and constant time ALARM 2.7 (In =1A) 98 s
operating time
Te1 value test
Trip thermal threshold
Chapter « 4.3.2 » 13.5 (In=5A) 111 s
operating time
Iθ> threshold value
θ threshold
test and constant time ALARM 3.9 (In =1A) 43 s
operating time
Te1 value test
Trip thermal threshold
Chapter « 4.3.3 » 19.5 (In=5A) 48 s
operating time
Initial thermal value
Constant time Tr value
θi= 90% No injection of
test 122 s
Final thermal value θf current
Chapter « 4.3.4 »
= 60%
θFORBID START threshold
Minimum injection 3.9 (In =1A)
value test 28 s
time 19.5 (In=5A)
Chapter « 4.3.5 »
4.4 Phase overcurrent: I>>

One phase overcurrent threshold is available for the MiCOM P220 relay. Set the
threshold on the trip output.
This test wiring diagram makes it possible to conduct tests relating to the threshold.
The diagram describes current injection on the 5 Amp phase current inputs (terminals
41-42, 43-44, 45-46). To carry out injection on the 1 Amp phase inputs, perform the
same test on the 1 Amp inputs (terminals 49-50, 51-52, 53-54).
INJECTION
TEST SET
33
AUXILIARY + Vaux
- Vaux
SUPPLY 34
49
A
1A
50
51
1A
CURRENT
MiCOM
52
53
1A 1A
N
P220
54
41
A 5A
42
43
CURRENT 5A
5A 44
45
5A
N 46
37
35 Case earth
29
6 -
TIMER Stop 4
2 RL1 Trip output
* 30
12 31
+ RS 485 communication port
10
RL2 Programmable output 32
8 -
P0214ENa
FIGURE 4 - I>> TESTS WIRING

4.4.2 I>> threshold
Values to be recorded
1. l>> threshold for each phase
2. tl>> time delay for each phase
I>> threshold check:
1. If tI>> time delay is short, gradually increase the injected current up to the
value of I>> threshold.
2. If tI>> time delay is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check there is no trip.
Then inject 1.1 x I threshold and check the trip output is close.
3. Gradually decrease the injected current and note the value of the drop out of
the I>> threshold.
Checks:
1. Display of an alarm message on the front panel LCD.
4. I>> threshold LED flashes (if programmed).
5. Trip output closes.
6. I>> threshold output closes (if programmed).
tI>> time delay check :

1. Apply a current on one of the phases and measure the time delay tI>> by pre-
setting the current above the I>> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold).
2. Apply a current on one of the phases and measure the time delay tI>> by pre-
setting the current above the I>> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).
4.5 Earth overcurrent : Io>, Io>>
Two earth overcurrent thresholds are available in the MiCOM P220 relays. Each
threshold is adjusted independently. Set the various thresholds on the trip output.
This test wiring diagram makes it possible to conduct tests relating to the Io> and
Io>> thresholds.
The diagram describes current injection on the 5 Amp earth current input (terminals
47-48). To carry out injection on the 1 Amp earth input, perform the same test on the
1 Amp input (terminals 55-56).
INJECTION
TEST SET
33
AUXILIARY + Vaux
SUPPLY - Vaux 34
A
P1 S1
CURRENT 55
1A
1A 56
P2 S2 MiCOM
N
A
P220
P1 S1
CURRENT 47
5A
5A 48
P2 S2
N 37
35
WD Watchdog powered on Case earth
36
29
6 -
30
TIMER Stop
4
RL1 Trip output *
2
12 31
10
8
-
P0215ENa
FIGURE 5 - IO> AND IO>> TESTS WIRING

4.5.2 Io> threshold

Values to be recorded :
1. Io> threshold
2. Time delay tIo>.
Io> threshold check:
1. If the time delay tIo> is short, gradually increase the injection current up to the
value of the Io> threshold.
2. If the time delay tIo> is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check that there is no
tripping. Then inject 1.1 x I threshold and check the trip.
3. Gradually decrease the injected current and record the value of the drop out
Io> threshold.
Checks :
1. Alarm message on the LCD display.
4. Io> threshold LED flashes (if programmed).
6. Io> threshold output closes (if programmed).
tIo> time delay check :
1. Apply a current on the earth input and measure the time delay tIo> by pre-
setting the current above the Io> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold).
2. Apply a current on the earth input and measure the time delay tIo> by pre-
setting the current above the Io> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).
4.5.3 Io>> threshold
Values to be recorded
1. lo>> threshold
2. tlo>> time delay.
Io>> threshold check : .
1. If tIo>> time delay is short, gradually increase the injected current up to the
value of Io>> threshold.
2. If tIo>> time delay is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check there is no trip.
Then inject 1.1 x I threshold and check the trip output is closed.
3. Gradually decrease the injected current and note the value of the drop out
Io>> threshold.
Checks :
1. Display of an alarm message on the front panel LCD.
4. Io>> threshold LED flashes (if programmed).
6. Io>> threshold output closes (if programmed).
tIo>> time delay check : .
1. Apply a current on to the earth and measure the time delay tIo>> by pre-
setting the current above the Io>> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold).
2. Apply a current on to the earth and measure the time delay tIo>> by pre-
setting the current above the Io>> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).
4.6 Negative phase sequence threshold(46)
Two overcurrent thresholds based on the negative sequence component are available
in the MiCOM P220 relays. Each threshold is adjusted independently. The threshold
I2> has a definite time characteristic while the second threshold I2>> is associated
with an IDMT characteristic.
Set the various thresholds on the trip output.
This test wiring diagram makes it possible to conduct tests relating to the I2> and
I2>> thresholds.
The diagram describes current injection on the 5 Amp earth current input (terminals
41-42). To carry out injection on the 1 Amp earth input, perform the same test on the
1Amp input (terminals 49-50).
INJECTION
TEST SET
33
AUXILIARY + Vaux
- Vaux
SUPPLY 34
49
A
1A
N 50
51
CURRENT
MiCOM
52
53
1A
P220
54
41
A 5A
N 42
43
CURRENT
5A 44
45
46
37
35
Case earth
29
6 -
TIMER Stop 4
2 RL1 Trip output
* 30
12 31
10
8 -
P0216ENa
FIGURE 6 - I2> AND I2>> TESTS WIRING

Reminder: the MiCOM P220 relay calculates the negative phase sequence
component using the formula:
I2 = 1/3 (Ia + a2 Ib + a Ic)
With a = cos (2/3) + j sin (2/3)
With a single phase injection such as the proposed figure 5: Ib = 0 and Ic = 0
And thus I2 = 1/3 Ia
In this case, the negative sequence current measured by the MiCOM P220 is equal to
one third of the injected current.
4.6.2 I2> threshold
Values to be recorded:
1. I2> threshold
2. Time delay tI2>.
I2> threshold check:
1. If the time delay tI2> is short, gradually increase the injected current up to the
value of the I2> threshold.
2. If the time delay tIo> is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check that there is no
tripping. Then inject 1.1 x I threshold and check the trip.
3. Gradually decrease the injected current and record the value of the drop out
I2> threshold.
Checks:
4. I2> threshold LED flashes (if programmed).
6. I2> threshold output closes (if programmed).
tI2> time delay check:
1. Apply a current on to the earth input and measure the time delay tI2> by pre-
setting the current above the I2> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold).
2. Apply a current on to the earth input and measure the time delay tI2> by pre-
setting the current above the I2> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).
4.6.3 I2>> threshold
Values to be recorded:
1. I2>> threshold
2. Time delay tI2>>.
I2>> threshold check:

Inject a current equal to 2 x I threshold on one of the phase current inputs. Repeat the
operation for various current values (n x I threshold with n ranging from 4 to 10, for
example). Check that the values measured correspond to the following formula:
Operating time t = 1.2/ (I2 / I threshold).
Checks:
4. I2>> threshold LED flashes (if programmed).
6. I2>> threshold output closes (if programmed).
tI2>> time delay check:
1. Apply a current onto the earth input and measure the time delay tI2>> by pre-
setting the current above the I2>> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold).
2. Apply a current onto the earth input and measure the time delay tI2>> by pre-
setting the current above the I2>> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).
4.7 Automation functions
The MiCOM P220 relay has several automation functions (refer to the User Guide)
The use of these functions is optional.
4.7.1 Latching of relay outputs
All output relays of MiCOM P220 can be kept closed after the fault has disappeared
(Relay Latching function in the AUTOMATION menu).
The following test is suggested for the tIo>> threshold on the tripping output.
The other thresholds and output relays can be tested identically.
Set tIo>> threshold on the trip output with the relay latched. Leave the other
threshold tIo> not latched.
4.7.2 Wiring diagram

This wiring diagram makes it possible to conduct the test relating to the trip output
latch on the tIo>> threshold. The diagram describes current injection on the 5 Amp
earth current input (terminals 47-48). To carry out an injection on the 1 Amp earth
input, perform the same tests on the earth 1 Amp input (terminals 55-56).
INJECTION
TEST SET
33
AUXILIARY + Vaux
SUPPLY - Vaux 34
13
SWITCH 15
L3 Binary input 3
A
P1 S1
MiCOM
55
CURRENT 1A
1A 56
P2 S2 P220
N
A
P1 S1
CURRENT 47
5A
5A 48
P2 S2
37
35 Case earth
N 36 WD Watchdog powered on
29
6 -
30
TIMER Stop 4
RL1 Trip output
*
2
31
32
-
P0217ENa
FIGURE 7 - LATCHING TEST SCHEME FOR tIO>>

Trip output latched check
1. Inject a current equal to 1.2 x I threshold Io>> on the earth input and check
that the trip output relay is closed after tIo>>time delay.
2. Gradually decrease the current down to zero and check that the trip output
relay is still closed.
3. Reinitialise the trip output relay either by clearing the alarm message (alarm
menu) or by activation of the Logic Input 3 (Terminals 22-24).
Checks
1. Display of an alarm message on the front panel LCD
4. Trip output relay closes.
5. Trip output relay opens after alarm message cleared.
4.8 Commissioning parameters data base

The various parameters shown below make possible to test functions of MiCOM P220
relays according to the commissioning tests (see section 4). Settings in accordance
with the commissioning tests only are given.
4.8.1 PROTECTION Menu
THERMAL OVERLOAD FUNCTION ? NO/YES*

θ INHIBIT ? NO
Iθ> 1 In
Ke 3
Te1 5 mn
Te2 5 mn
Tr 5 mn
RTD1 INFLUENCE ? NO
θ ALARM ? YES
θ ALARM 90%
θ FORBID START ? YES
θ FORBID START 60%
I>> FUNCTION ? NO/YES*
I>> 1 In
tI>> 20 s
Io> FUNCTION ? NO/YES*
Io> 0.1 Ion
tIo> 20 s
Io>> FUNCTION ? NO/YES*
Io>> 1 Ion
tIo>> 10 s
I2> FUNCTION ? NO/YES*
I2> 0.2 In
tI2> 20 s
I2>> FUNCTION ? NO/YES*
I2>> 0.5 In
* During the commissioning tests, all the protective functions shall be preferably set
off (NO) excepted the one which is being tested.
4.8.2 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu
TRIP THERM OVERLOAD ? YES (Trip order via output RL1)

TRIP tI>> YES (Trip order via output RL1)
TRIP tIo> YES (Trip order via output RL1)
TRIP tIo>> YES (Trip order via output RL1)
TRIP tI2> YES (Trip order via output RL1)
TRIP tI2> YES (Trip order via output RL1)
θ ALARM 0001 (allocation to output RL2)
θ FORBID START 0010 (allocation to output RL3)
LATCH tI>> NO
LATCH tIo>> YES
LATCH tI2>> NO
INPUT 3 EXT RESET
5. INTRODUCTION
The MiCOM P220 Motor protection relays are fully numerical in design,
implementing all protection and non-protection functions in software. The relays
employ a high degree of self-checking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will give
an alarm. As a result of this, the maintenance does not need to be as extensive as
with non-numerical electronic or electro-mechanical relays.
As soon as an internal fault is detected , depending on its type (minor or major), an
alarm message is displayed as a priority on the front panel LCD before the fault LED
is illuminated (fixed or flashing) and the watchdog relay is closed (if the fault is a
major one).
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER
SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE ‘HANDLING AND
SAFETY’ SECTION
6. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
It is recommended that products supplied by Schneider Electric receive regular
monitoring after installation. As with all products some deterioration with time is
inevitable. In view of the critical nature of protective relays and their infrequent
operation, it is desirable to confirm that they are operating correctly at regular
intervals.
Schneider Electric protective relays are designed for a life in excess of 20 years.
MiCOM P220 relays are self-supervising and so require less maintenance than
earlier designs of relay. Most problems will result in an alarm so that remedial action
can be taken. However, some periodical tests should be done to ensure that the relay
is functioning correctly and the external wiring is intact.
If a Preventative Maintenance Policy exists within the customer’s organisation then the
recommended product checks should be included in the regular programme.
Maintenance periods will depend on many factors, such as:
• the operating environment
• the accessibility of the site
• the amount of available manpower
• the importance of the installation in the power system
• the consequences of failure
7. MAINTENANCE CHECKS
Although some functionality checks can be performed from a remote location by
utilising the communications ability of the relays, these are predominantly restricted to
checking that the relay is measuring the applied currents accurately and checking the
circuit breaker maintenance counters. Therefore it is recommended that maintenance
checks are performed locally (i.e. at the plant itself).
7.1 Alarms
The alarm status LED should first be checked to identify if any alarm conditions exist.
If so, press the read key ! repeatedly to step through the alarms. Clear the alarms to
extinguish the LED.
7.2 Opto-isolators
The opto-isolated inputs can be checked to ensure that the relay responds on
energisation using the DC auxiliary supply specified on the product.
This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs are functioning correctly. The P220
relay has 5 opto-isolated inputs.
The opto-isolated inputs should be energised one at a time. Ensuring correct polarity,
connect the DC auxiliary supply to the appropriate terminals for the input being
tested.
The status of each opto-isolated input can be viewed using the “OP.PARAMETERS“
menu.
The opto-isolated input terminal allocations are given in the following Table:
DC auxiliary supply to terminals

INPUT OP.PARAMETRS/INPUT value
-Vaux +Vaux
Opto input 1 22 24 0 0 0 0 1
Opto input 2 26 28 0 0 0 1 0
Opto input 3 13 15 0 0 1 0 0
Opto input 4 17 19 0 1 0 0 0
Opto input 5 21 23 1 0 0 0 0
7.3 Output Relays

This test checks that all the output relays are functioning correctly. The P220 relay has
6 output relays including the watchdog relay.
Connect a continuity tester across the terminals corresponding to output relay 1 given
in the following Table:
Monitor terminals
Output OP.PARAMETERS/OUTPUTS value
N/C N/O
RL1 2-4 2-6 0 0 0 0 1
RL2 8-10 8-12 0 0 0 1 0
RL3 14-16 14-18 0 0 1 0 0
RL4 1-3 1-5 0 1 0 0 0
RL5 7-9 7-11 1 0 0 0 0
8. METHOD OF REPAIR
If the relay should develop a fault whilst in service, depending on the type of the fault,
the watchdog contacts will change state and an alarm condition will be flagged.
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER
SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE ‘HANDLING AND SAFETY’ SECTION. THIS
SHOULD ENSURE THAT NO DAMAGE IS CAUSED BY INCORRECT
HANDLING OF THE ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.
The method is to replace the withdrawable part, but if it is necessary to replace the
complete relay (with the case):
BEFORE WORKING AT THE REAR OF THE RELAY, ISOLATE ALL VOLTAGE
AND CURRENT SUPPLIES TO THE RELAY.
DISCONNECT THE RELAY EARTH CONNECTION FROM THE REAR OF THE
RELAY
NOTE: The case and rear terminal blocks have been designed to
facilitate removal of the relay should replacement or repair
become necessary without having to disconnect the scheme
wiring.
The MiCOM range of relays have integral current transformer
shorting switches which will close when the withdrawable part is
removed.
Upper flap
Lower flap
P0218ENb
NOTE: The use of a magnetic bladed screwdriver is recommended to

minimise the risk of the screws being left in the terminal block or
lost.
REMOVE THE SCREWS USED TO FASTEN THE RELAY TO THE PANEL, RACK,
ETC. THESE ARE THE SCREWS WITH THE LARGER DIAMETER HEADS THAT
ARE ACCESSIBLE WHEN THE UPPER AND LOWER FLAPS ARE OPEN.
WITHDRAW THE RELAY FROM THE PANEL, RACK, ETC. CAREFULLY
BECAUSE IT WILL BE HEAVY DUE TO THE INTERNAL TRANSFORMERS.
To reinstall the repaired or replacement relay, follow the above instructions in
reverse, ensuring that each terminal block is relocated in the correct position and the
case earth is replaced.
9. CHANGING THE BATTERY

Each relay has a battery to maintain status data and the correct time when the
auxiliary supply voltage fails. The data maintained includes event, fault and
disturbance records and the thermal state at the time of failure.
Instructions for Replacing the Battery
Open the bottom flap on the front of the relay.
Gently extract the battery from its socket. If necessary, use a small screwdriver to prize
the battery free.
Ensure that the metal terminals in the battery socket are free from corrosion, grease
and dust.
The replacement battery should be removed from its packaging and placed into the
battery holder, taking care to ensure that the polarity markings on the battery agree
with those adjacent to the socket.
NOTE: Only use a type ½AA Lithium battery with a nominal voltage of
3.6V.
Ensure that the battery is securely held in its socket and that the battery terminals are
making good contact with the metal terminals of the socket.
Close the bottom access cover.
Battery Disposal
The battery that has been removed should be disposed of in accordance with the
disposal procedure for Lithium batteries in the country in which the relay is installed.
10. TYPES OF FAULTS

10.1 Equipment failure
An equipment failure (major or minor) cannot be acknowledged on the front panel
(using the dedicated tactile button keypad). Only the disappearance of the cause will
acknowledge the fault and hence reset the fault LED.
10.1.1 Minor faults
Regarded by the MiCOM P220 relay as a minor fault is a communication failure. If
communications are weak, MiCOM P220 protection and automation modules are
not affected.
Message :
Communication fault
Cause :
Hardware or software failure of the communication module
Action :
Withdraw the active part and return it to the factory for repair.
Alternative : If communication is not used, declare communication OFF in the
COMMUNICATION menu (COM. OK = NO).
10.1.2 Major faults
Major faults for MiCOM P220 relays are all software and hardware failures except
the communication faults. As soon as this type of failure is detected, the watchdog
(WD) is closed (36-37 terminals) and all operations are stopped (protection,
automation, communication).
10.1.2.1 Hardware faults
Messages :
EEPROM failure
Cause :
Hardware failure (EEPROM components)
Action :
Withdraw the active part and return it to the factory for repair.
10.1.2.2 Software faults
Messages :
Software fault
Cause :
Failure of the software (checksum incorrect for example)
Action :
Restart the protection software
If the software fault still remain after restart, withdraw the active part and return the
module to the factory for repair.
10.2 Problem solving

10.2.1 Password lost or not accepted
Problem :
Password lost or not accepted
Cause :
MiCOM P220 relay is supplied with the password set to AAAA.
This password can be changed by the user (refer to the OP PARAMETERS menu).
Action :
There is an additional unique recovery password associated to the relay which can be
supplied by the factory or service agent, if given details of its serial number (under the
upper flap of the front panel). With this serial number, contact your Schneider Electric
local dealer or the Schneider Electric After Sales Department.
10.2.2 Communication
10.2.2.1 Values measured locally and remotely
Problem :
The measurements noted remotely and locally (via RS485 communication) differ.
Cause :
The values accessible on the front panel via the Measurement menu are refreshed
every second. Those fed back via the communication and accessible by the
Schneider Electric Setting software generally have skeletal refreshing frequencies. If
the refreshing frequency of the supervision software differs from that of the MiCOM
P220 relay (1s), there may be a difference between indicated values.
Action:
Adjust the frequency for refreshing the measurements of the supervision software or
of the setting software to 1 second.
10.2.2.2 MiCOM relay no longer responds
Problem :
No response from MiCOM P220 relay when asked by the supervision software
without any communication fault message.
Cause :
Normally, this type of problem is linked to an error in the MiCOM P220
communication parameters.
Action :
Check that the MiCOM P220 communication parameters (data rate, parity, etc.) are
in accordance with the supervision settings.
Check the MiCOM P220 network address.
Check that this address is not used by another device connected on the same
LAN.Check that the other devices on the same LAN answer to supervision requests.
11. LIST OF THE RELAY ALARM MESSAGES
Heading of the HARDW ALARMS messages, default

HARDW ALARMS display in case of either relay error alarm or
RTDs/thermistor failure.
To display the alarms messages, press the ! key.
Communication error (communication using the rear

COMM. ERROR RS485 port).
EEPROM memory error.

EEPROM ERROR
DATA
EEPROM calibration error.

EEPROM ERROR
CALIBR.
Analog signal acquisition error.

CT ERROR
Internal clock error.

CLOCK ERROR
RAM memory error.

RAM ERROR
Analog output error.

ANA OUTPUT
ERROR
RTD or thermistor in failure (short-wiring or open

RTD / Therm
circuit)
ERROR
12. LIST OF THE MOTOR ALARM MESSAGES
Heading of the MOTOR ALARMS messages, default

MOTOR ALARMS display in case of motor alarm. To display the alarms
messages, press the ! key.
Operation of the « thermal overload » function.

TH OVERLOAD
“Thermal alarm” element active : θALARM (self-

θ ALARM resettable)
“Start inhibition based on thermal cirterion” active (self

θ FORBIDDEN
resettable)
START
Operation of the « short-circuit » function : time

t I >>
delayed element tI>>.
PHASE
Display of the faulty phase.
Operation of the « earth fault » function : time delayed

t I0> element t I0>
Operation of the « earth fault » function : time delayed

t I0>> element t I0>>
Operation of the « unbalance » function : time delayed

t Ii> element tIi>
Operation of the « unbalance » function : time delayed

t Ii>> element tIi>>
Operation of the « excessive start tim » function : time

LONG START
delayed element tIstart
tIstart
Operation of the « stalled rotor while running »

MECHAN JAM
function : time delayed element tIstall
tIstall
Operation of the « locked rotor at start » function

LOCKED
ROTOR
Operation of the « loss of load » function : time

t I<
delayed element t I<
PHASE
Display the faulty phase
Operation of the RTD1 temperature alarm element :

t RTD1 ALAR time delayed element tALARM RTD1 (self-resettable)
Operation of the RTD1 temperature trip element : time

t RTD1 trip delayed element tDECL RTD1
…and so on for RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5 and RTD6
Operation of the Thermist1 temperature element

Thermist 1
Operation of the Thermist2 temperature element

Thermist 2
Start inhibition based on the « limitation of starts

START NB
number » function active (self resettable)
LIMIT
Start inhibition based on the “minimum time between 2

T between
starts” function active . (self-resettable).
2 start
Authorised motor reacceleration sequence in progress

RE-ACCELER
(self-resettable)
AUTHOR
Operation of the auxiliary timer EXT 1.

EXT 1
Operation of the auxiliary timer EXT 2.

EXT 2
And logic equation A active

EQUATION A …and so on for the AND logic equations B, C and D
Circuit breaker operating time has reached (or it has

OPERATING
exceeded) the « SW OPERATING TIME» time threshold.
TIME SW
Circuit breaker operation number has reached (or it

OPERATION
has exceeded) the « SW OPERATION NB » threshold.
NB SW
The sum of amperesn has reached (or it has exceeded)

SA2N the « SAn » threshold.
To clear all the alarms, press the " key.

CLEAR ALL ALARMS
Information issued from an element which has been

LATCHING RELAYS affected to a latched relay.
BLANK PAGE
Technical Guide P220/EN RS/B43
MiCOM P220
Test Report
Test Report
CONTENT
1. TEST REPORT 3
1.1 Relay reference 3
2. PRODUCTS CHECKS 4
2.1 Relay "OFF" 4

2.1.1 Visual inspection 4
2.1.2 External wiring 4
2.1.3 Insulation resistor > 100MΩ at 500Vdc 4
2.1.4 Watchdog contact (auxiliary supply off) 4
2.1.5 Auxiliary supply measured 4
2.2 Relay "ON" 4
2.2.1 Watchdog contact (auxiliary supply off) 4
2.2.2 LEDs 4
2.2.3 Logic Inputs 4
2.2.4 Output relays 5
2.2.5 Rear communication port 5
3. SETTINGS 6
3.1 EXPLOITATION menu 6

3.2 CONFIGURATION menu 6
3.2.1 CONFIG. SELECT submenu 6
3.2.2 CT RATIO submenu 6
3.2.3 LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus 6
3.2.4 Submenus CONFIGURATION INPUTS 7
3.3 COMMUNICATION menu 7
3.3.1 MODBUSTM 7
3.3.2 Courier 7
3.4 PROTECTION G1 and G2 menus 8
3.4.1 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu 8
3.4.2 [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu 8
3.4.3 [50/51] EARTH FAULT submenu 8
3.4.4 [46] UNBALANCE submenu 8
3.4.5 [48] EXCES LONG START submenu 9
3.4.6 [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu 9
3.4.7 [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu 9
3.4.8 [49/38] RTD submenu (optional) 9
3.4.9 [49] THERMISTOR submenu (optional) 10
P220/EN RS/B43 Technical Guide
Test Report
3.5 AUTOMAT. CTRL menu 10

3.5.1 [66] START NUMBER submenu 10
3.5.2 MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu 10
3.5.3 REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu 10
3.5.4 INPUTS submenu 11
3.5.5 AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu 11
3.5.6 AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu 12
3.5.7 AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu 12
3.5.8 LATCHING OUTPUT RELAYS 14
3.5.9 TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu 14
3.5.10 LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu 14
3.5.11 SW SUPERVISION submenu 15
3.6 CONSIGNATION menu 15
3.6.1 DISTURB RECORD submenu 15
Test Report
1. TEST REPORT
Commissioning date: ____________________________________
Motor reference: ____________________________________
Circuit-breaker/Fuse-contactor reference: ____________________________________
1.1 Relay reference
MiCOM relay type P220

Serial number
Earth current setting range
Auxiliary voltage supply
Communication protocol
Language
Have you already read the security instructions ? Yes/No*
*
Delete as appropriate
Test Report
2. PRODUCTS CHECKS
2.1 Relay "OFF"
2.1.1 Visual inspection
Damaged relay ? Yes/No *

Nominal values conform to installation ? Yes/No *
Relay earth connection (connected)? Yes/No *
2.1.2 External wiring
Wiring controlled according to scheme ? Yes/No *

Test unit connection (verified) ? Yes/No/No used *
2.1.3 Insulation resistor > 100MΩ at 500Vdc
Yes/No/ No Tested*
2.1.4 Watchdog contact (auxiliary supply off)
Terminal 35 - 36 Closed contact ? Yes/No *

Contact resistance --------Ω / No measured
Terminal 36 - 37 Open contact ? Yes/No *
2.1.5 Auxiliary supply measured
----------Vac/ dc *
2.2 Relay "ON"
2.2.1 Watchdog contact (auxiliary supply off)
Terminal 35 - 36 Open contact ? Yes/No *

Terminal 36 - 37 Closed contact ? Yes/No *
Contact resistance --------Ω / No measured
2.2.2 LEDs
HEALTHY LED (GREEN) is ON Yes/No *

ALARM LED (YELLOW) is ON Yes/No *
WD LED (ORANGE) is ON Yes/No *
TRIP LED (RED) is ON Yes/No *
Programmable LED correct functioning Yes/No *
2.2.3 Logic Inputs
Correct functioning of isolated opto inputs 1 to 5 Yes/No *
*
Test Report
2.2.4 Output relays
Relay 1 (RL1) Correct functioning Yes/No *

Contact resistance N/C --------Ω / No measured *
N/O --------Ω / No measured *
2.2.5 Rear communication port
Communication standard K-Bus / Courier *

Modbus *
CEI 60870-5-103 *
Communication present Yes/No *
Protocol Converter Tested Yes/No/ No used *
*
Test Report
3. SETTINGS
3.1 EXPLOITATION menu
Password
Reference
Frequency Hz
Date
Hour
3.2 CONFIGURATION menu

3.2.1 CONFIG. SELECT submenu
Change group input

Setting group
Default display
Start detection criterion
Analogue output type (optional)
Value transmitted by the analogue output (optional)
RTD type (optional)
Thermistor 1 type (optional)
Thermistor 2 type (optional)
3.2.2 CT RATIO submenu
Primary rating of the phase CT

Secondary rating of the phase CT
Primary rating of the earth CT
Secondary rating of the earth CT
3.2.3 LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus

Allocation : Thermal overload
Allocation : Thermal alarm θ ALARM
Allocation : tI>>
Allocation : tIo>
Allocation : tIo>>
Allocation : tIi>
Allocation : tIi>>
Allocation : tI<
Allocation : Excessive long start
Test Report

Allocation : tIstall (stalled rotor while running)
Allocation : Locked rotor (at start)
Allocation : Emergency restart
Allocation : Forbidden start
Allocation : tALARM RTD1, tALARM RTD2, tALARM RTD3 (optional)
Allocation : tTRIP RTD1, tTRIP RTD2, tTRIP RTD3 (optional)
Allocation : tALARM RTD4, tALARM RTD5, tALARM RTD6 (optional)
Allocation : tTRIP RTD4, tTRIP RTD5, tTRIP RTD6 (optional)
Allocation : Thermist 1 and Thermist 2 (optional)
Allocation : EXT 1
Allocation : EXT 2
Allocation : Motor Stopped
Allocation : Motor running
Allocation : Successful start
3.2.4 Submenus CONFIGURATION INPUTS
EL 54321
3.3 COMMUNICATION menu

3.3.1 MODBUSTM
Communication enabled ? (Yes/No)

Data rate Bauds
Parity
Number of data bits
Number of stop bits
Relay address
Date format
3.3.2 Courier
Communication enabled ? (Yes/No)

Relay address
Test Report
3.4 PROTECTION G1 and G2 menus

3.4.1 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu
Thermal overload function enabled ? (Yes/No) (Yes/No)
« Thermal inhibition on starting » function (Yes/No) (Yes/No)
enabled ?
Threshold Iθ> In In
Ke
Te1 mn mn
Te2 Te1 Te1
Tr Te1 Te1
Influence RTD (optional) (Yes/No) (Yes/No)
Thermal alarm enabled ? (Yes/No) (Yes/No)
Thermal alarm θALARM threshold % %
Thermal forbidden start function enabled ? (Yes/No) (Yes/No)
θ FORDID START threshold % %
3.4.2 [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu
Short-circuit function enabled ? (Yes/No) (Yes/No)
Threshold I>> In In
tI>>
3.4.3 [50/51] EARTH FAULT submenu
Io> element of the earth fault function (Yes/No) (Yes/No)
enabled ?
Threshold Io> In In
tIo>
Io>> element of the earth fault function (Yes/No) (Yes/No)
enabled ?
Threshold Io>> In In
tIo>>
3.4.4 [46] UNBALANCE submenu
Ii> element of the unbalance function (Yes/No) (Yes/No)
enabled ?
Threshold Ii> In In
tIi>
Ii>> element of the unbalance function (Yes/No) (Yes/No)
enabled ?
Threshold Ii>> In In
Test Report
3.4.5 [48] EXCES LONG START submenu
Excessive long start function enabled ? (Yes/No) (Yes/No)
Threshold Istart Iθ Iθ
tIstart
3.4.6 [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu
PROTECTION G1 PROTECTION G 2
Block rotor function enabled ? (Yes/No) (Yes/No)
tIstall
Stalled rotor function enabled ? (Yes/No) (Yes/No)
Threshold Istall Iθ Iθ
Locked rotor at start function enabled ? (Yes/No) (Yes/No)
3.4.7 [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu
Loss of load function enabled ? (Yes/No) (Yes/No)
Threshold I< In In
tI<
Tinhib
3.4.8 [49/38] RTD submenu (optional)
RTD1 enabled ? (Yes/No) (Yes/No)
RTD1 ALARM °C °C
tALARM RTD1
RTD1 TRIP °C °C
tTRIP RTD1
RTD2 ALARM °C °C
tALARM RTD2
RTD2 TRIP °C °C
tTRIP RTD2
RTD3 ALARM °C °C
tALARM RTD3
RTD3 TRIP °C °C
tTRIP RTD3
Test Report
RTD4 ALARM °C °C
tALARM RTD4
RTD4 TRIP °C °C
tTRIP RTD4
RTD5 ALARM °C °C
tALARM RTD5
RTD5 TRIP °C °C
tTRIP RTD5
RTD6 ALARM °C °C
tALARM RTD6
RTD6 TRIP °C °C
TTRIP RTD6
3.4.9 [49] THERMISTOR submenu (optional)
Thermistor 1 enabled (Yes/No) (Yes/No)
Thermist 1 kΩ kΩ
Thermistor 2 enabled (Yes/No) (Yes/No)
Thermist 2 kΩ kΩ
3.5 AUTOMAT. CTRL menu

3.5.1 [66] START NUMBER submenu
Start Number Limitation function eneabled ? (Yes/No)

Treference mn
Cold start number
Hot start number
Tinterdiction mn
3.5.2 MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu
Time Between Start function enabled ? (Yes/No)

tbetw 2 starts mn
3.5.3 REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu
Reacceleration authorization function enabled ? (Yes/No)

Treacc
Test Report
3.5.4 INPUTS submenu
Allocation : input n°3

t EXT 1
t EXT 2
t EXT 3
t EXT 4
3.5.5 AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu
D C B A
Allocation : θ FORBID START
Allocation : I>>
Allocation : tI>>
Allocation : Io>
Allocation : tIo>
Allocation : Io>>
Allocation : tIo>>
Allocation : tIi>
Allocation : tIi>>
Allocation : tI<
Allocation : Start Nb Limitation
Allocation : Tbetw 2 starts
Allocation : t ALARM RTD1 (optional)
Allocation : tTRIP RTD1 (optional)
Allocation : tALARM RTD2 (optional)
Test Report
D C B A
Allocation : Thermist 1 (optional)
Allocation : EXT 1
Allocation : EXT 2
Allocation : EXT 3
Allocation : EXT 4
3.5.6 AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu
EQU. A Toperat
EQU. A Treset
EQU. B Toperat
EQU. B Treset
EQU. C Toperat
EQU. C Treset
EQU. D Toperat
EQU. D Treset
3.5.7 AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu
5 4 3 2
Allocation : θ FORBID START
Allocation : I>>
Allocation : tI>>
Allocation : Io>
Allocation : tIo>
Allocation : Io>>
Allocation : tIo>>
Allocation : tIi>
Allocation : tIi>>
Allocation : tI<
Test Report
5 4 3 2
Allocation : Start Nb Limitation
Allocation : Tbetw 2 starts
Allocation : t ALARM RTD1 (optional)
Allocation : EXT 1
Allocation : EXT 2
Allocation : EXT 3
Allocation : EXT 4
Allocation : Close order
Allocation : Trip order
Allocation : order 1
Allocation : order 2
Allocation : t EQU. A
Allocation : t EQU. B
Allocation : t EQU. C
Allocation : t EQU. D
Allocation : SW Operating Time
Allocation : SW Operation Nb
Allocation : S A n
Allocation : active group
Test Report
3.5.8 LATCHING OUTPUT RELAYS
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT 5
3.5.9 TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu
Allocation output relay n°1 : Thermal overload (Yes/No)

Allocation output relay n°1 : tI>> (Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n°1 : tIo> (Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n°1 : tIo>> (Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n°1 : tIi> (Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n°1 : tIi>> (Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n°1 : Excessive long start (Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n°1 : tIstall (stalled rotor while (Yes/No)
running)
Allocation output relay n°1 : Locked rotor (at start) (Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n°1 : tI< (Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n°1 : tTRIP RTD1 (optional) (Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n°1 : Thermist 1 (optional) (Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n°1 : Thermist 2 (optional) (Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n°1 : EXT 1 (Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n°1 : EXT 2 (Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n°1 : Equation A (Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n°1 : Equation B (Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n°1 : Equation C (Yes/No)
Allocation output relay n°1 : Equation D (Yes/No)
3.5.10 LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu
Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH tI>> (Yes/No)

Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH tIo>> (Yes/No)
Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH tIi>> (Yes/No)
Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH equa A (Yes/No)
Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH equa B (Yes/No)
Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH equa C (Yes/No)
Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH equa D (Yes/No)
Test Report
3.5.11 SW SUPERVISION submenu
SW Operating Time function enabled ? (Yes/No)

SW Operating Time
SW Operation Number function enabled ? (Yes/No)
SW Operation Number
S A n function enabled ? (Yes/No)
SAn
Exponent n value
t Trip
t Close
3.6 CONSIGNATION menu

3.6.1 DISTURB RECORD submenu
Pre-Time
Post-Time
Disturbance Record Trig
Test Report
BLANK PAGE
© 2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider Electric
Publication: P220/EN T/C43 11/2010

Micom P220: P220/En T/C43

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Micom P220: P220/En T/C43

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Micom P220: P220/En T/C43

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MiCOM P220

MiCOM P220 Page 1/2

Safety Section Pxxxx/EN SS/G11

Getting Started P220/EN GS/B43

Connection Diagram P220/EN CO/C43

Technical Data P220/EN TD/B43

Application Guide P220/EN AP/B43

User Guide P220/EN FT/B43

Menu of the HMI P220/EN HI/B43

Communication P220/EN GC/B43

Default Setting Value P220/EN SV/B43

Installation Guide P220/EN IN/B43

Commissioning and Maintenance P220/EN CM/B43

Test Report P220/EN RS/B43

Page 2/2 MiCOM P220

Safety Section Page 1/8

STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS AND EXTERNAL

2. HEALTH AND SAFETY 3

3. SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT 4

5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL 7

6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY 8

Page 2/8 Safety Section

Safety Section Page 3/8

2. HEALTH AND SAFETY

• Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

Page 4/8 Safety Section

3. SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

Caution: refer to equipment documentation Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth)

*NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS GUIDE IS THE

4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Safety Section Page 5/8

Page 6/8 Safety Section

UL and CSA/CUL Listed or Recognized equipment

Safety Section Page 7/8

External test blocks and test plugs

5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

Page 8/8 Safety Section

6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

6.2 Protective Class

IEC 60255-27: 2005 Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment

6.3 Installation Category

IEC 60255-27: 2005 Installation Category III (Overvoltage Category III):

1. RECEPTION OF THE PRODUCT 3

1.1 Reception of the relay 3

2. HANDLING ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT 3

3. INSTALLING THE RELAYS 4

6. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM P220 5

6.1 MiCOM series relay 5

8. STARTING THE MiCOM P220 IN 5 MINUTES 11

8.1 Check the wiring of your installation 11

9. COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION 22

1. RECEPTION OF THE PRODUCT

2. HANDLING ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

3. INSTALLING THE RELAYS

6. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM P220

6.2 MiCOM P220 Functions

Function MiCOM P220

6.3 Front view

Protective Conductor (Earth) terminal Functional/Protective Conductor (Earth)